PDF DOWNLOAD John Deere 350GLC Excavator Operator's Manual OMT351368X19 by www.heydownloads.com

350GLC Excavator

*OMT351368X19*

(PIN: 1FF350GX_ _F809192— )

OPERATOR'S MANUAL 350GLC Excavator (PIN: 1FF350GX_ _F809192— ) OMT351368X19 ISSUE F7

(ENGLISH)

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. If this product contains a gasoline engine:

WARNING The engine exhaust from this product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. The State of California requires the above two warnings. Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.

Worldwide Construction And Forestry Division PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Introduction Foreword READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate and service machine correctly. Personal injury or equipment damage can result if manual is not read. This manual and safety signs on the machine may also be available in other languages; see an authorized John Deere dealer to order. THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent part of the machine and should remain with machine when machine is sold. MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench. RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by facing in the direction of forward travel. WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.) in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all the numbers to help in tracing the machine if machine is ever stolen. A dealer also needs these numbers when parts are ordered. File the identification numbers in a secure place off machine.

WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support program for customers who operate and maintain their equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is explained on the warranty certificate or statement which should have been received from the dealer. This warranty provides the assurance that John Deere backs the products where defects appear within the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere also provides field improvements, often without charge to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty. Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change its performance beyond the original factory specifications, the warranty will become void and field improvements may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications or otherwise overpowering machines results in such action. If current owner is not the original owner of this machine, contact an authorized John Deere dealer to inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John Deere notify current owner of any issues or product improvements. VD76477,00004EB -19-07JUL15-1/1

061517

PN=2

Introduction

Manual Identification—READ THIS FIRST!

TX1156411 —UN—27MAR14

IMPORTANT: Use only supporting manuals designated for your specific machine. If incorrect manual is chosen, improper service may occur. Verify product identification number (PIN) when choosing the correct manual. Choosing the Correct Supporting Manuals John Deere excavators are available in different machine configurations based on the various markets into which they are sold. Different supporting manuals exist for different machine configurations. When necessary, product identification numbers are listed on the front covers of excavator manuals. These numbers are used to identify the correct supporting manual for your machine.

The product identification number (PIN) plate (1) is located on the front, right corner of the cab. Each machine has a 17-character PIN (2) shown on PIN plate.

JOHN DEERE Product Identification Number *1FF350GXJDF809192*

EXCAVATOR 350G DEERE & COMPANY, MOLINE, ILLINOIS, USA

TX1156849 —UN—28MAR14

Product Identification Number

PIN Plate Location

Example of PIN Plate 1— PIN Plate

Continued on next page

2— 17-Character PIN

CN93077,0000237 -19-02APR14-1/2

061517

PN=3

Introduction

The following is an example for a machine that meets Final Tier 4 and Stage IV emission levels:

The PIN identifies the producing factory, machine model number, machine option, year of manufacture, engine emission level, and machine serial number.

17-Character PIN Examples 1

• (1—3) World Code: Identifies location where machine is manufactured.

1FF .................. World Code (manufacturing location) 1DW ............. Davenport Works

9 _

10 _

_ ..................... Check Letter (variable)

• (10) Manufacturing Year Code: Identifies year of machine manufacture.

_ ..................... Manufacturing Year Code (variable)

1T8 ............... Thibodaux Works

D ................. 2013

1T0 ............... Dubuque Works

E .................. 2014

1FF ............... Deere—Hitachi (Kernersville, NC, USA)

F .................. 2015

1F9 ............... Deere—Hitachi (Indaiatuba, São Paulo, Brazil)

G ................. 2016

• (4—8) Machine Model Identifier: Identifies model

• (11) Engine Emission Code: Represents engine

350G ................ Machine Model Identifier

F ..................... Engine Emission Code

number.

NOTE: Characters 7—8 identify series and major machine configuration options. These characters will change from one machine to another. X ..................... Machine Option Code X .................. Base Machine R ................. HYEX Military Excavators

• (9) Check Letter: This is a random character assigned

emission certification.

C ................. Tier 2 and Stage II D ................. Tier 3 and Stage III A E .................. Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B F .................. Final Tier 4 and Stage IV

• (12—17) Machine Serial Number: Identifies machine serial number. This character will change from one machine to another.

809192 ............. Machine Serial Number

by the factory. This is not used in machine identification. CN93077,0000237 -19-02APR14-2/2

IMPORTANT Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine.

Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions regulations applicable to this engine and may result in substantial fines and penalties. VD76477,000104D -19-27JUN12-1/1

061517

PN=4

Introduction

TX1219045 —UN—11JUL16

License Agreement for John Deere Software

Continued on next page

TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-1/3

061517

PN=5

TX1219046 —UN—11JUL16

Introduction

Continued on next page

TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-2/3

061517

PN=6

TX1219047 —UN—14JUL16

Introduction

TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-3/3

061517

PN=7

Introduction

RG24291 —UN—18SEP13

Emissions Control System Certification Label

Engine Emissions Label

CAUTION: Statutes providing severe penalties for tampering with emissions controls may apply to the user or dealer. The emissions warranty applies to those engines marketed by John Deere that have been certified by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and/or California Air Resources Board (CARB); and used in the United States and Canada in Non-road equipment. The presence of an emissions label like the one shown signifies that the engine has been certified with the EPA and/or CARB. The EPA and CARB warranties only apply to new engines having the certification label affixed to the engine and sold as stated above in the geographic areas. The presence of an EU number signifies that the engine has been certified with the European Union countries per Directive 97/68/EC. The EPA and/or CARB emissions warranties do not apply to the EU countries.

The emissions label has applicable US EPA and/or CARB regulatory year. The regulatory year determines which warranty statement is applicable to engine. See “EPA Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition” and “CARB Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition”. For additional regulatory year warranty statements, see www.JohnDeere.com or contact the nearest John Deere service dealer for assistance. Emission Control System(s) Laws The U.S. EPA and California ARB prohibit the removal or rendering inoperative of any device or element of design installed on or in engines/equipment in compliance with applicable emission regulations prior to or after the sale and delivery of the engines/equipment to the ultimate purchaser. DX,EMISSIONS,LABEL -19-01AUG14-1/1

061517

PN=8

Introduction

EPA Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition DXLOGOV1 —UN—28APR09

U.S. AND CANADA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS To determine if the John Deere engine qualifies for the additional warranties set forth below, look for the "Emissions Control Information" label located on the engine. If the engine is operated in the United States or Canada and the Emissions Control information label states: "This engine complies with US EPA regulations for nonroad and stationary diesel engines”, or “This engine conforms to US EPA nonroad compression-ignition regulations”, refer to the "U.S. and Canada Emission Control Warranty Statement." If the engine is operated in California, and the label states: "This engine complies with US EPA and CARB regulations for nonroad diesel engines”, or “This engine conforms to US EPA and California nonroad compression-ignition emission regulations”, also refer to the "California Emission Control Warranty Statement.” Warranties stated on this certificate refer only to emissions-related parts and components of your engine. The complete engine warranty, less emissions-related parts and components, is provided separately. If you have any questions about your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact John Deere at 1-319-292-5400. JOHN DEERE'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITY John Deere warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that this off-road diesel engine including all parts of its emission-control system was designed, built and equipped so as to conform at the time of the sale with Section 213 of the Clean Air Act and is free from defects in materials and workmanship which would cause the engine to fail to conform with applicable US EPA regulations for a period of five years from the date the engine is placed into service or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever first occurs. Where a warrantable condition exists, John Deere will repair or replace, as it elects, any part or component with a defect in materials or workmanship that would increase the engine’s emissions of any regulated pollutant within the stated warranty period at no cost to you, including expenses related to diagnosing and repairing or replacing emission-related parts. Warranty coverage is subject to the limitations and exclusions set forth herein. Emission- related components include engine parts developed to control emissions related to the following: Air-Induction System Fuel System Ignition System Exhaust Gas Recirculation Systems

Aftertreatment Devices Crankcase Ventilation Valves Sensors Engine Electronic Control Units

EMISSION WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS John Deere may deny warranty claims for malfunctions or failures caused by:

• Non-performance of maintenance requirements listed in the Operator’s Manual • The use of the engine/equipment in a manner for which it was not designed • Abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications or alterations • Accidents for which it does not have responsibility or by acts of God The off-road diesel engine is designed to operate on diesel fuel as specified in the Fuels, Lubricants and Coolants section in the Operators Manual. Use of any other fuel can harm the emissions control system of the engine/equipment and is not approved for use. To the extent permitted by law John Deere is not liable for damage to other engine components caused by a failure of an emission-related part, unless otherwise covered by standard warranty. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. REMEDIES UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE LIMITED TO THE PROVISIONS OF MATERIAL AND SERVICES AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. WHERE PERMITTED BY LAW, NEITHER JOHN DEERE NOR ANY AUTHORIZED JOHN DEERE ENGINE DISTRIBUTOR, DEALER, OR REPAIR FACILITY OR ANY COMPANY AFFILIATED WITH JOHN DEERE WILL BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Emission_CI_EPA (18Dec09) Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,EPA -19-12DEC12-1/2

061517

PN=9

TS1721 —UN—15JUL13

Introduction

DX,EMISSIONS,EPA -19-12DEC12-2/2

061517

PN=10

Introduction

CARB Non-road Emissions Control Warranty Statement—Compression Ignition Emissions Control Warranty Statement 2016 through 2018 DXLOGOV1 —UN—28APR09

CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS To determine if the John Deere engine qualifies for the additional warranties set forth below, look for the “Emission Control Information” label located on the engine. If the engine is operated in the United States or Canada and the engine label states: “This engine complies with US EPA regulations for nonroad and stationary diesel engines”, or “This engine complies with US EPA regulations for stationary emergency diesel engines”, refer to the “U.S. and Canada Emission Control Warranty Statement.” If the engine is operated in California, and the engine label states: “This engine complies with US EPA and CARB regulations for nonroad diesel engines” also refer to the “California Emissions Control Warranty Statement.” Warranties stated on this certificate refer only to emissions-related parts and components of your engine. The complete engine warranty, less emission-related parts and components, is provided separately. If you have any questions about your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact John Deere at 1-319-292-5400. CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT: The California Air Resources Board (CARB) is pleased to explain the emission-control system warranty on 2016 through 2018 off-road diesel engines. In California, new off-road engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog standards. John Deere must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your engine. Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system. Also included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emission-related assemblies. John Deere warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that this off-road diesel engine was designed, built, and equipped so as to conform at the time of sale with all applicable regulations adopted by CARB and is free from defects in materials and workmanship which would cause the failure of a warranted part to be identical in all material respects to the part as described in John Deere's application for certification for a period of five years from the date the engine is delivered to an ultimate purchaser or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first for all engines rated at 19 kW and greater. In the absence of a device to measure hours of use, the engine shall be warranted for a period of five years. EMISSIONS WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: John Deere may deny warranty claims for failures caused by the use of an add-on or modified part which has not been exempted by the CARB. A modified part is an aftermarket part intended to replace an original emission-related part which is not functionally identical in all respects and which in any way affects emissions. An add-on part is any aftermarket part which is not a modified part or a replacement part. In no event will John Deere, any authorized engine distributor, dealer, or repair facility, or any company affiliated with John Deere be liable for incidental or consequential damage.

Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-1/8

061517

PN=11

Introduction JOHN DEERE'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITY: Where a warrantable condition exists, John Deere will repair or replace, as it elects, your off-road diesel engine at no cost to you, including diagnosis, parts or labor. Warranty coverage is subject to the limitations and exclusions set forth herein. The off-road diesel engine is warranted for a period of five years from the date the engine is delivered to an ultimate purchaser or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. The following are emissions-related parts: Air Induction System

• Intake manifold • Turbocharger • Charge air cooler Fuel Metering system

• Fuel injection system Exhaust Gas Recirculation

• EGR valve Catalyst or Thermal Reactor Systems

Emission control labels

Advanced Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Controls

Particulate Controls

• NOx absorbers and catalysts

SCR systems and urea containers/dispensing • Any device used to capture particulate emissions systems • Any device used in the regeneration of the capturing system Miscellaneous Items used in Above Systems • Enclosures and manifolding • Electronic control units, sensors, actuators, • Smoke Puff Limiters wiring harnesses, hoses, connectors, clamps, Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

fittings, gasket, mounting hardware

• PCV valve • Oil filler cap

• Catalytic converter • Exhaust manifold Any warranted emissions-related part scheduled for replacement as required maintenance is warranted by John Deere for the period of time prior to the first scheduled replacement point for the part. Any warranted emissions-related part not scheduled for replacement as required maintenance or scheduled only for regular inspection is warranted by John Deere for the stated warranty period. OWNER'S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES: As the off-road diesel engine owner you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance listed in your Operator’s Manual. John Deere recommends that the owner retain all receipts covering maintenance on the off-road diesel engine, but John Deere cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for the owner’s failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance. However, as the off-road diesel engine owner, you should be aware that John Deere may deny you warranty coverage if your off-road diesel engine or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications. The off-road diesel engine is designed to operate on diesel fuel as specified in the Fuels, Lubricants and Coolants section in the Operators Manual. Use of any other fuel may result in the engine no longer operating in compliance with applicable emissions requirements. The owner is responsible for initiating the warranty process, and should present the machine to the nearest authorized John Deere dealer as soon as a problem is suspected. The warranty repairs should be completed by the authorized John Deere dealer as quickly as possible. Emissions regulations require the customer to bring the unit to an authorized servicing dealer when warranty service is required. As a result, John Deere is NOT liable for travel or mileage on emissions warranty service calls.

Emission_CI_CARB (13Jun14) Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-2/8

061517

PN=12

RG26035 —UN—24JUN14

Introduction

Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-3/8

061517

PN=13

RG26036 —UN—24JUN14

Introduction

Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-4/8

061517

PN=14

Introduction Emissions Control Warranty Statement 2019 through 2021 DXLOGOV1 —UN—28APR09

CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS To determine if the John Deere engine qualifies for the additional warranties set forth below, look for the “Emission Control Information” label located on the engine. If the engine is operated in the United States or Canada and the engine label states: “This engine complies with US EPA regulations for nonroad and stationary diesel engines”, or “This engine complies with US EPA regulations for stationary emergency diesel engines”, refer to the “U.S. and Canada Emission Control Warranty Statement.” If the engine is operated in California, and the engine label states: “This engine complies with US EPA and CARB regulations for nonroad diesel engines” also refer to the “California Emissions Control Warranty Statement.” Warranties stated on this certificate refer only to emissions-related parts and components of your engine. The complete engine warranty, less emission-related parts and components, is provided separately. If you have any questions about your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact John Deere at 1-319-292-5400. CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT: The California Air Resources Board (CARB) is pleased to explain the emission-control system warranty on 2019 through 2021 off-road diesel engines. In California, new off-road engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog standards. John Deere must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your engine. Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system. Also included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emission-related assemblies. John Deere warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that this off-road diesel engine was designed, built, and equipped so as to conform at the time of sale with all applicable regulations adopted by CARB and is free from defects in materials and workmanship which would cause the failure of a warranted part to be identical in all material respects to the part as described in John Deere's application for certification for a period of five years from the date the engine is delivered to an ultimate purchaser or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first for all engines rated at 19 kW and greater. In the absence of a device to measure hours of use, the engine shall be warranted for a period of five years. EMISSIONS WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS: John Deere may deny warranty claims for failures caused by the use of an add-on or modified part which has not been exempted by the CARB. A modified part is an aftermarket part intended to replace an original emission-related part which is not functionally identical in all respects and which in any way affects emissions. An add-on part is any aftermarket part which is not a modified part or a replacement part. In no event will John Deere, any authorized engine distributor, dealer, or repair facility, or any company affiliated with John Deere be liable for incidental or consequential damage.

Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-5/8

061517

PN=15

• Intake manifold • Turbocharger • Charge air cooler Fuel Metering system

• Fuel injection system Exhaust Gas Recirculation

• EGR valve Catalyst or Thermal Reactor Systems

Emission control labels

Advanced Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Controls

Particulate Controls

• NOx absorbers and catalysts

fittings, gasket, mounting hardware

• PCV valve • Oil filler cap

Emission_CI_CARB (01Feb17) Continued on next page

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-6/8

061517

PN=16

Introduction Emissions

Cont ro l Wa rra n ty S ta te m e n t 2019 th ro u g h 2021

DXLOGO V1 —UN—28AP R09

EMISSIO NS WARRANTY EXCLUS IONS : John Deer e may deny war ranty cla ims for failure s caus e d by the use of a n add -on or modified par t which has not been e xe mpte d by the CARB. A modified par t is a n after market par t intended to re pla ce a n origina l emis sion -re la te d par t which is not functiona lly ident ica l in all re s pe cts and which in any way a ffects emis sions . An add -on par t is any after market par t which is not a modified par t or a re pla ce me nt par t. In no event will John Deer e , any author ize d engine dis tributor, dealer , or re pa ir facility, or any compa ny a ffilia te d with J ohn Deer e be liable for incidental or cons e que ntia l damage . Continued on next page

RG29280 —UN—02FEB17

John Deer e war rants to the ultimat e pur cha s e r and each subs e que nt pur cha s e r that this off-roa d dies e l engine was des igned, built, and equipped s o a s to conform a t the time of sal e with all applic able re gula tions adopted by CARB and is fre e from def e cts in ma te ria ls and workma ns hip which would caus e the failure of a war ranted par t to be identic a l in all mater ia l re s pe cts to the par t a s de s cribe d in J ohn Deer e's applic a tion for ce rtifica tion for a per iod of five years from the date the engine is deliver e d to a n ultima te pur cha s e r or 3,000 hour s of oper a tion, whichev e r occurs firs t for all engines ra te d a t 19 kW and gre a te r. In the absence of a devi ce to measur e hour s of use, the eng ine s ha ll be war ra nte d for a per iod of five ye a rs .

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-7/8

061517

PN=17

RG29281 —UN—27FEB17

Introduction

DX,EMISSIONS,CARB -19-03FEB17-8/8

061517

PN=18

Introduction

FCC Notifications to User FCC Notification These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and (2) these devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. These devices must be operated as supplied by John Deere Ag Management Solutions. Any changes or modifications made to these devices without the expressed written approval of John Deere Ag Management Solutions may void the user’s authority to operate these devices. Modular Telematics Gateway and Satellite Module This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, no guarantee shall be made that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit

different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

MM16284,000196F -19-07JUL14-1/1

061517

PN=19

Introduction

Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)—SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IMPORTANT -- READ CAREFULLY: THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR ("LICENSOR") IDENTIFIED BELOW AND GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE (THE “MACHINE”). BY INDICATING YOUR ACCEPTANCE ON A DISPLAY ON THE MACHINE, BY INSTALLING SOFTWARE TO THE MACHINE, OR USING SOFTWARE ON THE MACHINE, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE (THE "Software") THAT IS DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE. YOU AGREE THAT THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND TERMINATION PROVISIONS BELOW, IS BINDING UPON YOU, AND UPON ANY COMPANY ON WHOSE BEHALF YOU USE THE SOFTWARE AS WELL AS THE EMPLOYEES OF ANY SUCH COMPANY (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS "YOU" IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, OR IF YOU ARE NOT AUTHORIZED TO ACCEPT THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF YOUR COMPANY OR ITS EMPLOYEES, PLEASE CLICK THE [Decline] ICON ON THE DISPLAY ON THE MACHINE TO DECLINE THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT REPRESENTS THE ENTIRE AGREEMENT CONCERNING THE SOFTWARE BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR. 1. Delivery of Software. Software may be delivered to your Machine by Licensor wirelessly or via an agent of Licensor, such as a dealer. If it is delivered wirelessly, you may be responsible for any data transmission fees incurred due to such delivery. 2. License. Licensor hereby grants to you, and you accept, a nonexclusive license to use the Software in machine-readable, object code form, only as authorized in this License Agreement and the applicable provisions of the Operators' Manuals, which you agree to review carefully prior to using the Software. The Software may be used only on the Machine to which it was initially delivered. You agree that you will not assign, sublicense, transfer, pledge, lease, rent, or share your rights under this License Agreement, except that you may permanently transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement in connection with the sale of the Machine on which the Software covered by this Agreement is installed.

that you will not: (a) reverse assemble, reverse compile, modify, or otherwise translate the Software, or attempt to defeat the copyright protection and application enabling mechanisms therein; (b) copy or reproduce the Software; or, (b) remove or obliterate any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices from the Software. You also agree not to permit any third party acting under your control to do any of the foregoing. 4. License Fees. The license fees paid by you, if any, are paid in consideration of the licenses granted under this License Agreement. 5. Limited Warranty. Licensor warrants, for your benefit alone and not for the benefit of any other party, that during the "Warranty Period" defined below, the Software will operate substantially in accordance with the applicable functional specifications ("Specifications") set forth in the Operators' Manuals. If, prior to expiration of the Warranty Period, the Software fails to perform substantially in accordance with the Specifications, you may return the Machine to the place of purchase for repair or replacement of the non-performing Software. The Warranty Period is ninety (90) days from the date of installation of the Software or the duration of the warranty period of the component of the Machine on which the Software is installed, whichever is longer. The Software Warranty Period does not affect the warranty period of the Machine itself or any component thereof. 6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. YOU HEREBY AGREE THAT THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED ABOVE (THE "LIMITED WARRANTY") CONSTITUTES YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY PROBLEM WHATSOEVER WITH THE SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY, THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS IS,” AND LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES AND THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM AND YOU EXPRESSLY WAIVE, RELEASE AND RENOUNCE ALL WARRANTIES ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE OF DEALING OR TRADE USAGE; ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT; AND, ANY OTHER WARRANTY ARISING UNDER ANY THEORY OF LAW, INCLUDING TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, CONTRACT OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY. NO REPRESENTATION OR OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, STATEMENTS REGARDING SUITABILITY FOR USE, SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY BY LICENSOR OR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES OR THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS. LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE IS ERROR-FREE OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION.

3. Licensor's Rights. You acknowledge and agree that the Software is proprietary to Licensor and is protected under copyright law. You further acknowledge and agree that all right, title, and interests in and to the Software, including associated intellectual property rights, are and shall remain with Licensor. This License Agreement does not convey to you any title or interest in or to the Software, but only a limited right of use revocable in accordance Continued on next page with the terms of this License Agreement. You agree

OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-1/4

061517

PN=20

Introduction

7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTIES FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE SOFTWARE; ANY PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE; PERFORMANCE, NONPERFORMANCE OR DELAYS IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, WARRANTY OR REPAIRS OF THE SOFTWARE, DAMAGES FOR CROP LOSS, DAMAGE TO LAND, LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OF EQUIPMENT OR SERVICES OR DAMAGES TO BUSINESS OR REPUTATION ARISING FROM THE PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF ANY ASPECT OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, AND WHETHER OR NOT LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR’S CUMULATIVE LIABILITY TO YOU OR TO ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY LOSSES OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS, LAWSUITS, DEMANDS, OR ACTIONS ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO USE OF THE SOFTWARE EXCEED YOUR TOTAL PAYMENT FOR THE MACHINE AND FOR THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE. 8. Termination of License. Licensor may terminate the license granted under this Agreement upon written notice of termination provided to you if you violate any material term of this Agreement pertaining to your use of the Software or Licensor's rights, including, without limitation, the provisions of Sections 2 and 3 above. 9. Compliance with Law. You agree that you will use the Software in accordance with United States law and the laws of the country in which you are located, as applicable, including foreign trade control laws and regulations. The Software may be subject to export and other foreign trade controls restricting re-sales and/or transfers to other countries and parties. By accepting the terms of this Agreement, you acknowledge that you understand that the Software may be so controlled, including, but not limited to, by the Export Administration Regulations and/or the foreign trade control regulations of the Treasury Department of the United States. Any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, you agree that the Software will not be resold, re-exported or otherwise transferred. The Software remains subject to applicable U.S. laws. 10. Indemnification. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold Licensor, its affiliates and third party supplier, and their, officers, directors, employees, agents and representatives (each an "Indemnified Party"), harmless

from and against all claims, demands proceedings, injuries, liabilities, losses, or costs and expenses (including reasonable legal fees) brought by any third party against any such persons arising from or in connection with your use of the Software, regardless of whether such losses are caused, wholly or partially, by any negligence, breach of contract or other fault of an Indemnified Party. 11. Costs of Litigation. If any claim or action is brought by either party to this License Agreement against the other party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other relief granted, reasonable attorney fees and expenses of litigation. 12. Severability and Waiver. Should any term of this Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction, such declaration shall have no effect on the remaining terms hereof. The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take action against the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights of subsequent actions in the event of future breaches. 13. Language Clause. If you are a resident of Canada at the time you accept this Agreement, then the parties hereby acknowledge that they have required this Agreement, and all other documents relating hereto, be drawn up in the English language only. Les parties reconnaissent avoir demandé que le présent contrat ainsi que toute autre entente ou avis requis ou permis à être conclu ou donné en vertu des stipulations du présent contrat, soient rédigés en langue anglaise seulement. If you are a resident of any country other than the United States, Canada, Great Britain, Australia or New Zealand then you agree as follows: there may be a translated version of this Agreement. If there is an inconsistency or contradiction between the translated version and the English version of this Agreement, the English version of this Agreement shall control. 14. Assignment by Licensor. Licensor may assign this Agreement without your prior consent to any company or entity affiliated with Licensor, or by an assignment associated with a corporate restructuring, merger or acquisition. 15. Governing Law and Forum. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws identified in the table in Section 18, below The respective courts of the venue identified in the table in Section 18, below, for the location of the Machine shall have non-exclusive jurisdiction over all disputes relating to this Agreement. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. 16. Specific Exceptions.

Continued on next page

OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-2/4

061517

PN=21

Introduction

16.1 Limited Warranty for Users Residing in European Economic Area Countries or Switzerland. If you obtained the Software in any European Economic Area country or Switzerland, and you usually reside in such country, then Section 6 does not apply, instead, Licensor warrants that the Software provides the functionalities set forth in the Operators Manuals (the "agreed upon functionalities") for the Warranty Period. As used in this Section, "Warranty Period" means one (1) year. Non-substantial variation from the agreed upon functionalities shall not be considered and does not establish any warranty rights. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO SOFTWARE PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, FOR EXAMPLE, UPDATES, OR SOFTWARE THAT HAS BEEN ALTERED BY YOU, TO THE EXTENT SUCH ALTERATIONS CAUSED A DEFECT. To make a warranty claim, during the Warranty Period you must return, at our expense, the Software and proof of purchase to the location where you obtained it. If the functionalities of the Software vary substantially from the agreed upon functionalities, Licensor is entitled -- by way of re-performance and at its own discretion -to repair or replace the Software. If this fails, you are entitled to a reduction of the purchase price (reduction) or to cancel the purchase agreement (rescission). For further warranty information, please contact Licensor at the address listed in Section 18. 16.2 Limitation of Liability for Users Residing in European Economic Area Countries or Switzerland. (a) If you obtained the Software in any European Economic Area country or Switzerland, and you usually reside in such country, then Sections 7 and 10 do not apply, Instead, Licensor's statutory liability for damages shall be limited as follows: (a) Licensor shall be liable only up to the amount of damages as typically foreseeable at the time of entering into this Agreement in respect of damages caused by a slightly negligent breach of a material contractual obligation and (b) Licensor shall

not be liable for damages caused by a slightly negligent breach of a non-material contractual obligation. (b) The aforesaid limitation of liability shall not apply to any mandatory statutory liability, in particular, to liability under the German Product Liability Act, liability for assuming a specific guarantee or liability for culpably caused personal injuries. (c) You are required to take all reasonable measures to avoid and reduce damages, in particular to make back-up copies of the Software and your computer data subject to the provisions of this Agreement. 17. Representations of Licensee. BY ACCEPTING THIS AGREEMENT, YOU: (A) ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT; (B) REPRESENT THAT YOU HAVE THE AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT; (C) AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU AND ANY LEGAL ENTITY THAT OBTAINED THE SOFTWARE AND ON WHOSE BEHALF IT IS USED; AND, (D) AGREE TO PERFORM THE OBLIGATIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 18. Identification of Licensor and Notices. The Licensor is the entity identified in the table below. All notices to Licensor shall be sent by certified or registered mail to the corresponding address for the Licensor given below. In each case a copy of the notice shall also be sent to John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group, ATTN: Legal, 4140 114th Street Urbandale, IA 50322 U.S.A. All notices to Licensor shall be effective upon receipt. All notices required to be given to you shall, in Licensor’s sole discretion, either be sent via certified or registered mail to the address given to Licensor in connection with your purchase of the Machine. Either method of notification used by Licensor shall be effective upon dispatch. You agree to notify Licensor of any change in your address in the manner set forth above.

Place of Purchase

Address

Governing Law

Venue

United States of America

John Deere Shared Services, Inc. One John Deere Place Moline, IL 61265 U.S.A.

State of Illinois, USA

Rock Island County, Illinois, USA

Argentina

Industrias John Deere Argentina, S.A. Casilla de Correo 80 Rosario (Santa Fe), 2000, Argentina

Province of Santa Fe, Argentina

Australia or New Zealand

John Deere Limited (Australia) State of Queensland, Australia P.O. Box 2022 Crestmead, Queensland, Australia 4132

State of Queensland, Australia

Canada

John Deere Limited 295 Hunter Road P.O. Box 1000 Grimsby, ON L9K 1M3

Province of Ontario, Canada

Chile

John Deere Water, S.A. Cerro Santa Lucia 9990 Quilicura, Santiago, Chile

Province of Santiago, Chile

Mexico

Industrias John Deere, S.A. de C.V. Boulevard Diaz Ordaz #500 Garza Garcia Nuevo Leon 66210, Mexico

State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico

Continued on next page

OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-3/4

061517

PN=22

Introduction Europe

ETIC Strassburgerallee 5 67657 Kaiserslautern, Germany

Federal Republic of Germany

Kaiserslautern, Germany

Other

The John Deere entity identified for the location of your Machine on www.JDLink.com.

The John Deere entity identified for the location of your Machine on www.JDLink.com. OUT4001,00006C5 -19-08NOV10-4/4

John Deere Online Bookstore The Technical Service Information Bookstore is available for John Deere Construction & Forestry, Hitachi, and Waratah products. Technical information can be purchased from John Deere. Publications are available in print, PDF download, or PDF on DVD formats. Orders can be made using one of the following:

• John Deere Technical Information Store: http://www.johndeeretechinfo.com/

TX1213033 —UN—07APR16

• Call 1-866-213-3373 • Contact an authorized John Deere dealer Available information includes:

• PARTS CATALOGS listing service parts available

for machines with exploded view illustrations to help identify the correct parts. It is also useful in assembling and disassembling. • OPERATOR’S MANUALS providing safety, operating, maintenance, and service information. • TECHNICAL MANUALS outlining service information for machines. Included are specifications, illustrated assembly and disassembly procedures, hydraulic oil flow diagrams, and wiring diagrams. Some products have separate manuals for repair and diagnostic information. Some components, such as engines, are available in a separate component technical manual.

John Deere Online Bookstore

• TRAINING GUIDES AND VIDEOS covering

components, preventative maintenance, operation safety, and demonstration tips.

MB60223,0005117 -19-17MAR17-1/1

061517

PN=23

Introduction

Technical Information Feedback Form We need your help to continually improve our technical publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your comments, ideas and improvements. SEND TO:

John Deere Dubuque Works 18600 South John Deere Road Attn: Publications, Dept. 324 Dubuque, IA 52004-0538 USA

FAX NUMBER: 1-563-589-5800 (USA) Publication Number: Page Number: Ideas, Comments:

Name: Phone: Email Address: THANK YOU! TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/1

061517

PN=24

Contents Page Page

Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-2 Make Welding Repairs Safely ...........................1-4-2 Drive Metal Pins Safely .....................................1-4-2 Clean Exhaust Filter Safely ...............................1-4-3

Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1

Safety—General Precautions Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1 Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-1 Operate Only If Qualified ...................................1-2-1 Wear Protective Equipment...............................1-2-2 Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications.......1-2-2 Control Pattern Selector—If Equipped ..............1-2-2 Add Cab Guarding for Special Uses..................1-2-2 Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-3 Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-3 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ...............................1-2-3 Avoid High-Pressure Oils ..................................1-2-4 Work In Ventilated Area.....................................1-2-4 Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling.....1-2-5 Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-5 In Case of Machine Fire ....................................1-2-6 Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-6 Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-6 Handle Starting Fluid Safely ..............................1-2-7 Decommissioning — Proper Recycling and Disposal of Fluids and Components ......1-2-7 Exhaust Filter Ash Handling and Disposal ........1-2-7 Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-8 Clean Debris from Machine ...............................1-2-8

Safety—Safety Signs Safety Signs ......................................................1-5-1 Safety Signs Installed on Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped....................................1-5-8

Operation—Operator's Station Pedals, Levers, and Panels...............................2-1-1 Switch Panel......................................................2-1-1 Switch Panel Functions .....................................2-1-2 Rear Left Panel..................................................2-1-3 Horn...................................................................2-1-3 Power Dig Button...............................................2-1-3 Pilot Shutoff Lever .............................................2-1-4 Left Console ......................................................2-1-4 Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch ..2-1-4 Seat Heater Switch—If Equipped ......................2-1-5 Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped..................2-1-5 Rear Light Switch—If Equipped.........................2-1-5 Right Console ....................................................2-1-6 Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch .............2-1-6 Right Enable Switch ..........................................2-1-7 Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch......2-1-7 Auxiliary Function Enable Switch—If Equipped .......................................................2-1-7 Cab Heater and Air Conditioner ........................2-1-8 Selecting Display Between Celsius and Fahrenheit .....................................................2-1-9 Operating the AM/FM Radio............................2-1-10 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location ...............2-1-11 Alternative Exit Tool .........................................2-1-11 Cab Dome Light Switch ...................................2-1-12 Opening Upper Front (Alternative Exit) Window .......................................................2-1-12 Removing and Storing the Lower Front Window .......................................................2-1-13 Opening Cab Door Window.............................2-1-13 Opening and Closing the Polycarbonate-Type Roof Exit Cover ..........2-1-14 Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension Seat ....2-1-15 Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat—If Equipped .....................................................2-1-16

Safety—Operating Precautions Use Steps and Handholds Correctly .................1-3-1 Start Only From Operator's Seat .......................1-3-1 Use and Maintain Seat Belt ...............................1-3-1 Prevent Unintended Machine Movement ..........1-3-1 Avoid Work Site Hazards...................................1-3-2 Keep Riders Off Machine ..................................1-3-2 Avoid Backover Accidents .................................1-3-3 Inspect and Maintain ROPS ..............................1-3-3 Avoid Machine Tip Over ....................................1-3-4 Use Special Care When Lifting Objects ............1-3-4 Travel Safely......................................................1-3-5 Prevent Acid Burns............................................1-3-5 Add and Operate Attachments Safely ...............1-3-5

Safety—Maintenance Precautions Park and Prepare for Service Safely .................1-4-1 Service Cooling System Safely .........................1-4-1

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. COPYRIGHT © 2017 DEERE & COMPANY Moline, Illinois All rights reserved. A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ™ Manual Previous Editions Copyright © 2014, 2015, 2016

061517

PN=1

Contents

Page

Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height ..2-1-16

Qualified Emergency Use — SCR Override Option...........................................2-3-13 Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Delivery Process ..........................2-3-14 Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation ....................................................2-3-15 Locking the Hydraulic Coupler to the Attachment—If Equipped ............................2-3-17 Unlocking the Hydraulic Coupler From the Attachment—If Equipped ......................2-3-19 Control Lever Pattern Operation......................2-3-20 Mechanical Control Lever Pattern Selector—If Equipped .................................2-3-21 Control Lever Pattern Conversion ...................2-3-22 Operating in Water and Mud ...........................2-3-23 Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope ..............2-3-23 Required Machine Stop Warning.....................2-3-23 Lower Boom With Engine Stopped..................2-3-25 Parking the Machine........................................2-3-26 Loading and Unloading for Transport ..............2-3-27 Towing Machine...............................................2-3-28 Lifting With Bucket Loop..................................2-3-28 Lifting With John Deere Quick Coupler ...........2-3-29 Lifting the Machine ..........................................2-3-30

Operation—Monitor Operation Monitor...............................................................2-2-1 Monitor Functions ..............................................2-2-2 Aftertreatment Indicators Overview ...................2-2-3 Monitor Start-Up ................................................2-2-4 Main Menu.........................................................2-2-5 Main Menu—Alarm List .....................................2-2-6 Main Menu—Air Conditioner ...........................2-2-13 Main Menu—Radio..........................................2-2-15 Main Menu—Work Mode.................................2-2-16 Main Menu—Setting Menu ..............................2-2-17 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time...2-2-18 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment Name Input.........................................2-2-18 Main Menu—Setting Menu—AutoShutdown ....................................................2-2-19 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning ...............................2-2-20 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter Selection ...........................................2-2-21 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear View Camera Monitor..................................2-2-22 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display Item Selection .............................................2-2-23 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Brightness Adjustment..........................................2-2-23 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language ..........2-2-23 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection ....2-2-24 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Emergency Override............................................2-2-24 Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu Sequence Change ............................2-2-25 Main Menu—Information Menu .......................2-2-25 Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation....2-2-26 Main Menu—Information Menu—Maintenance ...................................2-2-27 Main Menu—Information Menu—Troubleshooting ..............................2-2-27 Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring...2-2-28

Maintenance—Machine Required Emission-Related Information............3-1-1 Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1 Diesel Fuel Specifications .................................3-1-1 Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-2 Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2 BioDiesel Fuel ...................................................3-1-3 Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-4 Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives ..................3-1-4 Fuel Filters.........................................................3-1-4 Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-5 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines .........................................3-1-6 Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank.........3-1-7 Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)...................3-1-8 Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)...................3-1-8 Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............3-1-9 Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-9 Mixing of Lubricants...........................................3-1-9 Lubricant Storage ..............................................3-1-9 John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV ........................................3-1-10 Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV..........3-1-10 Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV Engines ..........................3-1-11 Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for Operation at High Altitude ...........................3-1-11

Operation—Operating the Machine Before Starting Work .........................................2-3-1 Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting ..............2-3-1 Battery Disconnect Switch.................................2-3-2 Engine Break-In Period .....................................2-3-2 Starting Engine ..................................................2-3-3 Cold Weather Start Aid—If Equipped ................2-3-4 Cold Weather Warm-Up ....................................2-3-5 Travel Pedals and Levers..................................2-3-6 Auxiliary Function Lever (AFL)—If Equipped ....2-3-7 Exhaust Filter.....................................................2-3-8 Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning .......................2-3-10 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Overview ........................................2-3-12

Continued on next page

061517

PN=2

Contents

Page

Oil Filters .........................................................3-1-12 Hydraulic Oil ....................................................3-1-13 Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils.....................................................3-1-14 Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ..............................3-1-14 Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease ...............................................3-1-15 Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners) ...........................3-1-16 Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant Concentrate.................................................3-1-17 Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-17 Testing Coolant Freeze Point ..........................3-1-18 Disposing of Coolant .......................................3-1-18

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-7-1 Drain Water and Sediment From Hydraulic Tank...............................................3-7-2 Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level ...........3-7-3 Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals ..3-7-4 Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-7-6 Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-7-6 Lubricate Front End Pin Joints ..........................3-7-7

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours Lubricate Swing Bearing....................................3-8-1 Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear...........................3-8-1 Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ......................................................3-8-2 Replace Final Fuel Filter....................................3-8-3 Replace Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator—If Equipped.................................3-8-4 Check Air Intake Hoses .....................................3-8-4 Drain and Refill Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..3-8-5 Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab Recirculating Air Filters .................................3-8-6 Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-8-6

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance Service Machine at Specified Intervals..............3-2-1 Check the Hour Meter Regularly .......................3-2-1 Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-2 Open Access Doors for Service ........................3-2-3 Open Engine Cover for Service.........................3-2-4 Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-4 Hydraulic Breaker and Crusher Attachments ....3-2-5 Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-5 Service Intervals ................................................3-2-6 Required Parts...................................................3-2-8

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours Drain and Refill Swing Gear Case Oil ...............3-9-1 Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter ......................3-9-2 Replace Pilot Oil Filter .......................................3-9-3 Inspect Serpentine Belt .....................................3-9-4 Drain and Refill Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ......3-9-4 Remove and Clean Open Crankcase Ventilation (OCV) Hose .................................3-9-5 Replace Air Cleaner Elements ..........................3-9-6 Replace Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve.........3-9-7 Check Coolant Condition...................................3-9-7

Maintenance—As Required Remove and Clean Fuel Tank Inlet Screen .......3-3-1 Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level ..............3-3-1 Check and Clean Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve..............................................3-3-1 Check and Adjust Track Sag .............................3-3-2 Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped ............3-3-3 Service Exhaust Filter........................................3-3-3

Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter.........................................3-10-1 Changing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter.........................................3-10-1 Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash..............3-10-2 Clean Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. —811697) ..........................................3-10-2 Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Screen (S.N. —811697) ....3-10-2 Drain and Refill Travel Gear Case Oil .............3-10-2

Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-1 Check Engine Coolant Level .............................3-4-2 Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level.........................3-4-3 Lubricate Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped ........3-4-4

Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel Tank Sump ....................................................3-5-1 Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ..3-5-1 Drain Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator—If Equipped.................................3-5-2 Lubricate Working Tool Pivots ...........................3-5-2

Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Breather Filter.....................................3-11-1 Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Filter (S.N. 811698— )...................................................3-11-2

Maintenance—Every 100 Hours Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware............3-6-1

Continued on next page

iii

061517

PN=3

Contents

Page

Clean Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. 811698— ) .........................................3-11-2 Inspect Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Baffle (S.N. 811698— ) ...............................3-11-2

Electrical System ...............................................4-3-9 Software Update..............................................4-3-11

Miscellaneous—Storage

Drain and Refill Hydraulic Tank Oil ..................3-12-1 Replace Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter ..........3-12-3

Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1 Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-2 Preparing Engine for Long-Term Storage..........4-4-3 Removing Engine From Long-Term Storage .....4-4-4

Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Drain Cooling System......................................3-13-1 Cooling System Fill and Deaeration Procedure....................................................3-13-2

Record Product Identification Number (PIN) .....4-5-1 Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1 Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers ................4-5-2 Record Swing Motor Serial Number ..................4-5-2 Record Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number—If Equipped....................................4-5-3 Record Hydraulic Pump Serial Number.............4-5-3 Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-4 Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-4

Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours

Miscellaneous—Machine Bleed Fuel System ............................................4-1-1 Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air Cooler and Fuel Cooler .................................4-1-1 Replace Coolant Filter—If Equipped (S.N. —811697) ............................................4-1-2 Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles or High-Pressure Fuel Pump...........4-1-2 Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders, Pumps, or Motors.........................4-1-2 Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-3 Handling, Checking, and Servicing Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-4 Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-5 Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System .........4-1-6 Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-6 Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped ............4-1-7 Welding on Machine ..........................................4-1-7 Clean the Machine Regularly ............................4-1-8 Adding 12-Volt Accessories...............................4-1-8 JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System (MMS)—If Equipped......................................4-1-8 Keep ROPS Installed Properly ..........................4-1-9 Replacing Fuses..............................................4-1-10 Replacing Bucket Teeth...................................4-1-13 Replacing Bucket Tooth Tip—Heavy-Duty Bucket .............................4-1-14 Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series ...............4-1-14 Bucket Remove and Install..............................4-1-15 Track Sag General Information .......................4-1-19 Check Track Shoe Hardware ..........................4-1-19 Hardware Torque Specifications......................4-1-19 Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-20 Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-21

Miscellaneous—Specifications Engine Specifications ........................................4-6-1 Drain and Refill Capacities ................................4-6-1 Machine Specifications......................................4-6-2 Working Ranges ................................................4-6-4 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ..................................4-6-8 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ..................................4-6-9 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.).........4-6-10 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ................................4-6-11 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) .........................................................4-6-12 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) .........................................................4-6-13 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) ................................4-6-14 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) .........................................................4-6-15 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) .........................................................4-6-16

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Operational Checkout........................................4-2-1

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1 Engine ...............................................................4-3-2 Hydraulic System...............................................4-3-7

Continued on next page

061517

PN=4

Contents

Page

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) .........................................................4-6-17 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) .........................................................4-6-18 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) .........................................................4-6-19 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) ................................4-6-20 Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) .........................................................4-6-21 Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ................................4-6-22 Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ................................4-6-23 Lift Capacity—Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ...........................................4-6-24 Lift Capacity—Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ...........................................4-6-25

061517

PN=5

Contents

061517

PN=6

Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences Safety and Operator Convenience Features

15 14 2

12 13

9 11

1 8

TX1156520 —UN—15APR14

6 TX1156520 Excavator Safety and Operator Convenience Features

Please remember that the operator is the key to preventing accidents.

9. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.

1. Seat Belt With Retractors. Seat belt retractors help keep belts clean and convenient to use.

10. Travel Alarm. Alerts bystanders of forward or reverse machine movement.

2. Window Guarding. The stationary window with bars prevent contact with a moving boom.

11. Engine Fan Guard. A fan guard inside the engine compartment helps prevent contact with the hydraulically driven fan.

3. Rearview Mirrors. Rearview mirrors offer the operator a view of activity along side of the excavator. 4. Alternative Exit. The front window provides a large exit path if the cab door is blocked in an emergency situation. The rear window is an alternative exit, an alternative exit tool is also provided.

12. Horn. Standard horn is useful when driving or signaling coworkers.

5. Pilot Shutoff Lever. A lever near the cab exit reminds the operator to deactivate hydraulic functions before leaving the machine.

13. Cab with Heater, Defroster, and Air Conditioner. Ventilation system circulates both outside and inside air through filters for a clean working environment. Built in defroster vents direct air flow for effective window defogging/deicing. Air conditioner provides a comfortable, temperature-controlled working environment.

6. Steps. Wide, slip-resistant steps make entry and exit easier. Steps also provide a place to clean shoes.

14. Counterweight Mirror. The counterweight mirror offers the operator a view directly behind the excavator.

7. Handholds. Large, conveniently placed handholds make it easy to enter or exit the operator's station or service area.

15. ROPS and FOPS. Integrated rollover protective structure (ROPS) and falling object protective structure (FOPS) are designed to protect the operator. The enclosed lockable cabin also provides protection from the weather and reduces vandalism.

8. Swing Brake. Swing brake engages automatically when the swing is not operated. Helps secure upperstructure when transporting the machine.

CN93077,0000268 -19-13JAN15-1/1

1-1-1

061517

PN=31

Safety—General Precautions Recognize Safety Information T133555 —UN—15APR13

This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert for the potential of personal injury. Follow the precautions and safe operating practices highlighted by this symbol. A signal word — DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION — is used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards.

T133588 —19—28AUG00

On your machine, DANGER signs are red in color, WARNING signs are orange, and CAUTION signs are yellow. DANGER and WARNING signs are located near specific hazards. General precautions are on CAUTION labels.

TX,RECOGNIZE -19-28JUN10-1/1

Follow Safety Instructions

TS201 —UN—15APR13

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement. Be sure that new equipment components and repair parts include the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are available from your John Deere dealer. There can be additional safety information contained on parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not reproduced in this operator's manual. Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction. Keep your machine in proper working condition. Unauthorized modifications to the machine could impair the function or safety and affect machine life.

If you do not understand any part of this manual and need assistance, contact your John Deere dealer. TX,FOLLOW -19-20JAN11-1/1

Operate Only If Qualified Do not operate this machine unless the operator's manual has been read carefully, and you have been qualified by supervised training and instruction.

machine functions with the machine in an open area before starting to work. Know and observe all safety rules that may apply to every work situation and work site.

Operator should be familiar with the job site and surroundings before operating. Try all controls and TX,QUALIFIED -19-18JAN11-1/1

1-2-1

061517

PN=32

Safety—General Precautions

Wear Protective Equipment Guard against injury from flying pieces or metal or debris; wear goggles or safety glasses.

TS206 —UN—15APR13

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job. Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating machine. Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing. Wear suitable hearing protection such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud noises. Radio or music headphones are not suitable to use for hearing protection.

TX,WEAR,PE -19-22SEP10-1/1

Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications John Deere recommends using only genuine John Deere replacement parts to ensure machine performance. Never substitute genuine John Deere parts with alternate parts not intended for the application as these can create hazardous situations or hazardous performance. Non-John Deere parts, or any damage or malfunctions resulting from their use, are not covered by any John Deere warranty. Modifications of this machine, or addition of unapproved products or attachments, may affect machine stability or

reliability, and may create a hazard for the operator or others near the machine. The installer of any modification which may affect the electronic controls of this machine is responsible for establishing that the modification does not adversely affect the machine or its performance. Always contact an authorized dealer before making machine modifications that change the intended use, weight, or balance of the machine, or that alter machine controls, performance, or reliability. KR46761,00010A9 -19-03OCT16-1/1

Control Pattern Selector—If Equipped This machine may be equipped with a control pattern selector valve. Ensure all bystanders are clear of machine

and area is large enough to operate machine functions. Verify the machine response to each control movement.

DB84312,00000A5 -19-07JUL15-1/1

Add Cab Guarding for Special Uses Special work situations or machine attachments could create an environment with falling or flying objects. Working near an overhead bank, demolition work, using a hydraulic hammer or winch, working in a forestry application or wooded area, or working in a waste management application, for example, could require added guarding to protect the operator.

Additional level II FOPS (falling object protective structure), forestry protection packages, and special screens or guarding should be installed when falling or flying objects could enter or damage the machine. A rear screen should always be used with a winch to protect against a snapping cable. Before operating in any special work environments, follow the operator protection recommendations of the manufacturer of any specialized attachment or equipment. Contact your authorized John Deere dealer for information on protective guarding. TX,CABGUARD -19-12FEB13-1/1

1-2-2

061517

PN=33

Safety—General Precautions

Inspect Machine

Keep all guards and shields in good condition and properly installed. Fix damage and replace worn or broken parts immediately. Pay special attention to hydraulic hoses and electrical wiring.

T6607AQ —UN—15APR13

Inspect machine carefully each day by walking around it before starting.

TX,INSPECT -19-08SEP10-1/1

Entanglements in moving parts can cause serious injury. Stop engine before examining, adjusting, or maintaining any part of machine with moving parts. Keep guards and shields in place. Replace any guard or shield that has been removed for access as soon as service or repair is complete.

T133592 —UN—15APR13

Stay Clear of Moving Parts

TX,MOVING,PARTS -19-20JAN11-1/1

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands and body from high-pressure fluids. If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable medical source. Such information is available from Deere & Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

X9811 —UN—23AUG88

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

DX,FLUID -19-06OCT16-1/1

1-2-3

061517

PN=34

Safety—General Precautions

Avoid High-Pressure Oils

Never search for leaks with your hands. Protect hands. Use a piece of cardboard to find location of escaping oil. Stop engine and relieve pressure before disconnecting lines or working on hydraulic system.

T133840 —UN—20SEP00

If hydraulic oil penetrates your skin, see a doctor immediately. Injected oil must be removed surgically within hours or gangrene could result. Contact a knowledgeable medical source or the Deere & Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

T133509 —UN—15APR13

This machine uses a high-pressure hydraulic system. Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.

TX,HPOILS -19-20JAN11-1/1

Work In Ventilated Area

If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the doors and get outside air into the area.

TS220 —UN—15APR13

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area, remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust pipe extension.

DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1

1-2-4

061517

PN=35

Safety—General Precautions

Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling The removal of sulfur and other compounds in Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel decreases its conductivity and increases its ability to store a static charge. RG22142 —UN—17MAR14

Refineries may have treated the fuel with a static dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time. Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge when combustible vapors are present could result in a fire or explosion.

RG21992 —UN—21AUG13

Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding and bonding practices.

DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1

T133552 —UN—15APR13

Prevent Fires Handle Fluids Safely: All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolant mixtures are flammable. Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Never refuel machine while smoking or when near sparks or flame. Clean Machine Regularly: Keep flammable debris (trash, leaves, twigs, straw, and so forth), grease and oil from accumulating in engine compartment, around fuel lines, hydraulic lines, exhaust components, and electrical wiring. Never store oily rags or flammable materials inside a machine compartment.

T133553 —UN—07SEP00

Maintain Hoses, Tubes, and Wiring: Replace hoses and tubes immediately if they begin to leak, and clean up any oil spills. Examine electrical wiring and connectors frequently for damage. Keep A Fire Extinguisher Available: Always keep a multipurpose fire extinguisher on or near the machine. Know how to use an extinguisher properly.

T133554 —UN—07SEP00

Be Aware of the Operating Environment: Airborne debris may contain sparks or embers. Do not operate near any flame.

TX,PREVENT,FIRE -19-09JUN16-1/1

1-2-5

061517

PN=36

Safety—General Precautions

In Case of Machine Fire CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from exposed flames. Maintain safe distance.

TS227 —UN—15APR13

• Turn the engine off. • Turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position, if equipped.

• If possible, fight the fire using the portable fire

extinguisher or other fire suppression equipment, if equipped. • Ensure that the fire does not spread to the surrounding area. Do not risk injury. If a fire is too far advanced, do not try to extinguish fire. • Call for help.

In Case of Machine Fire

CN93077,00000B2 -19-09FEB16-1/1

Prevent Battery Explosions Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.

TS204 —UN—15APR13

Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer. Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F). Keep battery electrolyte levels properly maintained.

Battery Explosions KR46761,00010B4 -19-26JAN16-1/1

Handle Chemical Products Safely

A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific details on chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response techniques. Check the MSDS before you start any job using a hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow procedures and recommended equipment.

TS1132 —UN—15APR13

Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants, coolants, paints, and adhesives.

(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical products used with John Deere equipment.) DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93-1/1

1-2-6

061517

PN=37

Safety—General Precautions

Handle Starting Fluid Safely Starting fluid is highly flammable. Keep all sparks and flame away when using it. Keep starting fluid away from batteries and cables. TS1356 —UN—18MAR92

To prevent accidental discharge when storing the pressurized can, keep the cap on the container, and store in a cool, protected location. Do not incinerate or puncture a starting fluid container. Do not use starting fluid on an engine equipped with glow plugs or an air intake heater.

DX,FIRE3 -19-14MAR14-1/1

Decommissioning — Proper Recycling and Disposal of Fluids and Components

TS1133 —UN—15APR13

Safety and environmental stewardship measures must be taken into account when decommissioning a machine and/or component. These measures include the following:

• Use appropriate tools and personal protective

equipment such as clothing, gloves, face shields or glasses, during the removal or handling of objects and materials. • Follow instructions for specialized components. • Release stored energy by lowering suspended machine elements, relaxing springs, disconnecting the battery or other electrical power, and releasing pressure in hydraulic components, accumulators, and other similar systems. • Minimize exposure to components which may have residue from agricultural chemicals, such as fertilizers and pesticides. Handle and dispose of these components appropriately. • Carefully drain engines, fuel tanks, radiators, hydraulic cylinders, reservoirs, and lines before recycling components. Use leak-proof containers when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers. • Do not pour waste fluids onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source. • Observe all national, state, and local laws, regulations, or ordinances governing the handling or disposal of waste fluids (example: oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid);

filters; batteries; and, other substances or parts. Burning of flammable fluids or components in other than specially designed incinerators may be prohibited by law and could result in exposure to harmful fumes or ashes. • Service and dispose of air conditioning systems appropriately. Government regulations may require a certified service center to recover and recycle air conditioning refrigerants which could damage the atmosphere if allowed to escape. • Evaluate recycling options for tires, metal, plastic, glass, rubber, and electronic components which may be recyclable, in part or completely. • Contact your local environmental or recycling center, or your John Deere dealer for information on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste. DX,DRAIN -19-01JUN15-1/1

Exhaust Filter Ash Handling and Disposal CAUTION: Under federal, state, and local laws or regulations, exhaust filter ash can be classified as a hazardous waste. Hazardous waste must be disposed of in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws or regulations

governing hazardous waste disposal. Only a qualified service provider should remove ash from the exhaust filter. Personal protective equipment and clothing, maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition, should be used when handling and cleaning exhaust filter. See your authorized dealer for exhaust filter ash handling and disposal. TX,ASH,DISP -19-20JAN11-1/1

1-2-7

061517

PN=38

Safety—General Precautions

Prepare for Emergencies Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospital, and fire department near your telephone.

TS291 —UN—15APR13

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1

Clean Debris from Machine

Clean any oil spills or fuel spills on machine surfaces. Temperature in engine compartment could go up immediately after engine is stopped. BE ON GUARD FOR FIRES DURING THIS PERIOD. Open access door(s) to cool the engine faster, and clean engine compartment.

T6669AG —UN—15APR13

Keep engine compartment, radiator, batteries, hydraulic lines, exhaust components, fuel tank, and operator's station clean and free of debris.

TX,DEBRIS -19-20JAN11-1/1

1-2-8

061517

PN=39

Safety—Operating Precautions Prevent falls by facing the machine when you get on and off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps and handrails. Never use machine controls as handholds. Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or dismount a moving machine.

T133468 —UN—15APR13

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

TX,STEPS -19-09FEB11-1/1

Avoid unexpected machine movement. Start engine only while sitting in operator's seat. Ensure that all controls and working tools are in proper position for a parked machine. Never attempt to start engine from the ground. Do not attempt to start engine by shorting across the starter solenoid terminals.

T133715 —UN—15APR13

Start Only From Operator's Seat

TX,SOFOS -19-20JAN11-1/1

Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to fasten seat belt when loading and unloading from trucks and during other uses. Examine seat belt frequently. Be sure that webbing is not cut or torn. Replace seat belt immediately if any part is damaged or does not function properly.

T133716 —19—17APR13

Use and Maintain Seat Belt

The complete seat belt assembly should be replaced every three years, regardless of appearance. TX,SEAT,BELT -19-20JAN11-1/1

Be careful not to accidentally actuate control levers when coworkers are present. Pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position during work interruptions. Pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position and stop engine before allowing anyone to approach machine. Always lower work equipment to the ground and pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position before standing up or leaving the operator's seat. Stop engine before exiting.

T216779 —UN—22NOV05

Prevent Unintended Machine Movement

VD76477,000036D -19-19APR11-1/1

1-3-1

061517

PN=40

Safety—Operating Precautions

Avoid Work Site Hazards T134986 —UN—31OCT00

Avoid contact with gas lines, buried cables, and water lines. Call utility line location services to identify all underground utilities before digging. Prepare work site properly. Avoid operating near structures or objects that could fall onto the machine. Clear away debris that could move unexpectedly if run over. Avoid boom or arm contact with overhead obstacles or overhead electrical lines. Never move any part of machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice the line insulator length to overhead wires.

Work Site Hazards

T133650 —UN—27SEP00

Keep bystanders clear at all times. Keep bystanders away from raised booms, attachments, and unsupported loads. Avoid swinging or raising booms, attachments, or loads over or near bystanders. Use barricades or a signal person to keep vehicles and pedestrians away. Use a signal person if moving machine in congested areas or where visibility is restricted. Always keep signal person in view. Coordinate hand signals before starting machine. Work Site Hazards

Operate only on solid footing with strength sufficient to support machine. When working close to an excavation, position travel motors away from the hole. T133549 —UN—24AUG00

Reduce machine speed when operating with tool on or near ground when obstacles may be hidden (e.g., during snow removal or clearing mud, dirt, etc). At high speeds, hitting obstacles (rocks, uneven concrete, or manholes) can cause a sudden stop. Always wear seat belt.

Work Site Hazards TX03679,0001748 -19-08JUL15-1/1

Keep Riders Off Machine Only allow operator on machine.

T7273AH —UN—08JUN90

Riders are subject to injury. They may fall from machine, be caught between machine parts, or be struck by foreign objects. Riders may obstruct operator’s view or impair the ability to operate machine safely.

Keep Riders Off Machine TX03679,0001726 -19-30JUN16-1/1

1-3-2

061517

PN=41

Safety—Operating Precautions

Avoid Backover Accidents

PC10857XW —UN—15APR13

Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are clear of machine path. Turn around and look directly for best visibility. Use mirrors to assist in checking all around machine. Keep windows and mirrors clean, adjusted, and in good repair. Be certain reverse warning alarm is working properly. Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed or when in close quarters. Keep signal person in view at all times. Use prearranged hand signals to communicate. Do not rely on the rear camera and radar object detection systems, if equipped, to determine if personnel are behind the machine. The system has limitations due to maintenance practices, environmental conditions, and operating range.

TX,AVOID,BACKOVER -19-04MAR16-1/1

Inspect and Maintain ROPS

To maintain the ROPS:

A damaged rollover protective structure (ROPS) should be replaced, not reused.

• Replace missing hardware using correct grade

The protection offered by ROPS could be impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding, bending, drilling, or cutting.

• Check hardware torque. • Check isolation mounts for damage, looseness, or

hardware.

wear; replace them if necessary.

• Check ROPS for cracks or physical damage.

If ROPS was loosened or removed for any reason, inspect it carefully before operating the machine again. TX,ROPS -19-20JAN11-1/1

1-3-3

061517

PN=42

Safety—Operating Precautions

Avoid Machine Tip Over T133716 —19—17APR13

Use seat belt at all times. Do not jump if the machine tips. Operator will be unlikely to jump clear and the machine may crush the operator. Load and unload from trucks or trailers carefully. Be sure truck is wide enough and on a firm level surface. Use loading ramps and attach them properly to truck bed. Avoid trucks with steel beds because tracks slip more easily on steel.

Use Seat Belt

Be careful with heavy loads. Using oversize buckets or lifting heavy objects reduces machine stability. Extending a heavy load or swinging it over side of undercarriage may cause machine to tip.

T133545 —UN—15SEP00

Be careful on slopes. Use extra care on soft, rocky or frozen ground. Machine may slip sideways in these conditions. When traveling up or down slopes, keep the bucket on uphill side and just above ground level.

Unloading Machine

T133803 —UN—27SEP00

Ensure solid footing. Use extra care when operating near banks or excavations that may cave-in and cause machine to tip or fall.

Do Not Jump TX03679,00016DF -19-30JUN16-1/1

Use Special Care When Lifting Objects T133839 —UN—27SEP00

Never use this machine to lift people. Never lift a load above another person. Keep bystanders clear of all areas where a load might fall if it breaks free. Do not leave the seat when there is a raised load. Do not exceed lift capacity limits posted on machine and in this manual. Extending heavy loads too far or swinging over undercarriage side may cause machine to tip over.

Use Special Care When Lifting Objects

Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads. Be sure slings or chains have adequate capacity and are in good condition. Use tether lines to guide loads and prearranged hand signals to communicate with co-workers. TX03679,00016E1 -19-08JUL15-1/1

1-3-4

061517

PN=43

Safety—Operating Precautions

Travel Safely When working on steep slopes, travel as straight up and down as possible to prevent roll-over. T6964AD —UN—20DEC88

DO NOT PARK ON A HILLSIDE OR AN INCLINE. Always park the machine on level ground. Know the location of bystanders before moving the machine. Always keep the reverse/travel warning alarm in working condition. The alarm warns bystanders when the machine starts to move in reverse.

Travel Safely

Use a signal person when moving the machine in congested areas. Coordinate hand signals before starting the machine. KR46761,00010AB -19-27MAR17-1/1

Prevent Acid Burns Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into eyes. Avoid the hazard by: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte. Use proper jump start procedure.

If you spill acid on yourself: 1. Flush your skin with water. 2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid. 3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get medical attention immediately. If acid is swallowed: TS203 —UN—23AUG88

1. Do not induce vomiting. 2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 2 L (2 quarts). 3. Get medical attention immediately.

DX,POISON -19-21APR93-1/1

Add and Operate Attachments Safely Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments could affect machine stability or reliability and could create a hazard for others near the machine. Ensure that a qualified person is involved in attachment installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection

is required or recommended. Verify that all connections are secure and attachment responds properly to controls. Carefully read attachment manual and follow all instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its characteristics and range of motion.

TX,ATTACH -19-20JAN11-1/1

1-3-5

061517

PN=44

Safety—Maintenance Precautions Park and Prepare for Service Safely Warn others of service work. Always park and prepare machine for service or repair properly.

• Park machine on a level surface and lower equipment T133332 —19—17APR13

to the ground.

• Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position. Stop engine and remove key.

• Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an obvious place in the operator's station.

Securely support machine or attachment before working under it.

• Do not support machine with any hydraulically actuated

Do Not Operate Tag

equipment.

• Do not support machine with cinder blocks or wooden pieces that may crumble or crush.

• Do not support machine with a single jack or other devices that may slip out of place.

TS229 —UN—23AUG88

Understand service procedures before beginning repairs. Keep service area clean and dry. Use two people whenever the engine must be running for service work.

Support Machine Properly OUT4001,000089A -19-02JUL15-1/1

Service Cooling System Safely

Do not service radiator through the radiator cap. Only fill through the surge tank filler cap. Shut off engine. Only remove surge tank filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely.

TS281 —UN—15APR13

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling system can cause serious burns.

TX,SURGE -19-19JAN11-1/1

1-4-1

061517

PN=45

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust. Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch. TS220 —UN—15APR13

Remove paint before heating:

• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area

to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed, wear an approved respirator before heating or welding. • If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust. Wear an approved respirator. • If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or heating.

Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding will take place.

Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic fumes and dust away. Dispose of paint and solvent properly. DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1

Make Welding Repairs Safely T133547 —UN—15APR13

IMPORTANT: Disable electrical power before welding. Turn off main battery switch and disconnect positive (+) and negative (-) battery cables. Do not weld or apply heat on any part of a reservoir or tank that has contained oil or fuel. Heat from welding and cutting can cause oil, fuel, or cleaning solution to create gases which are explosive, flammable, or toxic. Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

Avoid welding or heating near pressurized fluid lines. Flammable spray may result and cause severe burns if pressurized lines malfunction as a result of heating. Do not let heat go beyond work area to nearby pressurized lines.

Make sure there is good ventilation. Wear eye protection and protective equipment when welding.

Remove paint properly. Do not inhale paint dust or fumes. Use a qualified welding technician for structural repairs. KR46761,00010AD -19-22JAN16-1/1

Always wear protective goggles or safety glasses and other protective equipment before striking hardened parts. Hammering hardened metal parts such as pins and bucket teeth could dislodge chips at high velocity. Use a soft hammer or a brass bar between hammer and object to prevent chipping.

T133738 —UN—15APR13

Drive Metal Pins Safely

TX,PINS -19-20JAN11-1/1

1-4-2

061517

PN=46

Safety—Maintenance Precautions

During exhaust filter cleaning operations, the engine may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust filter components reach temperatures hot enough to burn people, or ignite or melt common materials. Keep machine away from people, animals, or structures which may be susceptible to harm or damage from hot exhaust gases or components. Avoid potential fire or explosion hazards from flammable materials and vapors near the exhaust. Keep exhaust outlet away from people and anything that can melt, burn, or explode.

TS227 —UN—15APR13

Clean Exhaust Filter Safely

Closely monitor machine and surrounding area for smoldering debris during and after exhaust filter cleaning.

Always make sure that engine is stopped while hauling machine on a truck or trailer. Contact with exhaust components while still hot can result in serious personal injury. Avoid contact with these components until cooled to safe temperatures.

TS271 —UN—23AUG88

Adding fuel while an engine is running can create a fire or explosion hazard. Always stop engine before refueling machine and clean up any spilled fuel.

If service procedure requires engine to be running:

• Only engage power-driven parts required by service procedure

and machine

Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power-driven parts. Always disable movement (neutral), set the parking brake or mechanism and disconnect power to attachments or tools before leaving the operator’s station.

TS1693 —UN—09DEC09

• Ensure that other people are clear of operator station

TS1695 —UN—07DEC09

Shut off engine and remove key (if equipped) before leaving the machine unattended.

DX,EXHAUST,FILTER -19-12JAN11-1/1

1-4-3

061517

PN=47

Safety—Safety Signs Safety Signs

7 8

9 10 11

5 12

4 3

7 13

TX1157537 —UN—09APR14

TX1157537 Safety Signs 1— WARNING, Stay Clear 2— DANGER, Start Only From Seat 3— WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover 4— WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade 5— WARNING, Pressurized System

6— IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit 7— Protective Structure Certification 8— CAUTION, Avoid Injury from Slip or Fall 9— DANGER, Electric Lines

10— CAUTION, Operate Machine 13— CAUTION, Prevent Injury Safely 14— CAUTION, Pinch Point 11— WARNING, Avoid Serious 15— CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot Crushing Injury from Boom 12— CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped

Continued on next page

1-5-1

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-1/16

061517

PN=48

Safety—Safety Signs

1. WARNING, Stay Clear Operator may swing or reverse machine.

TX1104370 —19—19DEC12

This safety label is located at the rear of the machine on each side of the counterweight.

WARNING, Stay Clear CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-2/16

2. DANGER, Start Only From Seat Start only from seat in park or neutral. Starting in gear kills. TX1151465 —19—23JAN14

This safety label is positioned on the starter inside the engine compartment.

DANGER, Start Only From Seat CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-3/16

3. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover Machine is less stable with boom and arm removed.

• Travel and swing very slowly. • Use extreme care when loading.

TX1111959 —19—12APR12

- Avoid counter-rotation. - Do not swing counterweight beyond edge of truck bed. • Keep counterweight pointed uphill on inclines. This safety label is located outside the left front service door. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover Continued on next page

1-5-2

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-4/16

061517

PN=49

Safety—Safety Signs

4. WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade Avoid injury, keep clear of rotating fan blade.

TX1125730 —19—17DEC12

This safety label is located on top of the engine.

WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-5/16

5. WARNING, Pressurized System

TX1099924 —UN—24OCT11

Hot coolant can cause serious burns, injury or death. To open the cooling system filler cap, stop the engine and wait until the cooling system components are cool. Loosen the cooling system pressure cap slowly in order to relieve the pressure. This safety label is located on the surge tank cap.

WARNING, Pressurized System CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-6/16

6. IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit Use tool to break window. Always keep tool in machine.

TX1156964 —19—04APR14

This safety label is located inside the cab on the left ROPS post.

IMPORTANT, Secondary Exit Continued on next page

1-5-3

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-7/16

061517

PN=50

Safety—Safety Signs

7. Protective Structure Certification Any alteration or modification to this structure voids the certification. TX1156960 —UN—07APR14

Always wear seat belt when moving. This safety label is located inside the cab on the left front ROPS post or on the right front corner of the outside cab.

Protective Structure Certification CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-8/16

8. CAUTION, Avoid Injury from Slip or Fall DO NOT use as a handhold. Window handle will move with the front window. TX1104375 —19—12APR12

This safety label is located inside the cab on the handle of the front window.

CAUTION, Avoid Injury from Slip or Fall CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-9/16

9. DANGER, Electric Lines Serious injury or death can result from contact with electric lines. TX1104374 —19—19DEC12

Never move any part of unit or load closer to electric line than 3 M [10 ft.] plus twice the line insulator length. This safety label is located inside the cab on the right-side window.

DANGER, Electric Lines Continued on next page

1-5-4

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-10/16

061517

PN=51

Safety—Safety Signs

10. CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY - Read and understand Operator’s Manual before operating this machine. TX1104372 —19—12APR12

• Read and understand the Operator's Manual and safety manual prior to operating this machine.

• Controls may be changed for attachment or operator preference. Verify control pattern before operating.

• Before leaving the operator’s station:

- Always lower working tools to the ground. - Engage hydraulic control lockout lever. - Stop engine unless service procedure requires engine to be running. - Do not leave machine running unattended. • Keep riders off machine. • Avoid contact between boom/attachments and overhead obstacles when operating or hauling machine. • Keep bystanders clear of machine. • Upperstructure position affects travel direction. Operate pedals or levers to determine travel direction before moving the machine. • Avoid tipping - Do not lift or move objects that exceed machine stability. • Avoid parking machine on an incline.

CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely

This safety label is located inside the cab on the right-side window. CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-11/16

11. WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury from Boom

TX1104373 —19—12APR12

Never place any part of body beyond window bars or frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom control lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged. DO NOT remove window bars. If window is missing or broken, replace immediately. This safety label is located inside the cab on the right-side window.

WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury from Boom Continued on next page

1-5-5

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-12/16

061517

PN=52

Safety—Safety Signs

12. CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped Alternate control patterns are available for this backhoe. Always verify control response before operating. TX1104371 —19—12APR12

This safety label is located inside the cab on the right-side window.

CAUTION, Alternate Control Patterns—If Equipped CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-13/16

13. CAUTION, Prevent Injury To prevent injury from the front window falling, lock window in place with the lock pin. TX1104376 —19—12APR12

This safety label is located inside the cab on the right-side window.

CAUTION, Prevent Injury CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-14/16

14. CAUTION, Pinch Point Avoid personal injury when operating seat fore-aft lever. TX1157159 —UN—04APR14

This safety label is located on the front of seat pedestal.

CAUTION, Pinch Point Continued on next page

1-5-6

CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-15/16

061517

PN=53

Safety—Safety Signs

15. CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot Release internal pressure by pressing air breather button prior to removing reservoir cap. TX1156966 —19—04APR14

This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic reservoir.

CAUTION, Do Not Open Hot CN93077,0000266 -19-12AUG14-16/16

1-5-7

061517

PN=54

Safety—Safety Signs

TX1105472 —19—13JAN12

Safety Signs Installed on Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped

Hydraulic Coupler Safety Signs CN93077,0000265 -19-02APR14-1/1

1-5-8

061517

PN=55

Operation—Operator's Station

Pedals, Levers, and Panels

TX1086606 —UN—10JAN11

TX1086605 —UN—10JAN11

Pedals, Levers, and Panels

Fuse Box and Left Console

4— Right Travel Lever 1— Left Pilot Control Lever (3 5— Right Travel Pedal button lever optional)/Horn Button (bottom button on top 6— Right Pilot Control Lever/Power Dig Button of lever) (bottom button on top of 2— Left Travel Pedal lever) 3— Left Travel Lever 7— Monitor

8— Switch Panel 9— Key Switch 10— Right Console 11— Operator's Seat 12— Cab Door Release Lever 13— Pilot Shutoff Lever 14— Rear Deck

15— Lighter/Accessory Power Port 16— Fuse Box Cover 17— Left Console 18— Storage Compartment

KR46761,0000E3D -19-06MAR15-1/1

Switch Panel 9— Auto-Idle Switch 10— Travel Mode Switch 11— Power Mode Button 12— Work Light Switch 13— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch 14— Key Switch 15— Keypad

TX1086613 —UN—10JAN11

1— Back Button 2— Home Button 3— Monitor Dial 4— Temperature Control/Mode Switch 5— Blower Speed Switch 6— Radio Tuning Switch 7— Radio Power and Volume Switch 8— Engine Speed Dial

Switch Panel OUT4001,000073B -19-23FEB16-1/1

2-1-1

061517

PN=56

Operation—Operator's Station

Switch Panel Functions 1. Back Button (for monitor use)—Press button to return to previous menu. 2. Home Button (for monitor use)—Press button to return to default screen when in any of the monitor menus. If key switch is in OFF position, press and hold button to check hour meter and fuel amount on monitor. 3. Monitor Dial (for monitor use)—Press dial to go from default screen to main menu screen. Rotate dial to highlight desired menu function on monitor. Press dial to select desired screen information or to confirm desired action. 4. Temperature Control/Mode Switch—Press switch to toggle between different air vent settings. Air conditioner display on monitor shows different settings each time switch is pressed. There are four different settings:

• Air flows out of front vent and defroster vents. • Air flows out of front, rear, and defroster vents. • Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and defroster vents. • Air flows out of foot vents. Rotate switch counterclockwise for cooler air setting and clockwise for warmer air setting. Temperature setting changes on air conditioner display as switch is rotated either way. 5. Blower Speed Switch—Press switch while air conditioner is OFF to select AUTO mode (blower speed setting and air flow setting are selected automatically). Temperature control/mode switch can be rotated to operator's preferred cab temperature setting. Blower speed and air flow settings adjust automatically to reach and maintain desired cab temperature. If blower speed switch is rotated or temperature control/mode switch is pressed while in AUTO mode, AUTO mode is canceled and all settings need to be adjusted by operator as needed. If blower speed switch is pressed while air conditioner is on, air conditioner turns off. Blower speed switch must be on to operate on/off function of air conditioner in monitor menu. Rotate switch to adjust blower speed to desired setting when not in AUTO mode. 6. Radio Tuning Switch—Press switch to toggle between AM and FM frequency. Rotate switch to select desired radio station. 7. Radio Power and Volume Switch—Press switch to turn radio on or off. Rotate switch to adjust volume to desired setting. 8. Engine Speed Dial—Turn dial clockwise to increase engine speed or counterclockwise to decrease engine speed.

With engine on, move auto-idle switch to A/I ON and engine speed dial to above auto-idle speed. Auto-idle indicator appears on monitor when auto-idle is on. Engine runs at engine speed dial setting for 4 seconds and then auto-idle system slows engine to auto-idle engine speed. When any pilot control lever is operated, engine speed increases to engine speed dial setting. When pilot control levers are placed back in neutral position, auto-idle circuit automatically slows engine to auto-idle engine speed after 4 seconds. Turn auto-idle switch to A/I OFF and set engine speed dial to improve machine control in difficult work areas, loading, and unloading. Auto-idle indicator disappears on monitor. 10. Travel Mode Switch—Turn switch to select between fast (rabbit) or slow (turtle) speed travel. 11. Power Mode Button—Press button to select different engine speed modes:

• ECO (economy) Mode—use to improve fuel efficiency

and reduce noise level with a small difference in engine speed. • PWR (power) Mode—use when general digging work is needed. • H/P (high power) Mode—use when more flow is desired for booming up or rolling in the arm in excavation work.

12. Work Light Switch—Switch has three positions:

• First Position—drive light on base of machine turns on. Switch panel also illuminates.

• Second Position—drive light on base of machine,

upper cab lights, and on boom turn on. Switch panel illuminates and monitor changes to night mode (background lighting is dimmed). • OFF—work lights and switch panel illumination turns off. 13. Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch—Switch has five operating positions: NOTE: Wiper does not operate unless upper front window is closed.

• OFF—wiper stops operating and is retracted. • INT (slow)—wiper operates intermittently at 8-second intervals.

• INT (medium)—wiper operates intermittently at 6-second intervals.

• INT (fast)—wiper operates intermittently at 3-second intervals.

• ON—wiper operates continuously. Push and hold switch to squirt fluid on windshield. If switch is held more than 2 seconds, wiper operates until switch is released. Do not hold-down switch for more than 20 seconds. 14. Key Switch—Switch has four positions:

9. Auto-Idle Switch—Turn switch to select between A/I • OFF ON or A/I OFF. Continued on next page • ACC

2-1-2

CN93077,0000259 -19-05MAY16-1/2

061517

PN=57

Operation—Operator's Station

• ON • START

• Press keypad numbers 1—8 while radio is on to switch between programmed stations.

• When work light switch is on position 2, monitor

15. Keypad—Keypad has different applications:

changes to night mode (background lighting is dimmed). Press and hold number 0 on keypad to adjust monitor back to daytime mode display.

• Use numbers 0—9 to enter password at machine start-up if equipped.

CN93077,0000259 -19-05MAY16-2/2

Rear Left Panel Lighter (1): For operator convenience. Can also be used as an electrical port for 24-volt appliances only.

1— Lighter

TX1085863A —UN—14DEC10

Accessory Power Port (2): 12-volt, 5-amp electrical port provided for service and maintenance. 2— Accessory Power Port

Rear Left Panel ER79617,0000D57 -19-29MAY14-1/1

Horn Horn button (1) is located on top of left pilot control lever. TX1086237A —UN—27DEC10

1— Horn Button

Horn Button CN93077,000025A -19-29JAN15-1/1

Power Dig Button

TX1086698A —UN—08JAN11

The power dig button (1) is located on the right pilot control lever. Press and hold down power dig button for an 8-second increase in hydraulic power. Release button to reset power dig function. Power dig is automatically activated when the following conditions are met:

• Boom up • No arm in • High delivery pressure 3-Button Pilot Control Lever Shown

1— Power Dig Button

OUT4001,000073D -19-11JUN15-1/1

2-1-3

061517

PN=58

Operation—Operator's Station

Pilot Shutoff Lever

TX1086699A —UN—08JAN11

The pilot shutoff lever (1) shuts off hydraulic pilot pressure to all pilot control valves. When pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position, the machine will not move if a lever or pedal is accidentally moved. Engine will not start with pilot shutoff lever in the unlocked (DOWN) position. Always pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position when stopping the engine or leaving operator’s station. Push pilot shutoff lever forward to unlocked (DOWN) position to operate machine. Lever in Locked (UP) Position

1— Pilot Shutoff Lever

OUT4001,000073E -19-12JUN15-1/1

Left Console NOTE: There are standard and optional switches on the left console. Before using the switches on the left console, be aware of what kind of optional devices are equipped on the machine. Raise the armrest when operating the switches. 3— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch

TX1086700A —UN—08JAN11

1— Reversing Fan Switch (if equipped) 2— Seat Heater Switch (if equipped)

Left Console OUT4001,000073F -19-23FEB15-1/1

Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch

TX1001227 —UN—14DEC05

NOTE: If alarm is not operating during normal transport, or if alarm sounds when engine is running and machine is stationary, see an authorized John Deere dealer. The travel alarm sounds when a travel pedal or lever is activated and will continue as long as the tracks are moving. When travel motion stops, the travel alarm switch is reset. After the initial 13-second alarm, alarm can be silenced by depressing the right half of the travel alarm cancel switch (1) located on the left console.

Travel Alarm Cancel Switch

1— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch OUT4001,0000740 -19-01APR16-1/1

2-1-4

061517

PN=59

Operation—Operator's Station

Seat Heater Switch—If Equipped Seat heater switch (1) is located on the left console.

TX1198636A —UN—28JUL15

Use switch to turn seat heater ON (2) or OFF (3). When seat heater is ON, it will automatically cycle between 10°C and 20°C (50°F and 68°F). 1— Seat Heater Switch 2— ON

3— OFF

Seat Heater Switch ER79617,0000D58 -19-28JUL15-1/1

Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped

TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05

NOTE: The reversing fan function shall not be reactivated within 1 minute of its last completion (this time includes AUTO cycle). The reversing fan switch has three positions:

• AUTO: Every 60 minutes, the radiator cooling fan will

automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without intervention from the operator when engine rpm is above auto-idle speed. • OFF: Fan resumes normal operation. • MANUAL: When pressed and held for 3 seconds, the fan will reverse direction for 30 seconds when right portion of switch is pressed.

Reversing Fan Switch

ER79617,0000D59 -19-05APR16-1/1

Rear Light Switch—If Equipped Press rear light switch (1) to ON position (2) to turn on rear lights on cab roof. 3— OFF Position

TX1164887A —UN—09JUL14

1— Rear Light Switch 2— ON Position

Rear Light Switch KR46761,0000CC3 -19-09JUL14-1/1

2-1-5

061517

PN=60

Operation—Operator's Station

Right Console

TX1089996A —UN—28MAR11

NOTE: There are standard and optional switches on the right console. Before using the switches on the right console, be aware of what kind of optional devices are equipped on the machine. Raise the armrest when operating the switches. 1— Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch 2— Right Enable Switch

3— Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch

Right Console Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company DB84312,00000B8 -19-29JAN15-1/1

Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch

TX1086795A —UN—11JAN11

CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust filter parked cleaning can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with hot gases and components. During exhaust filter parked cleaning, the engine may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust filter components may reach temperatures hot enough to burn people and ignite or melt common materials. Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch

Avoid death or serious injury from machine movement. Do not leave running machine unattended during exhaust filter cleaning.

1— Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always park machine in a safe location and check for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level before beginning exhaust filter parked cleaning. The exhaust filter parked cleaning switch (1) is located on the right console. Before starting the parked cleaning process, the machine needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This safe state includes three conditions:

• Machine is parked in a safe place with the front attachment lowered to the ground.

take place or the operator can check the restriction level bar graph in the monitor. See Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.) Once the safe state conditions are met, press and hold the right half of exhaust filter parked cleaning switch for 3 seconds to begin a parked cleaning procedure. Monitor will show a progress screen during the cleaning and will prompt the operator when the cleaning is complete. For more information, see Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning. (Section 2-3.)

• Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position. • Engine speed dial is set to slow idle. An exhaust filter alarm indicator will appear on the monitor to inform the operator when a parked cleaning needs to

CN93077,000024E -19-23FEB15-1/1

2-1-6

061517

PN=61

Operation—Operator's Station

Right Enable Switch The right enable switch (1) is located on the right console.

TX1086796A —UN—11JAN11

Press right half of switch to enable auxiliary functions on the right pilot control lever. Press left half of switch to disable auxiliary functions on the right pilot control lever. 1— Right Enable Switch

Right Enable Switch OUT4001,0000747 -19-11JAN11-1/1

Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch

TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11

The Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) allows operator to accept or decline software updates available to the machine when prompted by an alarm on the monitor. LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when the alarm appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED will be green. Press left side of SAR switch (red LED) to DECLINE installation (2) of software updates. Press right side of SAR switch (green LED) to ACCEPT installation (3) of software updates. For more information on SAR functionality, see Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Delivery Process and Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Operation. (Section 2-3.)

Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch 1— Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch 2— DECLINE Installation

3— ACCEPT Installation

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company OUT4001,0000748 -19-22JAN11-1/1

Auxiliary Function Enable Switch—If Equipped TX1168382A —UN—11AUG14

NOTE: The pilot control shutoff lever must be in the unlock (DOWN) position. The auxiliary function enable switch (1) is located on the right console. Press auxiliary function enable switch to enable auxiliary function lever (AFL) on the right pilot control lever. Light-emitting diode (LED) on auxiliary function enable switch illuminates when functions are enabled. Press the auxiliary function enable switch again to disable AFL. LED turns off when functions are disabled.

Auxiliary Function Enable Switch 1— Auxiliary Function Enable Switch

For more information, see Auxiliary Function Lever (AFL)—If Equipped. (Section 2-3.)

DJ54098,0000409 -19-23FEB16-1/1

2-1-7

061517

PN=62

Operation—Operator's Station

Cab Heater and Air Conditioner CAB HEATER OPERATION AUTO Operation

TX1086733A —UN—11JAN11

1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode (blower speed setting and air flow setting are then selected automatically). 2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting. Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either way. Blower speed and air flow settings adjust automatically to reach and maintain desired cab temperature. Manual Operation 1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode. Rotate blower speed switch either way to cancel AUTO mode and set the blower speed manually to desired speed setting. 2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting. Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either way. 3. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle between different air vent options. The air conditioner display on the monitor will show the different settings each time the switch is pressed. There are four different settings: - Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of foot vents. NOTE: Usually the cab heater turns the dehumidifier function off. Dehumidifier function can be turned on from monitor menu. See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.) Defroster Operation

Cab Heater and Air Conditioner Operation 1— Blower Speed Switch

2— Temperature Control/Mode Switch

AUTO mode and toggle between different air vent options. The air conditioner display on the monitor will show the different settings each time the switch is pressed. For best defrosting results, select either: - Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents. 5. Control air flow direction by adjusting the vents in the cab to blow towards the windows. 6. Rotate temperature control/mode switch as needed to control preferred air temperature. 7. Rotate blower speed switch as needed to set preferred fan speed. Air Conditioner Operation NOTE: During off season, operate the air conditioner at least once a month for several minutes with the engine running at slow idle to protect each part of the air conditioner compressor from lack of lubricant.

1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode. During cold AUTO Operation weather season when starting the engine, the engine coolant temperature and air temperature in the cab 1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is are low. The heater/air conditioner unit controls the OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode (blower speed blow rate to the minimum in order to restrict cool air setting and air flow setting are selected automatically). from flowing into the cab. 2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to reach 2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting. reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting. Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either way. Blower speed and air flow settings adjust way. automatically to reach and maintain desired cab 3. Set the circulation mode to fresh air using the monitor temperature. menu. See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.) Manual Operation 4. Once AUTO mode is operating and cab starts to heat up, press temperature control/mode switch to cancel Continued on next page OUT4001,0000741 -19-29JUN16-1/2

2-1-8

061517

PN=63

Operation—Operator's Station

1. Press blower speed switch while air conditioner is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode. Rotate blower speed switch either way to cancel AUTO mode and set the blower speed manually to desired speed setting. 2. Turn the air conditioner ON from the monitor menu. See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.) 3. Rotate temperature control/mode switch to reach operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting. Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either way. 4. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle between different air vent options. The air conditioner

display on the monitor will show the different settings each time the switch is pressed. There are four different settings: NOTE: If lower front window becomes cloudy, defroster vents should be closed. - Air flows out of front vent and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster vents. - Air flows out of foot vents.

OUT4001,0000741 -19-29JUN16-2/2

Selecting Display Between Celsius and Fahrenheit

TX1087258A —UN—24JAN11

The cab temperature (1) is always shown in the air conditioner display on the monitor. Temperature display can be changed between degrees Celsius (°C) and Fahrenheit (°F) using the Unit Selection menu. For more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection. (Section 2-2.) Degrees Celsius (°C) can be set in a range from 18°C—32°C. Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) can be set in a range from 63°F—91°F.

Air Conditioner Display on the Monitor

1— Cab Temperature OUT4001,0000742 -19-13AUG14-1/1

2-1-9

061517

PN=64

Operation—Operator's Station

Operating the AM/FM Radio Press the radio power and volume switch (1) to turn on the radio. Rotate the radio power and volume switch to desired volume setting. Treble and base settings are available through the monitor menu. For more information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)

TX1087264A —UN—24JAN11

Press the radio tuning switch (2) to toggle between AM or FM frequency. Rotate radio tuning switch to tune radio to desired AM or FM station. To find the clearest reception stations for the area, use the seek function that is available through the monitor menu. For more information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.) Press buttons 1—8 on the keypad (3) to move between preset memory radio stations. Radio display (4) on monitor shows the station and frequency setting that corresponds with each keypad button. NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be done using the monitor menu. Stations can be automatically selected for the area using the auto preset option in the monitor menu. For more information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)

Radio Controls on Switch Panel

1— Radio Power and Volume Switch 2— Radio Tuning Switch

TX1087265A —UN—24JAN11

To preset memory radio stations or to change previously set stations using the keypad, tune radio to desired station setting. Press and hold one of the keypad buttons (1—8) for more than 1 second. Setting is stored to that corresponding button. Repeat procedure for seven other desired stations. 3— Keypad 4— Radio Display

Radio Display on Monitor OUT4001,0000743 -19-17MAR16-1/1

2-1-10

061517

PN=65

Operation—Operator's Station

Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location MOUNTING LOCATION: The designated fire extinguisher mounting location (1) is inside the cab on the left rear side. USE: NOTE: All fire extinguishers do not operate the same. Read operating instructions on canister.

TX1086294 —UN—03JAN11

The portable fire extinguisher is used to aid in the extinguishing of small fires. Refer to individual manufacturer’s instructions and proper fire fighting procedures before the need to use the fire extinguisher arises. See Prevent Fires. (Section 1-2.) MAINTENANCE: IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage. Check gauge (if equipped) on fire extinguisher. If fire extinguisher is not fully charged, recharge or replace fire extinguisher according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect and maintain the fire extinguisher following the manufacturer’s recommendations and all local, regional, and national regulations.

Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location 1— Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location ER79617,0000D80 -19-14MAR16-1/1

Alternative Exit Tool IMPORTANT: For alternative exit of machine, use the alternative exit tool (1) to break window. Always keep tool inside cab. Alternative exit tool (1) is located on the left roll-over protective structure (ROPS) post.

TX1085781A —UN—13DEC10

1— Alternative Exit Tool

Alternative Exit Tool ER79617,0000D4F -19-29JUN16-1/1

2-1-11

061517

PN=66

Operation—Operator's Station

Cab Dome Light Switch The cab dome light is located on the right side of cab roof. There are three operating positions: TX1086802A —UN—11JAN11

• ON (1): The cab light turns ON and stays ON until switch is moved to the OFF position.

NOTE: The cab light will NOT turn ON if the key switch is in OFF position.

• Cab door—middle position (2): The cab light turns

ON when the door is opened. When the cab door is closed or cab door is left in the open position, the cab light turns OFF automatically after 30 seconds. NOTE: The cab light will turn ON if the key switch is in OFF position.

Cab Dome Light Switch 1— ON 2— Cab Door—Middle Position

3— OFF

• OFF (3): The cab light turns OFF and stays OFF until switch is moved to the cab door—middle position or ON position.

OUT4001,0000745 -19-13AUG14-1/1

Opening Upper Front (Alternative Exit) Window

TX1087290A —UN—25JAN11

NOTE: The wiper cannot operate with the upper front window open. The washer can operate with the upper front window open. 1. Park machine on a solid, level surface. 2. Lower equipment to the ground. 3. Stop engine and pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position. 4. Lift the lock pin (1) up, slide inward, then down into notch. 5. Pull the lock release bar (2) toward operator.

Upper Front Window 1— Lock Pin

6. While holding the lower handle on the window, pull window up and guide all the way back on track until window clicks into position. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window closing unexpectedly. Always lock the pin in the cab frame boss hole.

2— Lock Release Bar

comes down forcefully. Close window only when sitting in operator’s seat. 8. To close upper front window, unlock pin and pull lock release bar down. Hold lower handle on the window and guide window down the track slowly until window clicks into position. Install lock pin.

7. Slide the lock pin into the cab frame boss hole and rotate downward into the lock position. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury when closing the upper front window. Upper front window OUT4001,0000779 -19-13JAN15-1/1

2-1-12

061517

PN=67

Operation—Operator's Station

Removing and Storing the Lower Front Window

T136266 —UN—18DEC00

NOTE: In cold weather, some operators may choose to work with the upper front window open and the lower front window in place. Working with upper front window open and lower front window in place provides excellent visibility and tends to hold the heat being circulated around the operator’s feet. Upper front window must be opened and locked in position before lower front window can be removed. 1. While pulling in on window, raise window to remove.

Removing and Storing the Lower Front Window

2. Store window in rear storage area of cab behind operator’s seat. Install window in lower protectors (1) first. TX1087294A —UN—25JAN11

3. Slide window into the upper left protector (2). 4. Push right fastener (3) up and slide window under fastener. 5. Release fastener to secure window in storage position. 1— Lower Protector (2 used) 2— Upper Left Protector

3— Right Fastener

Storage Area for Lower Front Window OUT4001,000077A -19-16SEP14-1/1

Opening Cab Door Window To open cab window, pinch latch (1) and slide rear pane forward. T214915 —UN—17NOV05

1— Latch

Cab Window Latch VD76477,00001C4 -19-13AUG14-1/1

2-1-13

061517

PN=68

Operation—Operator's Station

Opening and Closing the Polycarbonate-Type Roof Exit Cover

TX1087303A —UN—25JAN11

IMPORTANT: Replace the polycarbonate-type roof with a new one every 5 years, even if undamaged. In case polycarbonate-type roof was remarkably damaged or has received severe shock loads, replace polycarbonate-type roof even if polycarbonate-type roof has not been in use for 5 years. When cleaning the polycarbonate-type roof, use a neutral detergent. If acidic or alkaline detergent is used, the polycarbonate-type roof may become discolored or crack. Keep organic solvent away from polycarbonate-type roof. Failure to do so may cause the polycarbonate-type roof to become discolored or crack.

Roof Exit Cover 1— Lock Lever (2 used)

2— Handle

Closing the Roof Exit Cover:

Opening the Roof Exit Cover:

Hold handle and pull roof exit cover down until levers lock in position.

1. Move lock levers (1) toward center of roof exit. 2. Push on handle (2) to open roof exit cover.

OUT4001,000077B -19-11JUN15-1/1

2-1-14

061517

PN=69

Operation—Operator's Station

Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension Seat

TX1000836A —UN—29NOV05

CAUTION: Prevent possibly injury. Do not adjust seat settings while operating the machine. While sitting on seat, push down on seat angle lever (1) to adjust seat to desired angle. Release lever. Pull up on seat fore-and-aft handle (2) to unlock seat. Slide seat to desired distance from pilot control levers. Release handle. Turn weight adjustment knob (3) to adjust seat to weight of operator.

Mechanical Suspension Seat

Squeeze lumbar ball (4) to add air for firmness to lower backrest area. Press button on bottom of lumbar ball to release air and decrease firmness.

T140133 —UN—02MAY01

Pull up on backrest lever (5) to release backrest lock. Move backrest to desired position. Release lever. Pull headrest (6) upward or push downward to desired height. Move headrest to desired angle. Pull up on armrest (7) to move armrest out of the way when exiting the cab. Turn armrest dial (8) to adjust angle of armrest. Pull seat and console handle (9) up toward operator. Slide entire seat and consoles to desired distance from travel pedals and levers. Release handle.

Adjusting the Seat 1— Seat Angle Lever 2— Seat Fore-and-Aft Handle 3— Weight Adjustment Knob 4— Lumbar Ball 5— Backrest Lever

6— Headrest 7— Armrest 8— Armrest Dial 9— Seat and Console Handle

CN93077,000025B -19-11JAN17-1/1

2-1-15

061517

PN=70

Operation—Operator's Station

Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat—If Equipped

TX1087310A —UN—25JAN11

CAUTION: Prevent possibly injury. Do not adjust seat settings while operating the machine. While sitting on seat, push down on seat angle lever (1) to adjust seat to desired angle. Release lever. Pull up on seat fore-and-aft handle (2) to unlock seat. Slide seat to desired distance from pilot control levers. Release handle. Pull out firmness button (3) to decrease seat firmness. With key switch in the ON position, press in and hold firmness button to increase seat firmness.

Air Suspension Seat

Pull up on backrest lever (4) to release backrest lock. Move backrest to desired position. Release lever. T140133 —UN—02MAY01

Squeeze lumbar ball (5) to add air for firmness to lower backrest area. Press button on bottom of lumbar ball to release air and decrease firmness. Pull headrest (6) upward or push downward to desired height. Move headrest to desired angle. Pull up on armrest (7) to move it out of the way when exiting the cab. Adjusting the Armrest

Turn armrest dial (8) to adjust angle of armrest. Pull seat and console handle (9) up toward operator. Slide entire seat and consoles to desired distance from travel pedals and levers. Release handle.

1— Seat Angle Lever 2— Seat Fore-and-Aft Handle 3— Firmness Button 4— Backrest Lever 5— Lumbar Ball

6— Headrest 7— Armrest 8— Armrest Dial 9— Seat and Console Handle

CN93077,000025C -19-11JAN17-1/1

Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height

TX1087326A —UN—25JAN11

CAUTION: Avoid possible crushing injury from console unexpectedly dropping. Before loosening the cap screws, support the console. 1. Ensure engine is off and pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position. 2. Remove right console holding cap screws (1). 3. Loosen cap screw (2) and adjust the pilot control lever console height relative to the cab floor. 4. Install holding cap screws in holes for desired console height and tighten.

Right Side of Seat Shown 1— Holding Cap Screw (2 used)

5. Tighten cap screw to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................50 N·m 37 lb·ft

2— Cap Screw

6. Repeat procedure for left console. OUT4001,000077E -19-22MAR16-1/1

2-1-16

061517

PN=71

Operation—Monitor Operation Monitor 3

ECO

2 1

9 10

50.0h

10:00

A/I A/S F

14 E

20 TX1208609

CH1

24.0˚C

FM VOL

81.3

TX1208609 —UN—05JAN16

21 ST MHz

Monitor

12— Not Used 13— Seat Belt Indicator 14— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge 15— Fuel Gauge 16— Fuel Mark 17— Sub Meter 18— Coolant Temperature Gauge 19— Coolant Temperature Mark 20— Air Conditioner Display 21— Radio Display 22— Alarm Indicators

ECO

50.0h

10:00 AM F

CH1

24.0˚C

FM VOL

81.3 STMHz

TX1160709 —UN—15MAY14

1— Auto-Idle Indicator 2— Auto Shutdown Indicator 3— Work Mode Indicator 4— Travel Speed Indicator 5— Exhaust Filter Indicator 6— Auxiliary Indicator 7— Power Mode Indicator 8— Auxiliary Indicator 9— Auxiliary Indicator 10— Not Used 11— Hour Meter and Clock

Alarm Indicators CN93077,0000241 -19-05JAN16-1/1

2-2-1

061517

PN=72

Operation—Monitor Operation

Monitor Functions 1. Auto-Idle Indicator: Displays if auto-idle mode is turned ON from the switch panel. For more information, see Switch Panel Functions. (Section 2-1.) 2. Auto Shutdown Indicator: Displays if auto shutdown was selected by operator from the menu screen. For more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Shutdown in this section. 3. Work Mode Indicator: Displays icon for the current attachment being used (bucket mode, breaker, pulverizer, crusher, vibrating hammer, grapple, clamshell, or others). For more information, see Main Menu—Work Mode in this section. 4. Travel Speed Indicator: Displays travel speed selected from the switch panel (rabbit—fast speed travel or turtle—slow speed travel). 5. Exhaust Filter Indicator: Displays condition of the exhaust filter. Two different indicators could appear here:

• Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator appears when

exhaust temperature is high during an auto or parked cleaning. • Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator appears when exhaust filter auto cleaning has been disabled by the operator. For more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning in this section. 6. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data indicator. 7. Power Mode Indicator: Displays a power mode selected from the switch panel (ECO, PWR, or H/P). For more information, see Switch Panel Functions. (Section 2-1.) 8. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data indicator. 9. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data indicator. 10. Not Used. 11. Hour Meter and Clock: Displays total machine operation hours counted since the machine started working in the unit of hours (h). One digit after the decimal point indicates tenths of an hour (6 minutes). Clock indicates present time.

TX1086447 —UN—05JAN11

Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator

TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11

Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator

When DEF level is severely low, engine power derates and last segment of DEF gauge illuminates yellow and blinks. When DEF level is empty, engine power and speed derates. All segments of DEF gauge are off, outer ring illuminates red, and warning indicators appear. Engine can start, but machine cannot be operated until DEF tank is filled. Fill DEF tank before last segment turns yellow. 15. Fuel Gauge: Displays remaining fuel amount as indicated by the needle. Fuel machine before needle reaches E. 16. Fuel Mark: If fuel sensor is malfunctioning, color of the fuel mark changes and the needle disappears. If the harness between the fuel sensor and the monitor unit is broken, the needle disappears but the fuel mark color does not change. 17. Sub Meter: Displays fuel consumption or breaker hours depending on what is set in the monitor. For more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter Selection in this section. 18. Coolant Temperature Gauge: IMPORTANT: Possible engine damage may occur. If needle points to RED zone, idle engine to bring back to BLUE zone before stopping engine. If needle continues to rise, stop engine. Displays engine coolant temperature. Needle should be around the center of the scale during operation. 19. Coolant Temperature Mark: If coolant temperature sensor is malfunctioning, color of the coolant temperature mark changes and the needle disappears. If the harness between the coolant temperature sensor and the monitor unit is broken, the needle disappears but the coolant temperature mark color does not change. 20. Air Conditioner Display: Shows blower fan speed, selected air vent, and temperature setting. 21. Radio Display: Shows current radio station, frequency, and volume setting.

12. Not Used. 13. Seat Belt Indicator: Displays when key switch in ON, and disappears 5 seconds after the engine starts. 14. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge: Displays approximate level of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) remaining in the DEF tank. If Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low, last segment of DEF gauge and outer ring illuminates yellow.

22. Alarm Indicators: Displays if an abnormality occurs. If six or more alarms are generated, the indicators can be scrolled through using the monitor dial on the switch panel. For more information, see Main Menu—Alarm List in this section. CN93077,0000242 -19-15JAN16-1/1

2-2-2

061517

PN=73

Operation—Monitor Operation RG22487 —UN—21AUG13

Aftertreatment Indicators Overview

RG22488 —UN—21AUG13

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) indicator illuminates when the DEF is low. Fill DEF tank. When the DEF indicator is combined with the warning indicator or engine stop indicator engine performance is reduced by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) because the DEF is below a measurable level. Fill DEF tank. When engine emissions temperature indicator illuminates exhaust gas temperature is high, elevated idle is active, or exhaust filter cleaning is in process. The machine can be operated as normal unless the operator determines the machine is not in a safe location for high exhaust temperatures and disables auto cleaning. When engine emissions temperature indicator is combined with the warning indicator or engine stop indicator engine performance is reduced by the ECU because the exhaust gas temperature is higher than expected. Follow Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) procedure or see your authorized servicing dealer. When the exhaust filter indicator illuminates the exhaust filter cleaning is in process, aftertreatment system has a fault, or the exhaust filter is in need of cleaning and the operator has disabled auto exhaust filter cleaning. If conditions are safe, the operator should enable the auto exhaust filter clean setting or perform manual service regeneration or follow DTC procedure.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicator

RG22489 —UN—21AUG13

Engine Emissions Temperature Indicator RG22490 —UN—21AUG13

Exhaust Filter Indicator RG22491 —UN—21AUG13

Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator RG22492 —UN—21AUG13

Engine Emissions System Malfunction Indicator

Warning Indicator

RG22493 —UN—21AUG13

When the exhaust filter indicator is combined with the warning indicator engine performance is reduced by the ECU because there is an aftertreatment system fault or the soot level of the exhaust filter is moderately high. If conditions are safe, the operator should enable the auto exhaust filter clean function. If conditions are not safe, the operator should move the machine to a safe location and engage the auto exhaust filter cleaning mode. Perform manual service regeneration or follow DTC procedure. When the exhaust filter indicator is combined with the engine stop indicator engine performance is further reduced by the ECU because there is an aftertreatment system fault or the soot level of the exhaust filter is extremely high. If this combination is present, see your authorized servicing dealer. The auto cleaning disabled indicator illuminates when the operator has engaged the request to disable the auto exhaust filter cleaning function. This icon remains illuminated until the operator re-engages automatic exhaust filter cleaning from the diagnostic gauge. Disabling auto mode is not recommended for any situation unless it is safety-related or if the fuel tank lacks the required fuel to complete the cleaning process.

Engine Stop Indicator

The engine emissions system malfunction indicator illuminates when engine emissions are outside of normal operating range or engine emissions system fault. Follow DTC procedure or see your authorized servicing dealer When the engine emissions system malfunction indicator is combined with the warning indicator engine performance is reduced by the ECU because the engine emissions are outside of normal operating range or engine emissions system fault. Follow DTC procedure or see your authorized servicing dealer

DX,AFTRTREAT,INDCATRS -19-02OCT15-1/1

2-2-3

061517

PN=74

Operation—Monitor Operation

Monitor Start-Up NOTE: Engine can be started after the default screen (2) has displayed.

2— Default Screen

System Starting Screen

TX1160713A —UN—15MAY14

1— System Starting Screen

TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10

When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the system starting screen (1) displays for approximately 2 seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed.

Default Screen CN93077,0000239 -19-19JAN16-1/1

2-2-4

061517

PN=75

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu

TX1160715A —UN—15MAY14

When the default screen (5) is displayed, press the monitor dial (2) on the switch panel to display the Main Menu screen (1). The Main Menu screen displays submenus, which can be selected to view diagnostic information or change various operating characteristics of the machine or the monitor. NOTE: Translations shown on screen may be abbreviated. The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: Default Screen

NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List—provides detailed information of generated alarms.

TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

• Air Conditioner—provides air conditioner functions. • Radio—provides radio functions. • Work Mode—provides front attachment functions. • Setting Menu—allows operator to change various monitor and machine functions.

• Information Menu—allows operator to view operating

hours, maintenance items, troubleshooting (diagnostic trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and exhaust filter accumulation.

Main Menu Screen

NOTE: The Alarm List will always be displayed first on the Main Menu if there is an actual alarm. Air Conditioner, Radio, and Work Mode submenus can be ordered in the sequence that is preferred according to how often they are used. For changing the order sequence of these submenus, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu Sequence Change in this section. Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired submenu. Press dial button to display chosen submenu. Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.

1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial 3— Back Button

TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

Press home button (4) to return to default screen. 4— Home Button 5— Default Screen

Switch Panel CN93077,000023A -19-26MAY16-1/1

2-2-5

061517

PN=76

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Alarm List

TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

The Alarm List menu will always appear as the first submenu under Main Menu, but ONLY if there is an actual alarm generated. If there is more than one alarm, a list will be displayed. If there are no alarms, Alarm List will not appear as a submenu. The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Main Menu Screen

At Main Menu screen (1) with Alarm List highlighted, press monitor dial (2) to view generated alarms. If there is more than one alarm, rotate monitor dial to highlight a particular alarm. Press monitor dial to view detailed information about that alarm and how to rectify the problem. TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

When an alarm indicator appears on the monitor display, an alarm light (5) is also illuminated on the bottom of the monitor to alert the operator. Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. Press home button (4) to return to default screen. 4— Home Button 5— Alarm Light

Switch Panel

TX1160717A —UN—15MAY14

1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial 3— Back Button

Alarm Light Continued on next page

2-2-6

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-1/27

061517

PN=77

Operation—Monitor Operation

TX1086346 —UN—06JAN11

Possible alarm indicators that could appear are: • Exhaust Filter Alarms—The same exhaust filter alarm symbol appears, but the condition of the alarm is different. If the alarm symbol is:

• Illuminated and yellow—Exhaust filter is restricted and

Exhaust Filter Alarm

at HIGH soot level. Enable auto cleaning, disable auto-idle, and operate machine normally or move machine to safe area and perform a parked cleaning. • Blinking and yellow—Exhaust filter is restricted and at VERY HIGH soot level. The warning alarm will also illuminate yellow. Immediately move machine to safe area and perform a parked cleaning. • Blinking and red—Exhaust filter is very restricted and at SERVICE soot level. The warning alarm will

also illuminate red. Immediately park machine, stop the engine, and a service cleaning will need to be performed. For service cleaning, contact an authorized John Deere dealer. For more information on exhaust filter, see Exhaust Filter. (Section 2-3.) CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-2/27

• Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Alarm—Auto cleaning is disabled and exhaust filter needs to be cleaned. Move machine to safe area and perform a parked cleaning.

TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11

Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-3/27

• Exhaust Filter Error Alarm—There is a system or hardware error causing the exhaust filter cleaning to abort. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

TX1086356 —UN—06JAN11

Exhaust Filter Error Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-4/27

TX1086353 —UN—06JAN11

• Engine Oil Pressure Alarm—Engine oil pressure has decreased. Immediately stop engine. Check engine oil system and oil level.

Engine Oil Pressure Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-5/27

• Engine Start Disabled Alarm—Engine will not start due to pilot shutoff lever being lowered.

TX1086354 —UN—06JAN11

Engine Start Disabled Alarm Continued on next page

2-2-7

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-6/27

061517

PN=78

Operation—Monitor Operation

• Engine Overheat Alarm—Engine coolant temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation. Run the engine at slow idle speed or lower the coolant temperature.

TX1086350 —UN—06JAN11

Engine Overheat Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-7/27

• Warning Alarm—An abnormal condition has been detected. Alarm will either be red or yellow depending on severity of problem. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11

Warning Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-8/27

TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11

• Programming Alarm—If this Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) programming alarm appears on the monitor, different conditions may exist depending on the color. If this alarm is:

• YELLOW—Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)

Programming Alarm

software update is ready to install. • RED—SAR programming is in process. Do not turn OFF machine power until programming is complete.

• GREEN—SAR programming is complete. Cycle machine power to complete the process.

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-9/27

TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11

• Program Failure Alarm—This alarm will appear along with a red warning alarm. A problem occurred during the Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) programming process. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Program Failure Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-10/27

• Unable to Program Alarm—This alarm will appear along with a yellow warning alarm. A condition exists that will not allow the transfer of new Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) software to happen. Retry programming or contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11

Unable to Program Alarm Continued on next page

2-2-8

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-11/27

061517

PN=79

Operation—Monitor Operation

TX1086349 —UN—06JAN11

• Coolant Level Alarm—Check coolant level and refill coolant.

Coolant Level Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-12/27

TX1156523 —UN—11APR14

• Cooling System Alarm—High temperatures indicate a cooling system malfunction. Check cooling system.

Cooling System Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-13/27

• Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm—Air filter elements are clogged. Clean or replace air filter elements.

TX1086365 —UN—06JAN11

Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-14/27

TX1156524 —UN—11APR14

• Engine Derate Alarm—A condition exists which is causing engine to be derated. Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).

Engine Derate Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-15/27

TX1086355 —UN—06JAN11

• Boost Temperature Alarm—Engine intake air temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation. Check intercooler for clogging and intake air piping for disconnection.

BOOST

Boost Temperature Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-16/27

TX1086351 —UN—06JAN11

• Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm—Hydraulic oil temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation, check hydraulic oil level, and check for leaks.

Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm Continued on next page

2-2-9

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-17/27

061517

PN=80

Operation—Monitor Operation

TX1086364 —UN—06JAN11

• Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm—Hydraulic oil filter is clogged. Replace filter.

Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-18/27

TX1086357 —UN—06JAN11

• Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm—Hydraulic oil cooling system is abnormal. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-19/27

TX1086358 —UN—06JAN11

• Alternator Alarm—Electrical system is abnormal. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Alternator Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-20/27

TX1086362 —UN—06JAN11

• Fuel Level Alarm—Fuel level is low. Refill fuel tank as soon as possible.

Fuel Level Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-21/27

TX1086366 —UN—06JAN11

• Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm—Fuel filter is clogged. Replace fuel filter elements.

Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-22/27

TX1156519 —UN—14APR14

• Water-in-Fuel Alarm—Water separator is full. Drain water from separator.

Water-in-Fuel Alarm Continued on next page

2-2-10

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-23/27

061517

PN=81

Operation—Monitor Operation

• System Failure Alarm—Satellite communication system is abnormal. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

TX1086367 —UN—06JAN11

System Failure Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-24/27

TX1086368 —UN—06JAN11

• Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm—Pilot shutoff lever system is abnormal. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-25/27

TX1185012 —UN—10FEB15

• Electric Lever Alarm—Electric lever system is abnormal. Contact an authorized dealer.

Electric Lever Alarm Continued on next page

2-2-11

CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-26/27

061517

PN=82

Operation—Monitor Operation

• Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Alarm—Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank is empty or DEF quality is poor. Engine power is derated. Refill DEF tank as soon as possible.

Monitor Display Messages

TX1156518 —UN—20MAR14

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Alarm

The monitor automatically displays a message for specific machine situations and certain diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Depending on machine situation or if a DTC is

initially active, a message displays on the monitor until the situation changes or the DTC is resolved.

Display Message

Message Trigger

Exhaust Filter Cleaning Failed Aborted by Operator Cleaning Incomplete

The cleaning process was discontinued due to one of the following conditions: • Pilot shutoff lever is moved. • Engine speed dial is moved. • Parked cleaning is aborted due to a system fault. • Engine runs out of fuel. • Engine is shut off by operator (not recommended).

Exhaust Filter Cleaning Complete Exhaust filter cleaning complete and machine is ready to return to operation. REFILL DEF DEF Tank Level Low

DEF tank level is low.

REFILL DEF DEF Tank Empty Engine Power Limited

DEF tank level is empty.

REFILL DEF DEF tank level is empty. DEF Tank Empty Engine Power and Speed Limited Initiated by active code. DEF System Fault Engine Power and Speed Limited Check Active Codes Poor DEF quality detected. DEF Quality Poor Engine Power and Speed Limited Check Active Codes Initiated by active code. DEF System Fault Engine Power and Speed Limited Check Active Codes CN93077,000023B -19-26MAY16-27/27

2-2-12

061517

PN=83

Operation—Monitor Operation

TX1183787A —UN—29JAN15

TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

Main Menu—Air Conditioner

Main Menu Screen

Switch Panel

The Air Conditioner menu allows operator to turn the air conditioner ON or OFF and set the circulation air mode to recirculating cab air or fresh air. TX1086310A —UN—28DEC10

The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Recirculating Air Icon

TX1086311A —UN—28DEC10

At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Air Conditioner. Press monitor dial to display Air Conditioner menu. Air Conditioner menu items include:

□ (Cab recirculating air mode symbol is displayed.) Rotate monitor dial to highlight the cab recirculating air mode symbol. Press monitor dial to turn ON the cab recirculating air mode. The color of the preceding square will turn green and a recirculating air icon (5) will appear in the air conditioner display in the lower left corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial again to turn OFF the recirculating air mode and switch to fresh air mode. The color of the preceding square will be gray and a fresh air icon (6) will appear in the air conditioner display in the lower left corner of the monitor.

Fresh Air Icon 1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial 3— Back Button

Continued on next page

2-2-13

4— Home Button 5— Recirculating Air Icon 6— Fresh Air Icon OUT4001,000071E -19-19JAN16-1/2

061517

PN=84

Operation—Monitor Operation

□ A/C

Rotate monitor dial to highlight A/C. Press monitor dial to turn ON the air conditioner. The color of the preceding square will turn green and an air conditioner icon (7) will appear in the air conditioner display in the lower left corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial again to turn OFF the air conditioner. The color of the preceding square will be gray and air conditioner icon will disappear. If an exclamation mark appears on the monitor, communication between the air conditioner and the monitor is abnormal. See an authorized John Deere dealer.

TX1086312A —UN—28DEC10

NOTE: Blower speed switch on switch panel needs to be ON in order to operate the ON/OFF function of the air conditioner in the monitor menu.

Air Conditioner Icon 7— Air Conditioner Icon

Press home button (4) to return to default screen.

Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.

OUT4001,000071E -19-19JAN16-2/2

2-2-14

061517

PN=85

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Radio The Radio menu allows operator to set preferred radio stations and adjust the tone settings. TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Main Menu Screen

At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Radio. Press monitor dial to display Radio menu. Radio menu items include:

TX1086274A —UN—27DEC10

• CH1 AM _ _ _ _ kHz • CH2 AM _ _ _ _ kHz • CH3 AM _ _ _ _ kHz • CH4 AM _ _ _ _ kHz • CH5 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz • CH6 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz • CH7 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz • CH8 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be done using the keypad (6) on switch panel. See Operating the AM/FM Radio. (Section 2-1.) Press radio tuning switch (5) to toggle between AM or FM frequency. Tune radio to desired AM or FM station by rotating the radio tuning switch. When desired station is found, rotate monitor dial to highlight CH1. Press and hold monitor dial for more than 1 second. Current station is set. Repeat procedure for seven additional AM or FM stations using CH2 through CH8. Once the stations are stored, operator can select these programmed stations by using keys 1—8 on the switch panel keypad (6). • << Rotate monitor dial to highlight <<. Press monitor dial to seek next lower frequency station. Continue to press monitor dial to seek next lower frequency station until desired station is found. • >> Rotate monitor dial to highlight >>. Press monitor dial to seek next higher frequency station. Continue to press monitor dial to seek next higher frequency station until desired station is found. • TONE Rotate monitor dial to highlight TONE. Press monitor dial to adjust tone. Backlighting will turn orange. Rotate monitor dial clockwise to boost treble. Rotate monitor dial counterclockwise to boost base. Press monitor dial again to store changes.

Switch Panel 1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial 3— Back Button

4— Home Button 5— Radio Tuning Switch 6— Keypad

• AUTO PRESET

Rotate monitor dial to highlight AUTO PRESET. Press monitor dial to start auto preset process. The AUTO PRESET scans reception frequency and allocates stations to CH1 to CH8. AM frequency stations will be preset to CH1 to CH4 and FM frequency stations will be preset to CH5 to CH8. Operating the radio during the scan stops the AUTO PRESET process.

If an exclamation mark appears in the radio display on the monitor, communication between the radio and the monitor is abnormal. See an authorized John Deere dealer. Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. Press home button (4) to return to default screen. OUT4001,000071F -19-19JAN16-1/1

2-2-15

061517

PN=86

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Work Mode The Work Mode menu allows operator to select front attachment. TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Main Menu Screen

At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Work Mode. Press monitor dial to display Work Mode menu. Work Mode menu items include:

TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

NOTE: This list of front attachments are examples only. Personalized list of front attachments can be entered in monitor through the Attachment Name Input screen. See Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment Name Input in this section.

• Bucket (bucket icon will also be shown) • Thumb 1 (thumb icon will also be shown) • Breaker 1 (breaker icon will also be shown) Type-A

• Breaker 2 (breaker icon will also be shown) Type-B

• Pulverizer 1 (pulverizer icon will also be shown) • Crusher 1 (crusher icon will also be shown) • Grapple 1 (grapple icon will also be shown) Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired front attachment. Press monitor dial to select the desired attachment for operation. If Bucket work mode was selected, screen will revert back to the default screen and a bucket icon displays on monitor in the upper left corner. If any other work mode is selected, the following information is displayed:

• Maximum Pump Flow Rate..........XXX.XX gpm • Maximum Engine Speed.................XXXX min-¹ • Selector Valve................................O/T or C/V • 2 Pumps Combined Flow.........OFF/ON • Breaker Relief Pressure.........OFF/ON •

Switch Panel 1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial

3— Back Button 4— Home Button

If adjustments need to be made to this information, see an authorized John Deere dealer. If information is correct and ready for operation, rotate monitor dial to highlight the checkmark ( ) and press monitor dial. Screen will revert back to the default screen and selected attachment icon displays on monitor in the upper left corner. Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. Press home button (4) to return to default screen. OUT4001,0000720 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-16

061517

PN=87

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu The Setting Menu allows operator to change various monitor and machine functions. TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Main Menu Screen

At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Setting Menu. Press monitor dial to display Setting Menu. Setting Menu items include:

TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

• Date and Time • Attachment Name Input • Auto-Shutdown • Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning • Sub Meter Selection • Rear View Camera Monitor • Display Item Selection • Brightness Adjustment • Language • Unit Selection • Emergency Override1 • Main Menu Sequence Change Rotate monitor dial to highlight a Setting submenu. Press monitor dial to display chosen Setting submenu. Switch Panel

Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. Press home button (4) to return to default screen.

1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial

3— Back Button 4— Home Button

If equipped. JR58078,000005E -19-12APR17-1/1

2-2-17

061517

PN=88

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time The Date and Time menu provides the capability to change the date and time settings. Year/month/day format and 24h/12h display mode can also be changed. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Date and Time. Press monitor dial to display Date and Time menu. Date and Time menu items include:

• Time Setting

(present time is displayed here) - Hour - Minute Rotate monitor dial to highlight Time Setting. Press monitor dial to display Time Setting screen. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Hour and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the hour setting. Rotate clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to decrement number. Press monitor dial when desired hour setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Minute and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the minute setting. Rotate clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to decrement number. Press monitor dial when desired minute setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight checkmark ( ). Press monitor dial to store the Time Settings. • Date Setting - Year - Month - Day -

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Date Setting. Press monitor dial to display Date Setting screen. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Year and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the year setting. Rotate clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to decrement number. Press monitor dial when desired year setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Month and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the month setting. Rotate clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to decrement number. Press monitor dial when desired month setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Day and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the day setting. Rotate clockwise to increment number and counterclockwise to decrement number. Press monitor dial when desired day setting is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight checkmark ( ). Press monitor dial to store the Date Settings. • Display Form - Time - Date Rotate monitor dial to highlight Display Form. Press monitor dial to display Display Form screen. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Time and press monitor dial. Press monitor dial to switch between 12h or 24h settings. When desired time setting is reached, rotate monitor dial to highlight Date and press monitor dial. Press monitor dial to switch between YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY settings. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. OUT4001,0000724 -19-04APR16-1/1

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment Name Input The Attachment Name Input menu provides the capability to personalize front attachment with a specific name. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Attachment Name Input. Press monitor dial to display Attachment Name Input menu. Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired attachment name. Press monitor dial to display name change screen. To add specific information to the attachment name, rotate monitor dial either way to highlight a character, then press the monitor dial. After

inputting new name, rotate monitor dial to highlight SET on bottom right corner of monitor. Press monitor dial to finalize the setting. To delete the last entered character, rotate monitor dial to highlight BS on bottom left corner of monitor and then press monitor dial. To delete all entered characters, rotate monitor dial to highlight ALL CLEAR and then press monitor dial. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. OUT4001,0000726 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-18

061517

PN=89

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto-Shutdown The Auto-Shutdown menu provides the capability to turn on this feature and set a desired time for machine shutdown to take place. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Auto-Shutdown. Press monitor dial to display Auto-Shutdown menu. Auto-Shutdown menu items include:

NOTE: Setting Time minute increment needs to be set before enabling auto-shutdown. Setting Time Rotate monitor dial to highlight Setting Time and press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to adjust the auto-shutdown acting time. Auto-shutdown can be set to activate after 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30 minute increments. Press monitor dial to store desired time setting.

NOTE: When auto-shutdown is ON, the color of the preceding square is green and A/S will appear on the default screen. When auto-shutdown is OFF, the color of the preceding square is gray.

NOTE: Thirty seconds before the engine stops, the monitor will display Engine Shutdown Soon message.

□ ON (Enable)

Press home button to return to default screen.

Rotate monitor dial to highlight ON (enable). Press monitor dial to turn the auto-shutdown function ON. Press monitor dial again to turn the auto-shutdown function OFF.

Press back button to return to previous screen.

OUT4001,0000727 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-19

061517

PN=90

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning

50.0h

ECO

10:00 AM

1 F

CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust filter auto cleaning can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with hot gases and components.

TX1160726 —UN—15MAY14

CH1

24.0˚C

FM VOL

81.3 STMHz

Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator 50.0h

ECO NOTE: Disabling auto exhaust filter cleaning is not preferred. Whenever possible, auto cleaning should be enabled to keep soot buildup to a minimum and to increase overall machine uptime.

10:00 AM

2 F

TX1160738 —UN—15MAY14

During exhaust filter auto cleaning, the engine may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust filter components may reach temperatures hot enough to burn people and ignite or melt common materials.

If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe for elevated exhaust temperatures, auto cleaning of the exhaust filter can be disabled. The Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning menu allows the operator to enable or disable the auto cleaning function for the exhaust filter. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning. Press monitor dial to display Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning menu: NOTE: When auto cleaning is disabled, the color of the preceding square is green and exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator (1) will appear on the default screen.

CH1

24.0˚C

FM VOL

81.3 STMHz

Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator 1— Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator

2— Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator

□ ON (Enable)

When auto cleaning is enabled, the color of the preceding square is gray and an exhaust filter cleaning indicator (2) will appear on the default screen when an auto or parked cleaning procedure is taking place.

Rotate monitor dial to ON (enable) and press to turn on auto cleaning. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen.

□ OFF (Disable) Rotate monitor dial to OFF (disable) and press to turn off auto cleaning. CN93077,000023C -19-15JAN16-1/1

2-2-20

061517

PN=91

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter Selection TX1160739A —UN—15MAY14

NOTE: Only one sub meter can be selected at a time. When one of the selections is ON, the color of the preceding square is green. The Sub Meter Selection menu provides the capability to add a meter on the fuel gauge for fuel consumption or breaker hours. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Sub Meter Selection. Press monitor dial to display Sub Meter Selection menu.

Fuel Consumption Indicator

Sub Meter Selection menu items include: Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF. Press monitor dial to turn OFF any meters. □ Fuel Consumption Indicator Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption Indicator. Press monitor dial to turn ON the fuel consumption indicator (1). Fuel consumption will be displayed on the fuel gauge on the default screen. □ Breaker Hour Meter Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Hour Meter. Press monitor dial to turn ON the breaker hour meter (2). Breaker hours will be displayed on the fuel gauge on the default screen. Press back button to return to previous screen.

TX1160740A —UN—15MAY14

□ OFF (Disable)

Breaker Hour Meter 1— Fuel Consumption Indicator

2— Breaker Hour Meter

Press home button to return to default screen. CN93077,000023D -19-01SEP16-1/1

2-2-21

061517

PN=92

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear View Camera Monitor TX1160741A —UN—15MAY14

CAUTION: The rear camera image is designed to supplement other safety practices and is not intended to be the sole method of collision avoidance. Always be alert and aware of the surroundings when operating this machine to avoid possible injury or death to operator or others. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the camera lens surface. The camera lens surface is a resin product. Lightly wipe the surface with a wet, clean cloth. Never use an organic solvent.

Rear View Image

TX1086331A —UN—28DEC10

NOTE: When the Rear View Camera Monitor mode is enabled, the color of the preceding square is green and rear view image (1) is continuously displayed on the default screen. The Rear View Camera Monitor menu provides the capability to turn the camera ON or OFF so the view behind the machine is shown on the monitor. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Rear View Camera Monitor. Press monitor dial to display Rear View Camera Monitor menu.

Rear Camera

□ ON (Enable) Press monitor dial to turn ON (enable) the rear camera on the monitor. Press monitor dial again to disable rear camera. Never attempt to change the mounting position of the rear camera (2). If rear camera is not operating properly, see an authorized dealer.

1— Rear View Image

2— Rear Camera

Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. CN93077,000023E -19-08MAR16-1/1

2-2-22

061517

PN=93

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display Item Selection TX1160742A —UN—15MAY14

NOTE: Only one display item can be selected at a time. When one of the selections is ON, the color of the preceding square is green. The Display Item Selection menu provides the capability to change what appears on the default screen. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Display Item Selection. Press monitor dial to display Display Item Selection menu. Manufacturer Logo

Display Item Selection menu items include:

□ Logo

TX1160743A —UN—15MAY14

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Logo. Press monitor dial to have manufacturer logo (1) appear on default screen. □ Operational Information Rotate monitor dial to highlight Operational Information. Press monitor dial to have operational information (2) appear on default screen. □ OFF (Disable) Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF (disable). Press monitor dial to turn OFF any images. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. 1— Manufacturer Logo

Operational Information

2— Operational Information CN93077,000023F -19-31AUG15-1/1

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Brightness Adjustment

Rotate monitor dial clockwise for lighter image and counterclockwise for darker image.

The Brightness Adjustment menu allows operator to adjust the brightness of the monitor for better viewing.

Press back button to return to previous screen.

At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Brightness Adjustment. Press monitor dial to display Brightness Adjustment menu.

Press home button to return to default screen.

OUT4001,000072C -19-31AUG15-1/1

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language The Language menu allows operator to change the language text that appears on the monitor to a specific preference. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Language. Press monitor dial to display Language menu. A list of different languages appears.

Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired language and press monitor dial to store setting. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen.

NOTE: Only one language can be selected at a time. When one of the selections is ON, the color of the preceding square is green. OUT4001,000072D -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-23

061517

PN=94

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection The Unit Selection menu allows operator to change the unit system that appears on the monitor to either US or Metric and change temperature display reading on the monitor between degrees Celcius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F). At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Unit Selection. Press monitor dial to display Unit Selection menu. Unit Selection menu items include: TX1086278A —UN—27DEC10

• Unit

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Unit and press monitor dial. Press monitor dial to change setting between US or Metric. • °C/°F (Blower Must Be ON) NOTE: Before changing °C or °F, turn the blower fan ON by pressing the blower speed switch (1) on the switch panel. Rotate monitor dial to highlight °C/°F and press monitor dial. After displaying Wait message, temperature reading is changed from previous setting in lower left corner of the screen on the air conditioner display. Press monitor dial again to change temperature reading back to opposite setting.

Switch Panel 1— Blower Speed Switch 2— Monitor Dial

3— Back Button 4— Home Button

Press home button (4) to return to default screen.

Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. OUT4001,000072E -19-31AUG15-1/1

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Emergency Override

NOTE: Emergency override code number is last four digits of the product identification number (PIN).

IMPORTANT: Operating the engine without emissions-related derates could damage the aftertreatment system.

3. Display monitor prompts operator to enter emergency override code.

Emergency SCR Override enables a selective catalyst reduction (SCR) equipped application to operate without emissions-related derates for a specified period of time during qualified emergency situations. A qualified emergency situation is one in which the condition of an engine’s emission controls poses a significant direct or indirect risk to human life. For more information on emergency override, see Qualified Emergency Use—SCR Override Option. (Section 2-3.) Activate Emergency Override 1. Navigate through menu: MAIN MENU >> SETTING MENU >> EMERGENCY OVERRIDE.

4. Display monitor indicates emergency override activated and XXX hours remaining. 5. Press select button to continue and return to setting menu. Deactivate Emergency Override 1. Navigate through menu: MAIN MENU >> SETTING MENU >> EMERGENCY OVERRIDE. 2. Display monitor displays emergency override activated screen. Press select button to deactivate emergency override system or back button to exit.

2. Display monitor prompts operator to press select button to continue or back button to exit. JR58078,000005F -19-12APR17-1/1

2-2-24

061517

PN=95

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu Sequence Change The Main Menu Sequence Change menu provides the capability to change the sequence order of some of the submenus under the Main Menu according to how frequently they are used. At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Main Menu Sequence Change. Press monitor dial to display Main Menu Sequence Change menu.

• Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode Rotate monitor dial to highlight the submenu that is preferred to be shown first. Press monitor dial to change the submenu sequence. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen.

Main Menu Sequence Change menu items include: OUT4001,0000730 -19-31AUG15-1/1

Main Menu—Information Menu

TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

The Information Menu provides operating hour information, maintenance items, troubleshooting (diagnostic trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and restriction level in the exhaust filter. The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor include: NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm.

• Alarm List • Air Conditioner • Radio • Work Mode • Setting Menu • Information Menu

Main Menu Screen

At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Information Menu. Press monitor dial to display Information Menu. Information Menu items include:

TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

• Operation • Maintenance • Troubleshooting • Monitoring Press back button (3) to return to previous screen. Press home button (4) to return to default screen. 1— Main Menu Screen 2— Monitor Dial

3— Back Button 4— Home Button

Switch Panel OUT4001,0000722 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-25

061517

PN=96

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation The Operation menu provides fuel consumption and operating hours of the breaker, front attachment, tracks, and overall machine hours. At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Operation. Press monitor dial to display Operation menu. NOTE: Total fuel consumption and fuel consumption rate depend on the operating environment and the operation method of machine. Operation menu items include:

• Fuel Consumption

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption. Press monitor dial to display Fuel Consumption information: - Machine Operation Hours ............... XX h - Fuel Consumption ............................ XX L - Average Fuel Consumption Rate....XX.X L/h Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To reset fuel consumption data, rotate monitor dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen and press monitor dial. • Breaker Operation Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Operation. Press monitor dial to display Breaker Operation information: - Operating Time ........................XXXXXX.X h - Machine Operation Hours ............XXXX.X h - Operation Ratio................................XXX.X % Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To reset breaker operating data, rotate monitor dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen and press monitor dial.

• Attachment Operation

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Attachment Operation. Press monitor dial to display Attachment Operation information: - Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To reset attachment operating hours, rotate monitor dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen and press monitor dial. • Travel Operation Rotate monitor dial to highlight Travel Operation. Press monitor dial to display Travel Operation information: - Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To reset travel operating hours, rotate monitor dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen and press monitor dial. • Actual Operation NOTE: The actual operation time includes the front attachment operation and the travel operation hours. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Actual Operation. Press monitor dial to display Actual Operation information: - Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To reset actual operating hours, rotate monitor dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen and press monitor dial. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. OUT4001,0000731 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-26

061517

PN=97

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Information Menu—Maintenance The Maintenance menu provides the capability to notify the operator when the next maintenance item is due, shows hours remaining until next maintenance interval, and allows the interval hours to be reset. At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Maintenance. Press monitor dial to display Maintenance menu. Maintenance menu items include:

position) if any of the maintenance items listed come due for a change. Press the home button on switch panel to delete the notification. If Maintenance Notice is OFF, no notification is displayed on the monitor. To check if a maintenance item is due for a change, rotate monitor dial through list to reach specific item and highlight. If a wrench symbol appears next to the item, service is due. Press monitor dial to display the following information for each item:

• Previous Maintenance

• Engine Oil • Engine Oil Filter • Hydraulic Oil • Pilot Hydraulic Oil Filter • Hydraulic Oil Full-Flow Filter • Pump Transmission Oil • Travel Reduction Gear Oil • Swing Reduction Gear Oil • Swing Bearing Grease • Air Cleaner Element • Fuel Filter • Air Conditioner Filter • Exhaust Filter • DEF/AdBlue® Filter • User Setting 1 • User Setting 2 • Maintenance Notice...........ON or OFF

(date is displayed).............X.X h

• Remains...........................XXX.X h • Maintenance Interval......XXX.X h Press monitor dial to return to previous menu with no changes. To reset remaining time data, rotate monitor dial to highlight RESET at the bottom center of monitor and press monitor dial. The value of remaining hours is reset to that of change interval. The previous maintenance date and hours are updated with current date and time.

Rotate monitor dial to highlight Maintenance Notice. Press monitor dial to turn Maintenance Notice ON. Press monitor dial again to turn Maintenance Notice OFF.

To change the maintenance interval, rotate monitor dial to highlight the wrench with the clock next to it at the bottom right corner of monitor and press monitor dial. Backlighting will turn orange for Maintenance Interval. Rotate monitor dial to adjust the time for scheduled hour maintenance. Press monitor dial to store the change. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen.

If Maintenance Notice is ON, a message is displayed on the monitor for 10 seconds (when the key switch is in ON AdBlue is a trademark of VDA, the German Association of the Automotive Industry KR46761,0000FB3 -19-31AUG15-1/1

Main Menu—Information Menu—Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting menu provides access to view any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) generated by a controller. At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Troubleshooting. Press monitor dial to begin Troubleshooting data. After displaying Wait message, the screen displays controller troubleshooting menu:

• Engine (00) • Main (00)

• Monitor (00) • Information (00) • Option (00) The amount of currently generated DTCs is displayed at the right side of each item in parentheses. Rotate monitor dial to highlight an item displaying DTCs. Press monitor dial to display the actual DTC numbers. Up to 20 DTCs can be displayed. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen. OUT4001,0000733 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-27

061517

PN=98

Operation—Monitor Operation

Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring The Monitoring menu provides access to view engine speed and restriction level in the exhaust filter. At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Monitoring. Press monitor dial to display Monitoring menu:

• Actual Engine Speed...........XXXX min-¹ • Exhaust Filter Restriction Level....(displays a bar

graph) There are five segments to the bar graph to indicate the restriction status of the exhaust filter.

- If any of the first three segments of the bar graph display a block, auto cleaning needs to be enabled. - If the fourth or fifth segment also displays a block, a parked cleaning needs to be initiated by the operator. An exhaust filter alarm indicator will also appear on the monitor. Press back button to return to previous screen. Press home button to return to default screen.

OUT4001,0000734 -19-31AUG15-1/1

2-2-28

061517

PN=99

Operation—Operating the Machine Before Starting Work T133556 —UN—24AUG00

Review the operating precautions. See Safety—Operating Precautions. (Section 1-3.) Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to fasten seat belt even during brief periods of use.

Reading Operator's Manual TX03679,0001780 -19-23APR15-1/1

Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting Safety and Protective Devices Checks Walk around machine to clear all persons from machine area before starting machine. Clear all steps and walking surfaces. Check condition of guards, shields, and covers. Overall Machine Checks Check for worn or frayed electrical wires and loose or corroded connections. Inspect machine for bent, broken, or loose parts. Check for loose or missing hardware.

1— Check Pedal and Lever Movement/Clean Out Cab Debris 2— Check Hydraulic Oil Level 3— Check Surge Tank Level

4— Check Engine Oil Level 5— Check/Clean Radiator and Oil Cooler Outer Fins

1 2 TX1000291 —UN—15NOV05

Check for oil leaks, missing or loose hose clamps, kinked hoses, and lines or hoses that rub against each other or other parts.

5 3 4 Inspect Machine Daily

KR46761,0001172 -19-14APR16-1/1

2-3-1

061517

PN=100

Operation—Operating the Machine

Battery Disconnect Switch

TX1156592A —UN—17APR14

IMPORTANT: Always turn battery disconnect switch OFF before any maintenance or repair is performed on machine’s electrical system or any welding work is performed. The battery disconnect switch should also be turned OFF if machine is left unattended. If switch is left ON for long periods, batteries may become discharged. The battery disconnect switch (2) is used to isolate electrical power from batteries to machine. The battery disconnect switch has two positions: OFF and ON. IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. After turning key switch to OFF position, only turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position when indicator light (1) no longer illuminates. The battery disconnect switch is located inside the left rear service door. Move battery disconnect switch to ON position (horizontal) before starting engine. Turn

Battery Disconnect Switch (in ON position) 1— Indicator Light

2— Battery Disconnect Switch

battery disconnect switch to OFF position (vertical) when servicing or storing machine. The battery disconnect decal shows factory positions. CN93077,000025F -19-25APR14-1/1

Engine Break-In Period IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, it is critical to observe the engine break-in period. Extra care during the first 500 hours of operation will result in more satisfactory long-term engine performance and life. DO NOT exceed 500 hours of operation with John Deere Break-In Plus™ engine oil. This machine is factory filled with John Deere Break-In Plus engine oil. 1. Operate the machine at heavy or normal loads with minimal idling during the break-in period. During the first 20 hours, avoid prolonged periods of engine idling or sustained maximum load operation. If engine will idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine. IMPORTANT: DO NOT add make-up oil until the oil level is BELOW the ADD mark on the dipstick. John Deere Break-In Plus oil should be used to make up any oil consumed during the break-in period. If John Deere Break-In Plus engine oil is not available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine oil meeting one of the following during the initial 250 hours of operation:

• API Service Category CJ-4 • ACEA Oil Sequence E9 • ACEA Oil Sequence E6 2. Check engine oil level more frequently during the engine break-in period. 3. Change oil and oil filter after first 500 hours of operation (maximum). Fill crankcase with the normal seasonal viscosity grade oil. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.) 4. Watch coolant temperature gauge closely. If coolant temperature rises above specified limits on the gauge, reduce load on engine. Unless temperature drops quickly, stop the engine and determine the cause before resuming operation. See Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting. 5. Watch oil pressure gauge for pressure within specification. 6. Check belt for proper alignment and seating in pulley grooves.

Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company CN93077,0000249 -19-01MAR16-1/1

2-3-2

061517

PN=101

Operation—Operating the Machine

Starting Engine

TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine. The diesel fired coolant heater is required for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See an authorized John Deere dealer. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an additional warm-up period. See Cold Weather Warm-Up in this section. Before Starting the Engine Turn key switch to ON position. The system starting screen (1) displays for about 2 seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed.

System Starting Screen

Starting the Engine TX1160713A —UN—15MAY14

1. Move pilot shutoff lever to the locked (UP) position to start machine. 2. Move engine speed dial (3) to slow idle position. 3. Sound horn to alert persons nearby. IMPORTANT: Prevent starter damage. Never operate starter for more than 20 seconds at a time. If engine does not start, return key switch to OFF. Wait for about 2 minutes, then try again. After a false start, DO NOT turn key switch until engine stops.

Default Screen

TX1086455A —UN—04JAN11

4. Turn key switch to START. Release key; switch will return to ON position. After Starting Check IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine. If alarm indicators remain illuminated after starting engine, IMMEDIATELY STOP THE ENGINE. Find and correct the problem. After the engine is started, check that no alarm indicators are shown on display. If the alarm indicators continue to be displayed, stop the engine immediately. Find and correct the problem. See Main Menu—Alarm List. (Section 2-2.) Warming the Engine 1. Run engine at 1/3 speed for 30 seconds. Do not run engine at fast or slow idle. Do not accelerate rapidly during warm-up.

Engine Speed Dial 1— System Starting Screen 2— Default Screen

3— Engine Speed Dial

2. Operate machine at less-than-normal loads and speeds until engine is at normal operating temperature.

CN93077,000024A -19-19JAN16-1/1

2-3-3

061517

PN=102

Operation—Operating the Machine

Cold Weather Start Aid—If Equipped

TS281 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding container. Starting fluid is highly flammable. Keep container away from heat, sparks, and open flame. Contents are pressurized. Do not puncture or incinerate container. Remove container from machine if engine does not need starting fluid. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine. The diesel fired coolant heater is required for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See an authorized dealer.

Pressurized Fluids

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an additional warmup period. See Cold Weather Warmup in this section. The cold weather start aid is equipped on the machine as an option. Cold weather start aid is automatically activated by the engine control unit (ECU). Starting fluid is required when ambient temperature is below 0°C (32°F). To replace start aid can:

TX1156396A —UN—17MAR14

1. Open the left front service door to access the start aid can. 2. Remove clamp (1) from container. 3. Turn container (2) counterclockwise to remove the start aid can. 4. Install new container by turning clockwise into starting valve. 5. Close left front service door.

Ether Clamp and Container

Operating Machine Without Start Aid Container Installed

1— Clamp

2— Container

If no starting fluid is needed, remove container and install dust cap. CN93077,0000256 -19-08FEB16-1/1

2-3-4

061517

PN=103

Operation—Operating the Machine

Cold Weather Warm-Up CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. If hydraulic oil is cold, hydraulic functions move slowly. DO NOT attempt normal machine operation until hydraulic functions move at close-to-normal cycle times. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine. The diesel fired coolant heater is required for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See an authorized John Deere dealer. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require a diesel fired coolant heater warm-up period. At -20°C (-4°F) the engine requires 1-hour warm-up period. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require additional warm-up period. See table below. Diesel Fired Coolant Heater Warm-Up Period Temperature

Required Warm-Up Period Before Operation

-20°C (-4°F)

1 Hour

-21°C (-5°F)

1 Hour

-22°C (-7°F)

2 Hours

-23°C (-9°F)

2 Hours

-24°C (-11°F)

2 Hours

-25°C (-13°F)

2 Hours

-26°C (-14°F)

2 Hours

-27°C (-16°F)

2 Hours

-28°C (-18°F)

2 Hours

-29°C (-20°F)

3 Hours

-30°C (-22°F)

4 Hours

-31°C (-23°F)

5 Hours

-32°C (-25°F)

6 Hours

-33°C (-27°F)

7 Hours

-34°C (-29°F)

8 Hours

-35°C (-31°F)

9 Hours

-36°C (-32°F)

10 Hours

-37°C (-34°F)

11 Hours

-38°C (-36°F)

12 Hours

-39°C (-38°F)

13 Hours

-40°C (-40°F)

14 Hours

Engine maintains 1200 rpm until hydraulic temperature reaches 2°C (35.6°F) or 15 minutes, whichever comes first. 2. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 5 minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear the area of all bystanders before running machine through the warm-up procedure. If machine is inside a building, warm the travel circuit first and move the machine to a clear area outside. Cold oil causes machine functions to respond slowly. 3. Actuate travel and swing functions slowly, initially moving only short distances. 4. Operate boom, arm, and bucket functions by moving cylinders a short distance each direction for the first time. 5. Continue cycling cylinders by increasing the travel each cycle until full stroke is obtained. 6. Swing upperstructure so boom is perpendicular to tracks. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine sliding backwards. Keep angle between boom and arm 90—110°. 7. Keeping the angle between boom and arm 90—110°, fully actuate bucket close function (cylinder extend) and lower bucket to raise track off ground. IMPORTANT: Holding function actuated for more than 10 seconds can cause damage from hot spots in the control valve. 8. While rotating raised track in forward direction, actuate bucket curl function (cylinder extend) for 10 seconds and release for 5 seconds for a period of 2-1/2 minutes. 9. Repeat procedure with track rotating in reverse direction. 10. Lower machine to ground.

In extremely cold conditions, an extended warm-up period is necessary. Avoid sudden operation of all functions until the engine and hydraulic oil are thoroughly warm. 1. If temperature is below 0°C (32°F), engine will start at 800 rpm and ramp to 1200 rpm after 30 seconds.

11. Repeat steps 6—10 on opposite track. 12. Operate all hydraulic functions to distribute warm oil in all cylinders, motors, and lines. 13. If hydraulic functions still move slowly, repeat steps 7 and 8. ER79617,0000DC6 -19-17MAR16-1/1

2-3-5

061517

PN=104

Operation—Operating the Machine

Travel Pedals and Levers CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Keep bystanders clear of machine when traveling. Keep bystanders clear of machine when traveling. The instructions below apply when the travel motors (4) are to the rear of the machine. If the travel motors are to the front of the machine, the machine moves OPPOSITE to the direction described.

T137492 —UN—25JAN01

FORWARD TRAVEL (1): Push down on front of both pedals or push both levers forward. REVERSE TRAVEL (2): Push down on rear of both pedals or pull both levers rearward. NEUTRAL POSITION (3): Travel brakes will automatically stop and hold the machine. RIGHT TURN: Push down on front of left pedal or push left lever forward. LEFT TURN: Push down on front of right pedal or push right lever forward. SHORT TURN (COUNTER ROTATE): Push down the front of one pedal and the rear of the other or push one lever forward and pull the other rearward. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine tipping. Operate control pedals or levers slowly when traveling down a slope.

Travel Pedals and Levers 1— Forward Travel 2— Reverse Travel

3— Neutral Position 4— Travel Motor (2 used)

COLD WEATHER OPERATION: Travel pedal and lever dampers are provided for smooth control. In extremely cold weather, pedal or lever effort will increase. Operate pedals or levers several times with pilot shutoff lever in the locked (UP) position.

TRAVELING DOWN A SLOPE: Operate control pedals or levers slowly when traveling down a slope. ER79617,0000E31 -19-04MAY15-1/1

2-3-6

061517

PN=105

Operation—Operating the Machine

Auxiliary Function Lever (AFL)—If Equipped

TX1168382A —UN—11AUG14

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Before operating attachment switch, consult attachment operator’s manual for proper mounting and operation. Do not use auxiliary function lever (AFL) to operate couplers or similar devices. Move pilot control shutoff lever to the unlock (DOWN) position. Press auxiliary function enable switch (1) to enable auxiliary function lever (AFL) (2) on the right pilot control lever. Light-emitting diode (LED) will illuminate on auxiliary function enable switch when function is enabled.

Auxiliary Function Enable Switch

The AFL on the right pilot control lever is a proportional switch used for optional equipment and attachments requiring proportional hydraulic flow. Use of AFL is for rotary or tilt functions or thumb operation. The power dig button (3) is also located on the right pilot control lever. See Power Dig Button. (Section 2-1.) 3— Power Dig Button

TX1232664A —UN—23JAN17

1— Auxiliary Function Enable Switch 2— Auxiliary Function Lever (AFL)

Right Pilot Control Lever DJ54098,000040A -19-23JAN17-1/1

2-3-7

061517

PN=106

Operation—Operating the Machine

Exhaust Filter

Auto Cleaning

The exhaust filter is a critical component in the engine's emissions control system, which is required to meet governmental emissions regulations. The exhaust filter captures soot and ash to prevent its release into the atmosphere. The soot and ash must be eliminated from the exhaust filter to keep it functioning properly. The process of eliminating collected soot is called exhaust filter cleaning. There are three types of exhaust filter cleaning available to the operator:

CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust filter auto cleaning can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with hot gases and components. During exhaust filter auto cleaning, the engine may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust filter components may reach temperatures hot enough to burn people and ignite or melt common materials.

• NATURAL/PASSIVE • AUTO • PARKED There are five soot levels to describe the amount of restriction in the exhaust filter. These levels determine the type of cleaning that is required:

• LOW • MODERATE • HIGH • VERY HIGH • SERVICE

With auto cleaning enabled, exhaust filter cleaning is automatically performed as needed with no interaction from the operator. An exhaust filter cleaning indicator illuminates on the default screen of the monitor when the system is actively performing an exhaust filter auto cleaning. Machine can be operated as normal. When the exhaust filter auto cleaning process has completed its cycle, the cleaning indicator automatically turns off. NOTE: Disabling exhaust filter auto cleaning is not preferred. Whenever possible, auto cleaning should be enabled to keep soot buildup to a minimum and to increase overall machine uptime.

To observe the current restriction status of the exhaust filter, an exhaust filter restriction level bar graph is located in the Information Menu for viewing at any time. For more information, see Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.) Auto cleaning is able to activate (if not disabled by the operator) when the exhaust filter restriction is anywhere between MODERATE and HIGH soot levels. Auto cleaning is no longer available if exhaust filter restriction reaches VERY HIGH or SERVICE soot levels. Parked cleaning can only be initiated when the exhaust filter restriction reaches HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels. If exhaust filter restriction reaches SERVICE soot level, see an authorized dealer. In addition to the cleaning procedures, the exhaust filter also requires maintenance to remove accumulated ash as required, which is a noncombustible result of additives used in crankcase lubrication oils and the fuel. Ash removal CANNOT be performed by the operator. For more information on exhaust filter ash removal, see Service Exhaust Filter. (Section 3-3.)

If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe for elevated exhaust temperatures, auto cleaning can be disabled through the monitor. For more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto Exhaust Filter Cleaning. (Section 2-2.) If auto cleaning is disabled by the operator, an exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator appears on the default screen of the monitor and remains on until auto cleaning is enabled again. If filter restriction reaches the HIGH soot level with auto cleaning disabled, an exhaust filter alarm indicator appears on the default screen of the monitor to alert the operator to enable auto cleaning or to initiate a parked cleaning. Operator can check the restriction level bar graph in the monitor at any time. See Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.) Parked Cleaning CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust filter parked cleaning can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with hot gases and components.

NOTE: Unnecessary idling can cause exhaust filter soot to accumulate more quickly. For the best possible exhaust filter operation requiring the least amount of operator interaction, idling should be kept to a minimum.

During exhaust filter parked cleaning, the engine may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust filter components may reach temperatures hot enough to burn people and ignite or melt common materials.

Natural/Passive Cleaning During normal machine operation, the exhaust heat naturally cleans the soot buildup in the exhaust filter.

Avoid death or serious injury from machine movement. Do not leave running machine unattended during exhaust filter cleaning. Continued on next page

2-3-8

CN93077,000024C -19-19JAN16-1/2

061517

PN=107

Operation—Operating the Machine

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always park machine in a safe location and check for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level before beginning exhaust filter parked cleaning. Parked cleaning is a process that allows the system to clean the exhaust filter. It is most commonly initiated after extended operation with exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled or frequent engine shutdowns have occurred while the auto cleaning process was active. For more detailed information, see Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning in this section. During the cleaning process, the engine speed will be controlled automatically and the machine must remain parked to complete the procedure. Complete cleaning time takes less than 45 minutes, but varies on several criteria including fuel type, oil type, duty cycle, ambient temperature, and the number of previously aborted exhaust filter cleaning requests. Parked cleaning can only be initiated if the filter restriction is at HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels. Parked cleaning is prompted by an exhaust filter alarm indicator appearing on the monitor. If exhaust filter alarm indicator is illuminated and yellow, filter restriction is at a HIGH soot level and auto cleaning needs enabled or a parked cleaning should be done soon. If exhaust filter alarm indicator is blinking and yellow along with the warning alarm indicator, filter restriction is at a VERY HIGH soot level and a parked cleaning should be done immediately. Machine needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This safe state includes three conditions:

• Machine is parked in a safe place with the front attachment lowered to the ground.

• Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position. • Engine speed dial is set to slow idle. Once the exhaust filter parked cleaning switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds, a parked cleaning progress

screen appears on monitor. Progress status is displayed by a bar graph. The cleaning process continues until one of the following conditions exist:

• There is no soot restriction in the exhaust filter. • An elapsed time of 45 minutes occurs, causing a time-out.

• Operator cancels the parked cleaning procedure by

lowering the pilot shutoff lever or increasing engine speed. • Parked cleaning is aborted due to a system malfunction. • Engine runs out of fuel. • Engine is shut off by operator (not recommended). IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will NOT be returning to operation immediately after a parked cleaning procedure, allow the engine and exhaust filter time to return to normal operating temperatures BEFORE stopping engine. The exhaust filter cleaning indicator is illuminated on the monitor during the parked cleaning. When parked cleaning procedure is complete, engine automatically returns to slow idle and exhaust filter cleaning indicator turns off. Machine is ready to return to operation. Avoid disabling the auto cleaning process unless necessary. Repeated disabling of the auto cleaning process or ignoring prompts to perform a parked cleaning procedure causes engine power limitations and can eventually lead to dealer-required service cleaning. Ash Removal The exhaust filter cleaning procedures listed previously clean the soot from the machine's exhaust filter. The exhaust filter also traps ash deposits over time, which are not removed during an exhaust filter cleaning. When the exhaust filter has run several thousand hours, these ash deposits can restrict engine performance and must be removed. For more information on ash removal, see Service Exhaust Filter. (Section 3-3.) CN93077,000024C -19-19JAN16-2/2

2-3-9

061517

PN=108

Operation—Operating the Machine

Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning CAUTION: Servicing machine during exhaust filter parked cleaning can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin contact with hot gases and components.

TX1160745 —UN—15MAY14

1 2

Avoid death or serious injury from machine movement. Do not leave running machine unattended during exhaust filter cleaning.

TX1218573A —UN—30JUN16

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always park machine in a safe location and check for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level before beginning exhaust filter parked cleaning. The exhaust filter parked cleaning process allows the system to clean the exhaust filter when the filter restriction is at HIGH or VERY HIGH soot levels. Exhaust filter parked cleaning is most commonly initiated after extended operation with exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled or frequent engine shutdowns have occurred while the auto cleaning process was active. Operator can check the restriction level bar graph in the monitor at any time. See Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring. (Section 2-2.)

Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch

Before starting the parked cleaning process, the machine needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This safe state includes three conditions:

• Machine is parked in a safe place with the front

TX1160746 —UN—15MAY14

5 min-1

attachment lowered to the ground.

• Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position. • Engine speed dial is set to slow idle. Parked Cleaning Progress Screen

An exhaust filter alarm indicator (1) on the monitor informs the operator when a parked cleaning needs to take place.

• If the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow, exhaust filter

restriction is at HIGH soot level and an exhaust filter parked cleaning should be done soon. • If the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow and blinking, exhaust filter restriction is at VERY HIGH soot level and an exhaust filter parked cleaning should be done immediately. Warning alarm indicator also illuminates.

1— Exhaust Filter Alarm Indicator 2— Parked Cleaning Start Screen 3— Exhaust Filter Parked Cleaning Switch

4— Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator 5— Parked Cleaning Progress Screen 6— Bar Graph

on the monitor. Move the pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position and set engine speed dial to slow idle. Press and hold the parked cleaning switch again for 3 seconds to begin the exhaust filter parked cleaning process.

Before starting the parked cleaning process, make sure the machine is in a safe state as listed previously. Once these conditions are met, press and hold the exhaust filter parked cleaning switch (3) on the right console for 3 seconds. NOTE: If the safe state conditions are NOT met and the exhaust filter parked cleaning switch is pressed and held, a parked cleaning start screen (2) appears

Exhaust filter cleaning indicator (4) illuminates on the monitor and a parked cleaning progress screen (5) appears. Progress status is displayed on the bar graph (6).

Continued on next page

2-3-10

CN93077,000024D -19-30JUN16-1/2

061517

PN=109

Operation—Operating the Machine

During the cleaning process, the engine speed is controlled automatically and the machine must remain parked to complete the procedure. Complete cleaning time takes less than 45 minutes, but varies on several criteria including fuel type, oil type, duty cycle, ambient temperature, and the number of previously aborted exhaust filter cleaning requests. Exhaust combustion may temporarily emit white smoke during the cleaning process.

process must start over. For a system fault, see an authorized John Deere dealer.

The cleaning process continues until one of the following conditions exist:

NOTE: If machine needs to be operated during the parked cleaning procedure, press the exhaust filter parked cleaning switch again. The process is cancelled and a message is displayed on the monitor informing the operator. Machine operation can resume, but a parked cleaning must be performed as soon as possible.

• An elapsed time of 45 minutes occurs, causing a time-out.

• Pilot shutoff lever is moved. • Engine speed dial is moved. • Parked cleaning is aborted due to a system fault. • Engine runs out of fuel. • Engine is shut off by operator (not recommended). If any of these conditions happen during the parked cleaning process, the process is cancelled and a message is displayed on the monitor informing the operator. The condition needs to be amended and the parked cleaning

IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will NOT be returning to operation immediately after a parked cleaning procedure, allow the engine and exhaust filter time to return to normal operating temperatures BEFORE stopping engine.

When there is no soot restriction in the exhaust filter, the parked cleaning procedure is complete. Engine automatically returns to slow idle and exhaust filter cleaning indicator turns off. A message appears on the monitor stating Exhaust Filter Cleaning Complete and the machine is ready to return to operation. CN93077,000024D -19-30JUN16-2/2

2-3-11

061517

PN=110

Operation—Operating the Machine

RG22427 —UN—14FEB13

Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Overview

SCR System A—SCR Catalyst B—DEF Dosing Injector

C—DEF Dosing Unit D—DEF Tank Header Assembly

E—DEF Tank

IMPORTANT: Do not remove battery leads for at least 5 minutes after engine stops. The SCR system automatically purges itself of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) immediately after the engine is stopped. If adequate time is not allowed for lines to be purged, residual DEF can freeze and possibly damage components of the SCR system during cold-weather exposure. In order to comply with national and local emission requirements, this engine series contains a selective catalytic reduction (SCR) system. The main components of the SCR system include the SCR catalyst (A), DEF dosing injector (B), DEF dosing unit (C), DEF tank header assembly (D), and DEF tank (E). The SCR system is effective at reducing the nitrogen oxides (NOx) emissions. NOx is a major component of smog and acid rain. During combustion, NOx molecules are formed in the exhaust. DEF is injected into the exhaust stream before the SCR catalyst. Through a chemical reaction in the SCR, NOx is converted into nitrogen and water. Water vapor is a normal by-product of combustion. During cold-weather operation at low exhaust temperatures,

this water vapor can condense and resemble white smoke from the exhaust. This will dissipate as operating temperature increases and the water is further vaporized. This situation is considered normal. A DEF solution begins to crystallize and freeze at -11°C (12°F). With climate temperatures that can range much colder than this, DEF is expected to freeze in the DEF tank. For this reason, the DEF tank contains a heating element that provides rapid thawing of DEF upon start-up. The heating element cycles to maintain fluidity during operation as needed. DEF is not dosed upon initial start-up; therefore, it is not necessary to have liquid DEF at cold start-up. If DEF quality deteriorates and it is no longer within specifications, the engine can derate. DEF should be crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF appears cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound ammonia smell, it is likely not within specification. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is displayed, informing the operator to replace the DEF. Upon replacement of DEF and operation of the engine under load for a period of time or an exhaust filter cleaning, the code automatically goes away with no required input from the operator. CN93077,000026D -19-22JAN16-1/1

2-3-12

061517

PN=111

Operation—Operating the Machine

Qualified Emergency Use — SCR Override Option NOTE: This is a US EPA only option. Engine must have a US EPA and EU emission label. Option is not available for engine with EU only emission label.

future use, the operator (or other person responsible for the engine/equipment) must submit a report to the John Deere Dealer Technical Assistance Center, which must include the following:

• Contact name, mail and email addresses, and

telephone number for responsible company or entity

• Description of the emergency situation, the location

IMPORTANT: Operating the engine without emissions related derates could damage the aftertreatment system. Description: Qualified Emergency Use – SCR Override Option Under the US EPA’s regulations the Qualified Emergency SCR Override Option (Emergency SCR Override) is considered an Auxiliary Emission Control Device (AECD), which is only permitted during qualified emergency situations. To ensure compliance with US EPA regulations governing this type of AECD it is important that operators read the following information and comply with the requirements. Emergency SCR Override enables a Selective Catalyst Reduction (SCR) equipped application to operate without emissions-related derates for a specified period of time during qualified emergency situations. A qualified emergency situation is one in which the condition of an engine’s emission controls poses a significant direct or indirect risk to human life. An example of a direct risk is an emission control condition that inhibits the performance of an engine being used to rescue a person from a life-threatening situation. An example of an indirect risk is an emission control condition that inhibits the performance of an engine being used to provide electrical power to a data center that routes ‘‘911’’ emergency response telecommunications.

of the engine during the emergency, and the contact information for an official who can verify the emergency situation (such as a county sheriff, fire marshal, or hospital administrator) • Reason for the Emergency SCR Override activation during the emergency situation, such as the lack of diesel exhaust fluid, or the failure of an emission-related sensor when the engine was needed to respond to an emergency situation • Engine’s serial number • Description of the extent and duration of the engine operation while the Emergency SCR Override was active, including a statement describing whether or not the Override was manually deactivated after the emergency situation ended In no event may this report be submitted to John Deere or other qualified service provide later than 60 calendar days after the Emergency SCR Override is activated. LEGAL Notification The following actions by the operator are an improper use of the Emergency SCR Override and are prohibited by the Clean Air Act and US EPA regulations:

• Activating the Emergency SCR Override for something other than a qualified emergency situation;

• Failing to disable the Emergency SCR Override after a qualified emergency situation ends; and,

• Failing to notify John Deere and send it reports

Emergency SCR Override Activation / Reporting The operator can activate the Emergency SCR Override through the operator interface. Once activated, the engine can operate free of emissions-related derates for 120 hours. If the derate condition is corrected during the 120 hours, the Emergency SCR Override can be paused in order to preserve the remainder of time for future use. The option expires along with any remaining time 240 hours after the Emergency SCR Override is activated. When the Emergency SCR Override has expired, the engine informational Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is displayed to the operator upon every engine start and every hour until acknowledged by the operator. To clear the DTC and reset the Emergency SCR Override timer for

as required in this Operators Manual and federal regulations. Note: John Deere is required to report to the US EPA the operator’s failure to report to it any Emergency SCR Override event (to the extent it becomes aware of such event).

The maximum civil penalty the US EPA may assess under 40 CFR 1068.101 is $4,454 for each day an engine or piece of equipment is operated in violation of the requirements associated with the Emergency SCR Override. US EPA regulations governing the Emergency SCR Override can be found at 40 CFR §1039.665, as may be amended. DX,SCR,EMRGNCY,OVERIDE -19-21DEC16-1/1

2-3-13

061517

PN=112

Operation—Operating the Machine

Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Delivery Process

For more information about Service ADVISOR Remote, see an authorized John Deere dealer.

Theory of Operation

Vehicle Reprogramming

Service ADVISOR™ is a diagnostic tool used by John Deere dealers to perform diagnostics as well as updates to machine settings and software. Dealers can access diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic addresses, create readings and recordings, and program controllers. This technology consists of both software and hardware. Technicians attend a minimum of 8 hours of training to become certified in utilizing this tool.

NOTE: Factory setting is set to always accept software downloads.

Service ADVISOR Remote (SAR) is a function of Service ADVISOR. SAR allows the dealer technician to connect to a SAR-enabled machine via the JDLink™ network to remotely access diagnostic trouble code information and record diagnostic data as well as program controllers. Similar to software (payload) updates in the computer industry, SAR enables John Deere to remotely deliver updated software via the JDLink hardware on board. Remote programming gives John Deere the ability to update software to enhance the performance of the machine. This capability can be used to reprogram most machine controllers. The user actively participates with the dealer in this process by installing the software update.

Normal machine operation can continue during the software download process. Customer will be notified by John Deere or a John Deere dealer of pending software updates with appropriate installation instructions via letter or phone. Customer can determine the appropriate time and place to install the new software on the machine. For more information, see Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation in this section. Once the customer initiates installation of the software, SAR will start and manage the installation of the new payload to the appropriate machine controllers. NOTE: Software download speed capability depends on JDLink cellular coverage.

NOTE: Some vehicle controllers may not be compatible for SAR reprogramming. Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company OUT4001,000075A -19-19AUG15-1/1

2-3-14

061517

PN=113

Operation—Operating the Machine

Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation

NOTE: The programming alarm indicator is used for different purposes, but the color of the alarm indicator changes for each purpose.

TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11

The flex power controller (FPC) will interface with JDLink™ and the monitor to communicate the availability of software updates and programming progress. The Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) is wired directly to the FPC and allows the operator to accept or decline available updates. Alarm indicators on the display are controlled through diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) originating from the FPC. The FPC will create the DTCs under certain conditions, which will then prompt the monitor to display operator instructions. It will be necessary to interact with a John Deere dealer or technician for needed information. Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11

When a software update is available to install, a yellow programming alarm will appear on the monitor, along with a message stating:

Programming Alarm

SOFTWARE UPDATE READY 1— Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch 2— DECLINE Software Updates

NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if there is an actual alarm. The Alarm List submenu under the Main Menu will give instructions to guide the operator through the process. For viewing alarm instructions, see Main Menu—Alarm List. (Section 2-2.)

3— ACCEPT Software Updates

If operator chooses to install the new update, the programming alarm will remain on the monitor, but the color will change to red and the message will state:

Park machine and stop engine. Installation of the software can only process if the engine is not running and pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.

PROGRAMMING IN PROCESS

NOTE: Before installing software, make sure the SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS have been read. Find SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS at the beginning of this manual.

DO NOT turn OFF machine power until the programming is complete.

Green LED on SAR switch will blink while programming is taking place.

Once programming is completed, programming alarm will turn green and the message will state:

LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when this alarm appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED will be green.

PROGRAMMING COMPLETED

Press and hold the right side of SAR switch (green LED) for 3 seconds to begin programming installation. Press left side of SAR switch (red LED) to cancel software update and wait until the next power cycle.

Cycle machine power to complete the installation process.

JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company Continued on next page

2-3-15

OUT4001,0000778 -19-19AUG15-1/3

061517

PN=114

Operation—Operating the Machine

If a problem occurs during the programming process, a red program failure alarm will appear on the monitor along with a red warning alarm. The message on the monitor will state:

TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11

TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11

PROGRAM FAILURE Program Failure Alarm

If these alarms appear, see an authorized John Deere dealer for solutions.

Warning Alarm

OUT4001,0000778 -19-19AUG15-2/3

If conditions exist that will not allow the transfer of new software to happen, a red unable to program alarm appears on the monitor along with a yellow warning alarm. The message on the monitor will state:

TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11

TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11

UNABLE TO REPROGRAM DEVICE Unable to Program Alarm

Make sure the engine is stopped and pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position. Press and hold the right side of SAR switch (green LED) again for 3 seconds to retry programming or contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Warning Alarm

OUT4001,0000778 -19-19AUG15-3/3

2-3-16

061517

PN=115

Operation—Operating the Machine

TX1017662A —UN—17JAN07

TX1017664A —UN—17JAN07

Locking the Hydraulic Coupler to the Attachment—If Equipped

Front Hook on Hydraulic Coupler

Hydraulic Coupler Pin

TX1171396A —UN—09SEP14

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from unexpected hydraulic coupler movement. Make sure hydraulic coupler is attached correctly to attachment. The supplemental lock can be engaged with the attachment in an incorrect lock position. A visual check is required each time the lock operation is performed. CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Prevent injury from hydraulic coupler movement. Keep bystanders clear of machine. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic coupler damage from incorrect installation. Attaching the bucket in a reverse orientation on the hydraulic coupler is not recommended. When installed in the reverse orientation, the bucket or the lift hook interferes with the arm of the excavator when the bucket is in full-curl position by extending the bucket cylinder. This is an inherent part of the design of the original equipment.

Hydraulic Coupler Control Box 1— Front Hook 2— Pin

3— Hydraulic Coupler Control Box

NOTE: The safety buzzer located on the hydraulic coupler control box (3) sounds to alert personnel the lock/unlock function has been activated. 1. Engage front hook (1) on pin (2). Switch on hydraulic coupler control box (3) should be in UNLOCK position.

Since the hydraulic coupler interacts with the arm at full-curl position to unlock the supplemental lock, the hydraulic coupler will NOT operate properly when the bucket is attached in reverse orientation.

Continued on next page

2-3-17

OUT4001,0000866 -19-01MAR16-1/2

061517

PN=116

Operation—Operating the Machine

NOTE: The hydraulic coupler must be held over relief to lock/unlock the hydraulic coupler cylinder.

TX1017663A —UN—17JAN07

2. Rotate to full-curl position. Press switch to LOCK position. Hold in full-curl position for 5 seconds. 3. Slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Visually verify supplemental lock contacts locking plate. Visually verify that lock plate is behind attachment pin. Switch on the hydraulic coupler control box should be in the LOCK position. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the hydraulic coupler. Do not operate attachment when the supplemental lock is used as the primary locking device. Doing so could result in hydraulic coupler malfunction.

Bucket Rotated to Full-Curl Position

4. Continue to slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Verify that attachment is properly locked. Switch on the hydraulic coupler control box should be in LOCK position. OUT4001,0000866 -19-01MAR16-2/2

2-3-18

061517

PN=117

Operation—Operating the Machine

Unlocking the Hydraulic Coupler From the Attachment—If Equipped

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Prevent injury from hydraulic coupler movement. Keep bystanders clear of machine.

TX1017662A —UN—17JAN07

Hydraulic Coupler Pin

TX1017664A —UN—17JAN07

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic coupler damage from incorrect installation. Attaching the bucket in a reverse orientation on the hydraulic coupler is not recommended. When installed in the reverse orientation, the bucket or the lift hook interferes with the arm of the excavator when the bucket is in full-curl position by extending the bucket cylinder. This is an inherent part of the design of the original equipment. Front Hook on Hydraulic Coupler

1. Keep attachment close to ground. Switch should be in LOCK position. NOTE: The hydraulic coupler must be held over relief in order to unlock the hydraulic coupler cylinder. 2. Rotate hydraulic coupler to full-curl position to release supplemental lock. Switch should be in LOCK position. TX1090672A —UN—11APR11

NOTE: The safety buzzer located on the hydraulic coupler control box (3) will sound to alert personnel the lock/unlock function has been activated. 3. Press switch to UNLOCK position. Hold in full-curl position for 5 seconds. 4. Slowly uncurl hydraulic coupler. Front hook (1) will release from pin (2). Switch should be in UNLOCK position. 1— Front Hook 2— Pin

Hydraulic Coupler Control Box

3— Hydraulic Coupler Control Box OUT4001,0000867 -19-09SEP14-1/1

2-3-19

061517

PN=118

Operation—Operating the Machine

Control Lever Pattern Operation

T137500 —UN—25JAN01

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from unexpected machine movement. Never place any part of body beyond window frame to avoid serious crushing injury from boom. Boom could lower if the pilot control lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged. Immediately replace a missing or broken window. Prevent injury from unexpected pilot control lever function. Be aware of the pilot control lever pattern used on the machine before operating. Excavator Pilot Control Lever Pattern

The machine comes equipped from the factory with the excavator pilot control lever pattern. A label, with both the excavator and backhoe pilot control lever patterns, is installed on the right cab window. T137498 —UN—25JAN01

Check the patterns on the label, and then carefully operate the pilot control levers to verify the pattern on machine. NOTE: A control pattern selector is an available field kit that when installed allows operator to change the pilot control lever pattern using a mechanical valve. To change the pattern from excavator to backhoe, see Mechanical Control Lever Pattern Selector—If Equipped in this section.

Backhoe Pilot Control Lever Pattern

Pilot control levers return to neutral when released. Functions stop and remain positioned. The parking brake for swing and travel engages. 5— Boom Down 6— Boom Up 7— Bucket Curl 8— Bucket Dump

T137499 —UN—25JAN01

1— Arm Out 2— Arm In 3— Swing Left 4— Swing Right

Boom, Arm, and Bucket Movement CN93077,000025D -19-29JUN16-1/1

2-3-20

061517

PN=119

Operation—Operating the Machine

Mechanical Control Lever Pattern Selector—If Equipped The machine pilot control levers can be changed from the standard EXCAVATOR control pattern (1) to a BACKHOE control pattern (2). To change control pattern: 1. Park machine on a level surface. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 3 minutes. 3. Place pilot shutoff lever in the locked (UP) position. TX1086705A —UN—10JAN11

4. Turn key switch to OFF position to stop engine. Remove key from switch. 5. Open left front service door to access the mechanical control lever pattern selector. 6. Remove tie band (3). 7. Remove locking screw (4). 8. Turn selector lever to the standard EXCAVATOR control pattern or BACKHOE control pattern. 9. Install tie band.

Mechanical Control Lever Pattern Selector 1— EXCAVATOR Control Pattern 2— BACKHOE Control Pattern

10. Close left front service door.

3— Tie Band 4— Locking Screw

CN93077,0000257 -19-29JAN15-1/1

2-3-21

061517

PN=120

Operation—Operating the Machine

Control Lever Pattern Conversion

1. Park and prepare machine for service. CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping fluid under pressure, stop engine and relieve the pressure in the system before disconnecting or connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.

2. Release hydraulic oil tank pressure by pushing pressure release button on top of hydraulic oil tank.

B TX1137117 —UN—17JUN13

NOTE: When going from excavator to backhoe pattern, moving boom up (A) hose to arm in (D) port, a fabricated hose size -6 JIC male x female approximately 150 mm (6 in) long, is needed.

3. Switch pilot line boom up (A) with arm in (D) port. Switch pilot line boom down (B) with arm out (C) port. 4. To view control lever patterns, see Control Lever Pattern Operation in this section.

Pilot Control Valve Side

EXCAVATOR PATTERN PILOT SIGNAL MANIFOLD

Right

Left

FUNCTIONS

PILOT CONTROL VALVE SIDE

CONTROL VALVE SIDE

BUCKET DUMP

BOOM DOWN

BUCKET CURL

BOOM UP

SWING RIGHT

ARM OUT

SWING LEFT

ARM IN

41— Pilot Signal Manifold (pilot control valve side) A—Boom Up B—Boom Down

C—Arm Out D—Arm In

BACKHOE PATTERN PILOT SIGNAL MANIFOLD FUNCTIONS Right

NOTE: Letters and numbers are on the housing next to the ports.

Left

PILOT CONTROL VALVE SIDE

CONTROL VALVE SIDE

BUCKET DUMP

ARM OUT

BUCKET CURL

ARM IN

SWING RIGHT

BOOM DOWN

SWING LEFT

BOOM UP

NOTE: Letters and numbers are on the housing next to the ports. MM16284,0001B12 -19-21MAR16-1/1

2-3-22

061517

PN=121

Operation—Operating the Machine

Operating in Water and Mud

TX1086781A —UN—11JAN11

Be careful not to operate the machine in water or mud above the upper deck surface of the undercarriage, causing the swing bearing and rotary manifold to be submerged. If the swing bearing and rotary manifold are submerged, remove cover from underneath center of machine. Remove drain plug (1) to drain water and mud. Clean swing gear area. Install plug and cover. Lubricate swing gear and swing bearing. Drain Plug (view from underneath)

1— Drain Plug

ER79617,0000DB3 -19-27MAY11-1/1

Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine roll-over. Use this technique only on a short slope. Machine depends on support of boom/arm/bucket during entire procedure until machine reaches top of slope. Repositioning the bucket during this procedure is NOT recommended. DO NOT swing upperstructure during this procedure. DO NOT reposition bucket during this procedure. 1. Wear seat belt.

2. Position undercarriage so travel motors will be on uphill end of machine. 3. Push bucket into the ground. 4. When boom is on uphill end of machine; pull machine using boom and arm cylinder to help travel motors. When boom is on downhill end of machine; push machine using boom and arm cylinder to help travel motors. VD76477,00001F4 -19-09JAN12-1/1

Required Machine Stop Warning RG22491 —UN—21AUG13

Machine Stop Mandate Occurs IMPORTANT: In some situations, machine engine power may be reduced as described. On notification, immediately place the machine in a safe state and move it to a safe location. A mandated machine stop can only be removed by a service technician.

Engine Emissions System Malfunction Indicator

Engine emissions system malfunction indicator illuminates when an emission-related fault occurs. DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-1/6

RG22492 —UN—21AUG13

Warning indicator illuminates when a condition exists which requires operator action.

Warning Indicator Continued on next page

2-3-23

DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-2/6

061517

PN=122

Operation—Operating the Machine

Engine stop indicator illuminates when a condition exists which requires immediate operator action and service.

RG22493 —UN—21AUG13

Engine Stop Indicator DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-3/6

RG26361 —UN—04SEP14

Emission System Fault Has Occurred Four hours or less remaining, engine emissions system malfunction and warning indicators are illuminated to warn operator of emissions-related fault. Two hours or less when pop-up is displayed.

• Engine power is normal. • Machine operation is normal. • Place machine in a safe state. • Contact service provider.

Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Warning Indicators

DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-4/6

Sixty minutes remaining, engine emissions system malfunction and engine stop indicators are illuminated and alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related fault. Sixty minutes or less from when pop-up is displayed until final power restriction.

• Engine power and torque will be reduced. • Key Off - Key On will temporarily provide full power. • Place machine in a safe state. • Contact service provider.

RG26972 —UN—26MAR15

Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-5/6

Two minutes or less remaining, engine emissions system malfunction and engine stop indicators are illuminated and alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related fault which has not been corrected. “DEF System Fault-Engine Power and Speed Limited” is displayed on machines with monitors.

• Engine power is idle only. • Place machine in a safe state. • Contact service provider.

RG26972 —UN—26MAR15

Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators DB84312,00001BC -19-19FEB16-6/6

2-3-24

061517

PN=123

Operation—Operating the Machine

Lower Boom With Engine Stopped

X9811 —UN—23AUG88

When an engine stops during operation, the boom cannot be lowered using the pilot controller because there is no pilot pressure oil to move the boom valve spool. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear all bystanders from the area before lowering the boom with the engine stopped. 1. Remove control valve access cover. CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping oil under pressure, stop engine and relieve the pressure in the system before disconnecting or connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all connections before applying pressure.

Avoid Injury From Escaping Oil Under Pressure

NOTE: Never loosen screw more than 2 turns as screw may come off. 2. Loosen nut (1). Loosen boom manual lower screw (2) 1/2 turn. The boom will start to lower. The boom lowering speed can be adjusted by loosening screw more. 3. After the bucket is lowered to the ground, tighten screw, then nut to specification.

1— Nut

TX1000642 —UN—29NOV05

Specification Screw—Torque................................................................................7 N·m 62 lb·in Nut—Torque..................................................................................13 N·m 115 lb·in 2— Boom Manual Lower Screw

Control Valve—Right Side Shown CN93077,0000004 -19-19AUG15-1/1

2-3-25

061517

PN=124

Operation—Operating the Machine

Parking the Machine IMPORTANT: During freezing weather, prevent damage to undercarriage components from frozen mud and dirt. Machine must be parked on a solid, level surface to prevent tracks freezing in the ground. 1. Park machine on a solid, level surface. During freezing weather, clean mud and dirt from tracks, rollers, and track frames. Clean the steps and walkways after parking the machine.

TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11

If tracks are frozen in the ground, slowly raise the machine using boom to free the tracks. Move machine carefully. 2. Lower equipment to the ground. 3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position. IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shut down engine is not done properly. Switch Panel

4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position without load for 2 minutes. 5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position.

TX1087013A —UN—18JAN11

6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key from switch. 7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position. IMPORTANT: Prevent cab electrical component damage from bad weather. Windows, roof vent, and cab door must be closed to prevent rain from entering. 8. Close windows, roof vent, and cab door.

Pilot Shutoff Lever

9. If machine is to be parked overnight, turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position. See Battery Disconnect Switch in this section.

1— Auto-Idle Switch 2— Engine Speed Dial

3— Key Switch 4— Pilot Shutoff Lever

If storing longer than overnight, see Miscellaneous—Storage. (Section 4-4.) 10. Lock all access doors and compartments. CN93077,0000260 -19-17MAR16-1/1

2-3-26

061517

PN=125

Operation—Operating the Machine

Loading and Unloading for Transport

T137507 —UN—25JAN01

CAUTION: Use extra care to prevent tipover or unexpected movement when loading and unloading machine for transport. Observe these rules when loading and unloading machine:

• Keep the trailer bed clean. • Locate trailer on a level and stable surface. • Chock trailer wheels. • Always wear seat belt. • Use loading ramps. Keep ramps at a low angle and firmly attached to trailer.

• Turn auto-idle switch to the A/I OFF position.

Loading Machine On A Trailer

Use slow speed operating modes and move machine carefully.

1. When loading machine, use bucket for support with angle of arm to boom at 90° (1). T7405BJ —UN—29NOV90

IMPORTANT: Prevent machine or trailer damage. DO NOT allow machine or bucket to impact trailer. 2. Position machine on trailer as shown. Fasten machine to trailer at designated tie down (2) areas. 3. When unloading machine, use bucket for support with angle of arm to boom at 90°. Moving Machine On Trailer

TX1086371A —UN—03JAN11

2— Tie Down (4 used)

Tie Downs (front side shown)

T137505 —UN—25JAN01

1— 90° Arm to Boom

Unloading Machine From A Trailer ER79617,0000D83 -19-19MAR12-1/1

2-3-27

061517

PN=126

Operation—Operating the Machine

Towing Machine

T137511 —UN—25JAN01

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Block both tracks when disconnecting travel gear cases. When travel gear cases are disconnected, machine has no brakes and can move. The machine will roll free on a slope or while being towed. 1. Block tracks. 2. Drain oil from each travel gear case. Sun Gear

3. Remove cover from each gear case. 4. Remove sun gear (1) from each gear case.

1— Sun Gear

5. Install cover. Fill gear case with oil. ER79617,0000AED -19-09FEB12-1/1

Lifting With Bucket Loop CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Lifting requires special care. Observe these rules when lifting with the machine:

TX1227481 —UN—01NOV16

• Never move a load over a bystander’s head. • Never use machine to lift people. • Keep everyone clear of raised loads. • Do not exceed lift capacity limits. • Never attach sling or chain to bucket teeth. • Use tether lines to guide loads. • Use hand signals to communicate with others. • Never move load suddenly. • Keep all bystanders away from raised load until blocks are supporting it or load is sitting on the ground.

For more information on lifting, see Use Special Care When Lifting Objects. (Section 1-3.)

1 2

For machine lift capacity, see Miscellaneous—Specifications.

Bucket With Bucket Loop

1. Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads. 1— Bucket

2— Bucket Loop

2. Check stability by carefully doing a trial lift:

• Raise load just off ground. • Swing load all the way to one side. • Move load slowly away from machine.

• Lower load immediately if machine is not stable. MB60223,0000020 -19-01NOV16-1/1

2-3-28

061517

PN=127

Operation—Operating the Machine

Lifting With John Deere Quick Coupler CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Lifting requires special care. Observe these rules when lifting with the machine:

• Do NOT exceed the coupler lifting capacity. • Do NOT exceed machine lift capacity. • Never use machine to lift people. • Never move a load over a bystander’s head. • Use tether lines to guide loads. • Use hand signals to communicate with others. • Never move load suddenly. • Keep all bystanders away from raised load until blocks are supporting it or load is sitting on the ground.

NOTE: Machine lift capacity may exceed the John Deere Quick Coupler lift point capacity.

TX1209202 —UN—13JAN16

For more information on lifting, see Use Special Care When Lifting Objects. (Section 1-3.) The John Deere Quick Coupler (1) is designed with a built-in lift point (2).

John Deere Quick Coupler 1— John Deere Quick Coupler

2— Lift Point

Specification John Deere Quick Coupler Lift Point Lifting Capacity—Weight........................................................................ 6803 kg 15 000 lb

Refer to the lift capacity chart for the machine lift capacity in various machine positions and track width. For machine lift capacity, see Miscellaneous—Specifications. (Section 4-6.) 1. Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads.

2. With John Deere Quick Coupler: Fasten sling or chain to lift point. 3. Check stability by carefully doing a trial lift:

• Raise load just off ground. • Swing load all the way to one side. • Move load slowly away from machine. • Lower load immediately if machine is not stable. MB60223,000004B -19-26MAY16-1/1

2-3-29

061517

PN=128

Operation—Operating the Machine

Lifting the Machine

TX1156707 —UN—27MAR14

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement when lifting the machine. Check lifting capacity of crane before lifting the excavator. Lift load only as high as necessary. Keep all people clear of raised load. NOTE: The center of gravity (2) will vary depending on the kind of attachment. Lifting Machine

NOTE: Refer to decals on machine for correct lift points (1). There are 2 lift points on each side of the undercarriage.

1— Lifting Points 2— Center of Gravity

3— Support Bar

1. Fully extend the boom, arm, and bucket cylinders. 2. Position the boom straight ahead of the upperstructure. 3. Turn key switch to OFF. Remove key from switch. 4. Pull the pilot control shutoff lever to the locked position. 5. Close and lock all doors and covers. 6. Route appropriate lifting device through lifting points (1) and under both sides of the track frame as illustrated.

7. Attach appropriate lifting device to lifting points. 8. Slowly lift the machine. Specification Lifting Machine—Approximate Weight............................................................................ 35 650 kg 78 550 lb. CN93077,0000263 -19-30APR14-1/1

2-3-30

061517

PN=129

Maintenance—Machine Required Emission-Related Information Service Provider A qualified repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices and systems with original or equivalent replacement parts. However, warranty, recall, and all other services paid for by John Deere must be performed at an authorized John Deere service center. DX,EMISSIONS,REQINFO -19-12JUN15-1/1

Diesel Fuel Consult a local fuel distributor for properties of the diesel fuel available in the area. In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low temperature requirements of the geographical area in which they are marketed. Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel fuel that meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use at all percentage mixture levels.

Sulfur Content for Engines That Meet Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg

(2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change interval. • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Required Fuel Properties

Sulfur Content for Engines That Meet Tier 2 and Stage II Engines

In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties:

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000

Cetane number of 43 minimum. Cetane number greater than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft).

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg

Cold filter plugging point (CFPP) should be at least 5°C (9°F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature.

mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.

(2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change interval. • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact an authorized John Deere dealer.

Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of 0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred.

Sulfur Content for Other Engines

Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with all existing emissions regulations for the area in which the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000

Sulfur Content for Engines That Meet Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage III B, and Stage IV Engines

• Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.

mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change interval.

IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel. Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.

maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.

MB60223,0000029 -19-05JUL16-1/1

Diesel Fuel Specifications The engine in this machine is designed to operate only with ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel. Use of fuel other than ULSD will reduce the efficiency and durability of the engine, will harm and permanently damage the

engine’s advanced emissions control systems, reduce fuel economy, and possibly prevent the engine from running at all. Emission-related warranties are likely to be rendered void by the use of fuel that does not meet these specifications. OUT4001,000060A -19-10JAN12-1/1

3-1-1

061517

PN=130

Maintenance—Machine

Lubricity of Diesel Fuel Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States, Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity.

If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at the specified concentration.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used in your machine demonstrates good lubricity characteristics.

Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with BioDiesel blends up to B20 (20% BioDiesel). Further increase in lubricity is limited for BioDiesel blends greater than B20.

Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel

Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of 0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred. DX,FUEL5 -19-07FEB14-1/1

Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the fuel tank or service the fuel system. Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to prevent water condensation and freezing during cold weather. Keep all storage tanks as full as practical to minimize condensation. Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water content of the fuel regularly.

When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more frequent replacement due to premature plugging. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil. IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always replace it with an original vented cap. When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel supplier or John Deere dealer for recommendations. DX,FUEL4 -19-15FEB13-1/1

3-1-2

061517

PN=131

Maintenance—Machine

BioDiesel Fuel BioDiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal fats. BioDiesel blends are BioDiesel mixed with petroleum diesel fuel on a volume basis. Before using fuel containing BioDiesel, review the BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in this Operator’s Manual.

BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations The petroleum diesel portion of all BioDiesel blends must meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590 (EU) commercial standard. BioDiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to purchase BioDiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited Producer (as certified by the National BioDiesel Board). Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.

Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using biofuels.

BioDiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214 can result in more rapid ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).

All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter (Released 2011 and After) While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel economy when using B20. BioDiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the engine’s emission control systems and should not be used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased intervals for ash removal.

The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement, when using BioDiesel fuel, particularly if switching from diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil. BioDiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days of the date of BioDiesel manufacture. BioDiesel blends above B20 must be used within 45 days from the date of BioDiesel manufacture. When using BioDiesel blends up to B20, the following must be considered:

• Cold-weather flow degradation • Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,

John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required when using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends.

microbial growth)

• Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem when first switching to BioDiesel on used engines)

• Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses

All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter (Primarily Released Prior to 2012)

(primarily an issue with older engines)

• Possible reduction of service life of engine components

While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel economy when using B20.

Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications provided in this Operator’s Manual. Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel conditioners to improve storage and performance with BioDiesel fuels.

These John Deere engines can operate on BioDiesel blends above B20 (up to 100% BioDiesel). Operate at levels above B20 ONLY if the BioDiesel is permitted by law and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily available in Europe). Engines operating on BioDiesel blends above B20 might not fully comply with or be permitted by all applicable emissions regulations. Expect up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18% reduction in fuel economy when using 100% BioDiesel. John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required when using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends.

The following must also be considered if using BioDiesel blends above B20:

• Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in

power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved fuel conditioners are not used • Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent oil changes) • Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components • Possible formation of sludge and sediments • Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated temperatures • Possible compatibility issues with other materials (including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze) used fuel handling equipment Continued on nextin page DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-1/2

3-1-3

061517

PN=132

Maintenance—Machine

• Possible reduction in water separator efficiency • Possible damage to paint if exposed to BioDiesel • Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment • Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material

ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present)

degradation (primarily an issue with older engines)

• Possible high acid levels within fuel system • Because BioDiesel blends above B20 contain more

IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any concentration in John Deere engines. Their use could cause engine failure.

ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-2/2

Testing Diesel Fuel A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content, water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather

operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification. Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on diesel fuel analysis. DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1

Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives Diesel fuel can be the source of performance or other operational problems for many reasons. Some causes include poor lubricity, contaminants, low cetane number, and a variety of properties that cause fuel system deposits. These and others are referenced in other sections of this Operator's Manual. To optimize engine performance and reliability, closely follow recommendations on fuel quality, storage, and handling, which are found elsewhere in this Operator's Manual.

To further aid in maintaining performance and reliability of the engine's fuel system, John Deere has developed a family of fuel additive products for most global markets. The primary products include Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (full feature conditioner in winter and summer formulas) and Fuel-Protect Keep Clean (fuel injector deposit removal and prevention). Availability of these and other products varies by market. See your local John Deere dealer for availability and additional information about fuel additives that might be right for your needs. DX,FUEL13 -19-07FEB14-1/1

Fuel Filters The importance of fuel filtration cannot be overemphasized with modern fuel systems. The combination of increasingly restrictive emission regulations and more efficient engines requires fuel system to operate at much higher pressures. Higher pressures can only be achieved using fuel injection components with very close tolerances. These close

manufacturing tolerances have significantly reduced capacities for debris and water. John Deere brand fuel filters have been designed and produced specifically for John Deere engines. To protect the engine from debris and water, always change engine fuel filters as specified in this manual. DX,FILT2 -19-14APR11-1/1

3-1-4

061517

PN=133

Maintenance—Machine

Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate effectively in cold weather.

Diesel Fuel Flow Additive

However, for effective starting and cold-weather operation, a little extra care is necessary. The following information outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold weather may have on starting and operation of your engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional information and local availability of cold-weather aids.

Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel (No. 2-D in North America) during the cold-weather season. This generally extends operability to about 10 °C (18 °F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.

Use Winter Grade Fuel When temperatures fall below 0 °C (32 °F), winter grade fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for cold-weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud point and a lower pour point. Cloud point is the temperature at which wax begins to form in the fuel. This wax causes fuel filters to plug. Pour point is the lowest temperature at which movement of the fuel is observed. NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not cause any other engine performance effects. Check the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting for low-power complaints in cold-weather operation. Air Intake Heater An air intake heater is an available option for some engines to aid cold weather starting. Ether An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold weather starting. CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not use ether when starting an engine equipped with glow plugs or an air intake heater.

IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature drops below 0 °C (32 °F). For best results, use with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended instructions on label. BioDiesel When operating with BioDiesel blends, wax formation can occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula) at 5 °C (41 °F) to treat BioDiesel fuels during the cold-weather season. Use B5 or lower blends at temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F). Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel at temperatures below -10 °C (14 °F). Winterfronts Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life, loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components potentially causing premature failures. If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no time should the air blockage device be applied directly to the radiator core. Radiator Shutters

Coolant Heater An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available option to aid cold weather starting. Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant Concentration Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the expected air temperature range between oil changes and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE COOLANT requirements in this section.)

If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator shutter system, this system should be regulated in such a way that the shutters are completely open by the time the coolant reaches 93 °C (200 °F) to prevent excessive intake manifold temperatures. Manually controlled systems are not recommended. If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be completely open by the time the intake manifold air temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature out of the charge air cooler. For more information, see your John Deere dealer. DX,FUEL10 -19-15MAY13-1/1

3-1-5

061517

PN=134

Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is a high purity liquid that is injected into the exhaust system of engines equipped with selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems. Maintaining the purity of DEF is important to avoid malfunctions in the SCR system. Engines requiring DEF shall use a product that meets the requirements for aqueous urea solution 32 (AUS 32) according to ISO 22241-1. The use of John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is recommended. John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is available at your John Deere dealer in a variety of package sizes to suit your operational needs. If John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is not available, use DEF that is certified by the American Petroleum Institute

(API) Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certification Program or by the AdBlue™ Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certification Program. Look for the API certification symbol or the AdBlue™ name on the container. In some cases, DEF is referred to by one or more of these names: • Urea • Aqueous Urea Solution 32 • AUS 32 • AdBlue™ • NOx Reduction Agent • Catalyst Solution

AdBlue is a trademark of VDA, the German Association of the Automotive Industry. DX,DEF -19-13JUN13-1/1

3-1-6

061517

PN=135

Maintenance—Machine

Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank

TS1731 —UN—23AUG13

CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with large amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested, contact a physician immediately. Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. IMPORTANT: Use only distilled water to rinse components that are used to deliver DEF. Tap water can contaminate DEF. If distilled water is not available, rinse with clean tap water, then thoroughly rinse with ample amounts of DEF. If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface other than the storage tank, immediately clean the surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and can distort some plastic and rubber components. If DEF is filled into engine fuel tank or other fluid compartment, do not operate engine until system is properly purged of DEF. Contact your John Deere dealer immediately to determine how to clean and purge the system. Reasonable care should be taken when refilling the DEF tank. Ensure that the DEF tank cap area is free of debris before removing the cap. Seal containers of DEF between use to prevent contamination and evaporation. Avoid splashing DEF and do not allow DEF to come into contact with skin, eyes, or mouth.

aluminum, and magnesium. Use suitable containers to transport and store DEF. Containers made of polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel are recommended. Avoid prolonged contact with skin. In case of accidental contact, wash skin immediately with soap and water. Keep anything used to store or dispense DEF clean of dirt and dust. Wash and rinse containers or funnels thoroughly with distilled water to remove contaminants. If an unapproved fluid, such as diesel fuel or coolant is added to the DEF tank, contact your John Deere dealer immediately to determine how to clean and purge the system. If water has been added to the DEF tank, a tank cleaning is necessary. See Cleaning DEF Tank in this manual. After refilling the tank, check the DEF concentration. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The operator must maintain appropriate DEF levels at all times. Check the DEF level daily and refill the tank as needed. The filling port is identified by a blue colored cap embossed with the DEF symbol, shown.

DEF is not harmful to handle, but DEF can be corrosive to materials such as steel, iron, zinc, nickel, copper, DX,DEF,REFILL -19-13AUG13-1/1

3-1-7

061517

PN=136

Maintenance—Machine

Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) IMPORTANT: Using DEF with the correct concentration is critical to engine and aftertreatment system performance. Extended storage and other conditions can adversely alter the DEF concentration. If DEF quality is questionable, draw a sample out of the DEF tank or storage tank into a clear container. DEF must be crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF appears cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound ammonia smell, it is likely not within specification. DEF in this condition should not be used. Drain tank, flush with distilled water and refill with new or good DEF. After refilling the tank, check the DEF concentration. If the DEF passes the visual and smell test, check the DEF concentration with a handheld refractometer calibrated to measure DEF.

suspicion the engine or packaged DEF fluid has been contaminated with water. Two approved tools are available through your John Deere dealer: • JDG11594 Digital DEF Refractometer—A digital tool providing an easy to read concentration measurement • JDG11684 DEF Refractometer—Low-cost alternative tool providing an analog reading Follow instructions included with either tool to obtain the measurement. The correct DEF concentration is 31.8—33.2% urea. If the DEF concentration is not within specification, drain the DEF tank, flush with distilled water and fill with new or good DEF. If packaged DEF is not within specification, dispose of DEF packages and replace with new or good DEF.

DEF concentration should be checked when the engine has been stored for extended periods, or if there is DX,DEF,TEST -19-13JUN13-1/1

Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with large amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested, contact a physician immediately. Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. IMPORTANT: It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the aftertreatment system. Do not use DEF that does not meet the required specifications or operate the engine with no DEF. Never attempt to create DEF by mixing agricultural grade urea with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and can damage the aftertreatment system. Do not add any chemicals or additives to DEF in an effort to prevent freezing. Any chemicals or additives added to DEF can damage the aftertreatment system.

It is preferred to store DEF out of extreme ambient temperatures. DEF freezes at –11 °C (12 °F). Exposure to temperatures greater than 30 °C (86 °F) can degrade DEF over time. Dedicated DEF storage containers must be sealed between uses to prevent evaporation and contamination. Containers made of polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel are recommended to transport and store DEF. Ideal conditions for storage of DEF are: • Store at temperatures between –5 °C and 30 °C (23 °F and 86 °F) • Store in dedicated containers sealed to avoid contamination and evaporation Under these conditions, DEF is expected to remain useable for a minimum of 18 months. Storing DEF at higher temperatures can reduce its useful life by approximately 6 months for every 5 °C (9 °F) temperature above 30 °C (86 °F). If unsure how long or under what conditions DEF has been stored, test DEF. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).

Never add water or any other fluid in place of, or in addition to DEF. Operating with a modified DEF or using an unapproved DEF can damage the aftertreatment system. The following storage information is provided for reference and is to be used as a guideline only.

Long-term storage in the DEF tank (over 12 months) is not recommended. If long-term storage is necessary, test DEF prior to operating engine. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). It is recommended to purchase DEF in quantities that will be consumed within 12 months.

DX,DEF,STORE -19-13JUN13-1/1

3-1-8

061517

PN=137

Maintenance—Machine

Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Although there is little issue with minor spillage of DEF on the ground, large amounts of DEF should be contained. If large spills occur, contact local environmental authorities for assistance with clean-up.

If a substantial quantity of DEF is not within specification, contact the DEF supplier for assistance with disposal. Do not dump substantial quantities of DEF onto the ground or send DEF to wastewater treatment facilities. DX,DEF,DISPOSE -19-13JUN13-1/1

Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants Conditions in certain geographical areas may require lubricant recommendations different from those printed in this manual.

Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the performance requirements as shown in this manual.

Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not be available in your location.

The temperature limits and service intervals shown in this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic lubricants.

Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and recommendations.

Re-refined base stock products may be used if the finished lubricant meets the performance requirements. DX,ALTER -19-11APR11-1/1

Mixing of Lubricants In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil. Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet certain specifications and performance requirements.

Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant performance. Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific information and recommendations. DX,LUBMIX -19-18MAR96-1/1

Lubricant Storage Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when clean lubricants are used. Use clean containers to handle all lubricants. Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.

Make certain that all containers are properly marked to identify their contents. Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual lubricant they may contain.

DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1

3-1-9

061517

PN=138

Maintenance—Machine

John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV New engines are filled at the factory with John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. During the break-in period, add John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil, as needed to maintain the specified oil level.

• API Service Category CK-4 • API Service Category CJ-4 • ACEA Oil Sequence E9 • ACEA Oil Sequence E6

Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine components properly.

If one of these oils is used during the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil and filter between a minimum of 100 hours and a maximum of 250 hours.

During the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil and filter between a minimum of 100 hours and maximum equal to the interval specified for John Deere Plus-50™ II oil.

IMPORTANT: Do not use any other engine oils during the initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine.

After engine overhaul, fill the engine with John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. If John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil is not available, use an SAE 10W-30 viscosity grade diesel engine oil meeting one of the following:

John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil can be used for all John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification levels. After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50™ II or other diesel engine oil as recommended in this manual.

Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company. DX,ENOIL16 -19-02NOV16-1/1

DO NOT use engine oil containing more than 1.0% sulfated ash, 0.12% phosphorus, or 0.4% sulfur.

122o F

40 o C

104o F

30 o C

86 o F

20 o C

68 o F

10 o C

50 o F

0o C

32 o F

-10 o C

14 o F

-20 o C

-4 o F

-30 o C

-22 o F

-40 o C

-40 o F

TS1691 —UN—18JUL07

• API Service Category CK-4 • API Service Category CJ-4 • ACEA Oil Sequence E9 • ACEA Oil Sequence E6

SAE 10W-30

If John Deere Plus-50™ II engine oil is not available, engine oil meeting one or more of the following may be used:

SAE 15W-40

Extended service intervals may apply when John Deere Plus-50™ II engine oil is used. Refer to the engine oil drain interval table and consult your John Deere dealer for more information.

SAE 10W-40

John Deere Plus-50™ II is the recommended engine oil.

50 o C

SAE 5W-30

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature range during the period between oil changes.

SAE 0W-40

Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV

Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred. Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply with all existing emissions regulations for the area in which the engine operates.

Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges

IMPORTANT: Use only ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a maximum sulfur content of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm). Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company DX,ENOIL14 -19-02NOV16-1/1

3-1-10

061517

PN=139

Maintenance—Machine

Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV Engines Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel. Actual service intervals also depend on operation and maintenance practices. Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval. Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on engine oil analysis. Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise recommended service interval. Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and filter service intervals. Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) is REQUIRED. Engine operation at high altitude decreases oil change intervals. See Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for Operation at High Altitude for additional information. IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage:

• Use only approved oil types. Approved Oil Types:

• John Deere Plus-50™ II • “Other Oils” include API CK-4, API CJ-4, ACEA E9, and ACEA E6

NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change interval is only allowed if all of the following conditions are met:

• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 15 mg/kg (15 ppm)

• Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II oil • Use of an approved John Deere oil filter Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals John Deere Plus-50™ II

500 hours

Other Oils

250 hours

Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils” to a maximum not to exceed the interval of Plus-50™ II oils. Oil analysis means taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond the normal service interval until either the data indicates the end of useful oil life or the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50 II oils is reached.

• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50%

when using biodiesel blends greater than B20. Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals.

Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company DX,ENOIL15,IT4,120toMAX -19-02NOV16-1/1

Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for Operation at High Altitude IMPORTANT: Diesel fuel sulfur content also affects engine oil and filter service intervals. See Engine Oil and Service Intervals in this section to determine the appropriate service interval prior to performing high altitude recommendations. To avoid excessive oil degradation and potential engine damage, reduce oil and filter service intervals to 50% of the original recommended values when operating engines at altitudes above 1675 m (5500 ft). Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals. Use only approved oil types.

Example of Original Hours

Corresponding High Altitude Hours

125

150

175

200

100

250

125

275

135

300

150

350

175

375

185

400

200

500

250 MB60223,0000016 -19-17DEC15-1/1

3-1-11

061517

PN=140

Maintenance—Machine

Oil Filters Filtration of oils is critically important for proper operation and lubrication. John Deere brand oil filters have been designed and produced specifically for John Deere applications. John Deere filters adhere to engineering specifications for quality of the filter media, filter efficiency rating, strength

of the bond between the filter media and the element end cap, fatigue life of the canister (if applicable), and pressure capability of the filter seal. Non-John Deere branded oil filters might not meet these key John Deere specifications. Always change oil filters regularly as specified in this manual. DX,FILT1 -19-11APR11-1/1

3-1-12

061517

PN=141

DO NOT MIX ZINC-BASED AND ZINC-FREE OILS.

30˚C

86˚F

20˚C

68˚F

10˚C

50˚F

0˚C

32˚F

-10˚C

14˚F

Flushing system is required when changing from zinc-free to zinc-based oils. Contact authorized dealer for the flushing procedure. Avoid mixing different brands of oils. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to meet certain specifications and requirements. Mixing different oils can degrade lubricant and machine performance.

-20˚C

-4˚F

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature range during the period between oil changes.

-30˚C

-22˚F

Low Temperature Operation

-40˚C

-40˚F

• Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils. • A preferred ISO32 hydraulic oil may be added to the machine for low temperature operations. Hydraulic system oil viscosity must be 32Cst at 40°C (104°F) minimum and must not be operated when ambient temperature exceeds 30°C (86°F). • When switching back to warm weather operation, a preferred ISO46 hydraulic oil may be added to the machine. The hydraulic system oil viscosity must be 40Cst at 40°C (104°F) minimum and must not be operated when ambient temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F). Seasonal Hydraulic Flushing

• Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils. • Two hydraulic tank flushes are required when changing

hydraulic oils for seasonal operation. Drain and refill tank with new oil (ISO32-cold, ISO46-warm). Operate machine to mix oil in system. Drain and refill tank again. Check oil viscosity.

The following oil is preferred: 5000 hour change interval:

TX1165037 —UN—10SEP14

104˚F

Premium AW32

40˚C Premium AW46

122˚F

Super EX 46HN

50˚C

IMPORTANT: This machine is factory filled with Super EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Super Hyrando WP46

Hydraulic Oil

Daphne Super Hydro A 32

Maintenance—Machine

Hydraulic Oil

1500 hour change interval: IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the machine. Zinc-based oils must not be mixed with 2500 hour and 5000 hour zinc-free oils. The following products may be zinc-based and can be used provided a complete hydraulic system flush has been performed. Contact an authorized dealer for this procedure. Premium AW oil: AW46 or AW32 (for low temperature operation) Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil: IMPORTANT: Other fire resistant and readily biodegradable oil (also called FR oils) are not approved in John Deere Construction and Forestry equipment. Use only Exxon Mobil EAL Envirosyn 46H Synthetic Esther Oil when a biodegradable oil is required. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer for this Registration and Routine Oil Analysis to meet warranty requirements.

• Zinc-Free Super EX 46HN oil from John Deere • Zinc-Free Super Hyrando WP46 2500 hour change interval: • Zinc-Free Daphne Super Hydro A 32 (for low temperature operation)

MB60223,0000043 -19-17MAR16-1/1

3-1-13

061517

PN=142

Maintenance—Machine

Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature range during the period between oil changes. The following oils are preferred:

• John Deere GL-5 Gear Lubricant • John Deere EXTREME-GARD™ Other oils may be used if they meet the following:

TS1653 —UN—14MAR96

• API Service Category GL-5

Swing Gear Case Oil EXTREME-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company VD76477,00001F6 -19-29APR14-1/1

Pump Drive Gear Case Oil IMPORTANT: This machine can use 15W/40 engine oil or 80/90 gear oil in the pump drive gear case. Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature range during the period between oil changes. The following oil is preferred: • John Deere Plus-50™ II The following oil is also recommended: • John Deere Torq-Gard™ T197398 —UN—21JAN04

Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the following:

• API Service Category CI-4 • API Service Category CH-4 • API Service Category CG-4 Pump Gear Case Oil Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company

DB84312,000008E -19-29APR14-1/1

3-1-14

061517

PN=143

Other greases may be used if they meet the following:

• NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickener are not compatible with others. Consult grease supplier before mixing different types of grease.

40o C

104o F

30o C

86o F

20o C

68o F

10o C

50o F

0o C

32o F

-10o C

14o F

-20o C

-4 o F

-30o C

-22o F

-40o C

-40o F

TX1237263 —UN—11APR17

• John Deere HD MOLY GREASE • John Deere HD LITHIUM COMPLEX GREASE • John Deere HD WATER RESISTANT GREASE

122o F

NLGI Number 2

The following greases are also recommended:

50o C

NLGI Number 1

• John Deere SD POLYUREA GREASE

John Deere HD WATER RESISTANT

The following grease is preferred:

John Deere SD POLYUREA

Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the expected air temperature range during the service interval.

John Deere HD LITHIUM COMPLEX

Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease

NLGI Number 0

Maintenance—Machine

Grease OUT4001,00007D4 -19-11APR17-1/1

3-1-15

061517

PN=144

Maintenance—Machine

Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners)

• Coolant concentrate meeting ASTM D6210

Preferred Coolants

requirements in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with quality water

The following pre-mix engine coolants are preferred:

• John Deere COOL-GARD™II • John Deere COOL-GARD II PG COOL-GARD II pre-mix coolant is available in several concentrations with different freeze protection limits as shown in the following table. COOL-GARD II pre-mix

Freeze Protection Limit

COOL-GARD II 20/80

-9 °C (16 °F)

COOL-GARD II 30/70

-16 °C (3 °F)

COOL-GARD II 50/50

-37 °C (-34 °F)

COOL-GARD II 55/45

-45 °C (-49 °F)

COOL-GARD II PG 60/40

-49 °C (-56 °F)

COOL-GARD II 60/40

-52 °C (-62 °F)

If coolant meeting one of these specifications is unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or pre-mix coolant that has a minimum of the following chemical and physical properties:

• Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet study run at or above 60% load capacity • Is formulated with a nitrite-free additive package • Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion

Water Quality

Not all COOL-GARD II pre-mix products are available in all countries.

Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.

Use COOL-GARD II PG when a non-toxic coolant formulation is required.

Coolant Drain Intervals

Additional Recommended Coolants

Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the coolant used.

The following engine coolant is also recommended:

• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40—60%

When COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II PG is used, the drain interval is 6 years or 6000 hours of operation.

IMPORTANT: When mixing coolant concentrate with water, do not use less than 40% or greater than 60% concentration of coolant. Less than 40% gives inadequate additives for corrosion protection. Greater than 60% can result in coolant gelation and cooling system problems.

If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to 2 years or 2000 hours of operation.

mixture of concentrate with quality water.

Other Coolants Other ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants may be used if they meet the following specification:

IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing additives or antifreeze that contains sealing additives. Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base coolants. Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.

• Pre-mix coolant meeting ASTM D6210 requirements COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company DX,COOL3 -19-15MAY13-1/1

3-1-16

061517

PN=145

Maintenance—Machine

Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant Concentrate Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol (PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality water. Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate. All water used in the cooling system should meet the following minimum specifications for quality:

Freeze Protection The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit. Ethylene Glycol

Freeze Protection Limit

40%

-24 °C (-12 °F)

50%

-37 °C (-34 °F)

60%

-52 °C (-62 °F)

Propylene Glycol

Freeze Protection Limit

40%

-21 °C (-6 °F)

Chlorides

<40 mg/L

50%

-33 °C (-27 °F)

Sulfates

<100 mg/L

60%

-49 °C (-56 °F)

Total solids

<340 mg/L

Total dissolved I hardness

<170 mg/L

5.5—9.0

DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60% ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.

IMPORTANT: Do not use bottled drinking water because it often contains higher concentrations of total dissolved solids. DX,COOL19 -19-15MAY13-1/1

Operating in Warm Temperature Climates John Deere engines are designed to operate using recommended engine coolants. Always use a recommended engine coolant, even when operating in geographical areas where freeze protection is not required. IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in emergency situations only.

Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron corrosion, scaling, and cavitation occur when water is used as the coolant, even when coolant conditioners are added. Drain cooling system and refill with recommended engine coolant as soon as possible. DX,COOL6 -19-15MAY13-1/1

3-1-17

061517

PN=146

Maintenance—Machine

Testing Coolant Freeze Point

TS1732 —UN—04SEP13

The use of a handheld coolant refractometer is the quickest, easiest, and most accurate method to determine coolant freeze point. This method is more accurate than a test strip or a float-type hydrometer which can produce poor results. A coolant refractometer is available through your John Deere dealer under the SERVICEGARD™ tool program. Part number 75240 provides an economical solution to accurate freeze point determination in the field. To use this tool: 1. Allow cooling system to cool to ambient temperatures.

SERVICEGARD™ Part Number 75240

2. Open radiator cap to expose coolant. 3. With the included dropper, collect a small coolant sample. 4. Open the lid of the refractometer, place one drop of coolant on the window and close the lid. 5. Look through the eyepiece and focus as necessary.

TS1733 —UN—04SEP13

6. Record the listed freeze point for the type of coolant (ethylene glycol coolant or propylene glycol) being tested.

Image with a Drop of 50/50 Coolant Placed on the Refractometer Window SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company DX,COOL,TEST -19-13JUN13-1/1

Disposing of Coolant Improperly disposing of engine coolant can threaten the environment and ecology.

TS1133 —UN—15APR13

Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers that may mislead someone into drinking from them. Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source. Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste from a local environmental or recycling center, or from an authorized John Deere dealer.

Recycle Waste OUT4001,0000685 -19-07JUL15-1/1

3-1-18

061517

PN=147

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance Service Machine at Specified Intervals

TX1155915A —UN—10MAR14

Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart (1) and on the following pages. Perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily. 1— Periodic Maintenance Chart Periodic Maintenance Chart KR46761,0000BCE -19-07MAR14-1/1

Check the Hour Meter Regularly NOTE: Hour meter display is located in the upper right corner of the monitor. TX1160747A —UN—15MAY14

Hour meter (1) displays total machine operation hours. Use the hour meter to determine when machine needs periodic maintenance. Turn key to the ON position to view the default screen and the hour meter. Intervals on the periodic maintenance chart are for operating in normal conditions. If operating the machine in severe conditions, machine should be serviced at shorter intervals.

Hour Meter 1— Hour Meter KR46761,0000BCF -19-24JUN15-1/1

3-2-1

061517

PN=148

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Prepare Machine for Maintenance

T6811AI —UN—18OCT88

Before performing maintenance procedures in the following chapters and before leaving operator's seat, park machine as described below unless another position is specified in the procedure. 1. Park machine on a level surface as shown. 2. Lower equipment to the ground. 3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position. IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shut down engine is not done properly.

Machine Position

4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position without load for 2 minutes. 5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position. 6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key from switch. 7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position.

TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. After turning key switch to OFF position, only turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position when indicator light no longer illuminates. 8. Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.) 3— Key Switch 4— Pilot Shutoff Lever

Switch Panel

TX1087013A —UN—18JAN11

1— Auto-Idle Switch 2— Engine Speed Dial

Pilot Shutoff Lever KR46761,0000C05 -19-19APR16-1/1

3-2-2

061517

PN=149

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Open Access Doors for Service CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from door closing. Secure door in the OPEN position. In order to open left front door (4), left rear door (5) must be opened. In order to open right front door (6), right rear door (7) must be opened.

5— Left Rear Door 6— Right Front Door 7— Right Rear Door

Access Doors

T214860A —UN—04OCT05

1— Rod 2— Stored Position 3— Tab 4— Left Front Door

TX1156412 —UN—24MAR14

To hold doors open, remove rod (1) from stored position (2) and insert in tab (3).

Access Door Hold KR46761,0000C04 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-2-3

061517

PN=150

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Open Engine Cover for Service

TX1213750 —UN—05APR16

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from cover closing. Ensure cover is secured in the open position. NOTE: There is an optional engine cover light (4) under the engine cover for the operator’s convenience. 1. Release latches (1). 2. Pull open latches to unlock engine cover. 3. Raise the cover until the end of the bar (2) is securely locked into catch (3). 3— Catch 4— Engine Cover Light (if equipped)

TX1213773 —UN—05APR16

1— Latch (2 used) 2— Bar

Engine Cover (closed position)

Engine Cover (open position) KR46761,0000BD0 -19-07APR16-1/1

Fuel Tank CAUTION: Fuel is flammable and may ignite if spilled on hot engine. To prevent injury, handle fuel carefully. If engine is hot or running, DO NOT fill the fuel tank. DO NOT smoke while filling fuel tank or working on fuel system.

IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine has run out of fuel, engine will not start. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer for instructions. To avoid condensation, fill the fuel tank at the end of each work day. Shut off engine before filling. KR46761,0000F5B -19-18AUG15-1/1

3-2-4

061517

PN=151

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Hydraulic Breaker and Crusher Attachments

Hydraulic breaker or crusher operation subjects the machine’s hydraulic system to possible contamination and accelerated deterioration. The hydraulic return filter and hydraulic oil must be replaced more often to prevent damage to hydraulic pumps and other hydraulic components. Change the hydraulic return filter and oil at the intervals recommended below based on the amount of machine operating time the attachment is used.

IMPORTANT: Avoid mixing different brands or types of oils. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to meet certain specifications and performance requirements. Mixing different oil types can degrade lubricant and machine performance. This excavator is factory filled with Super EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing this excavator with products that do not meet this specification. If oils have been mixed or if alternate service oils are desired, the complete hydraulic system needs to be totally flushed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE: John Deere recommends the addition of the hydraulic filter restriction indicator kit with the attachment.

Percentage of Operating Time

Hydraulic Return Filter

Hydraulic Oil

Breaker or Crusher Used

Change Interval (hours)

100

600

150

800

200

1000

300

1300 VD76477,00001DB -19-11JUN07-1/1

Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant Test Kit are John Deere fluid sampling products to help you monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The objective of a fluid sampling program is to ensure machine availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by identifying potential problems before they become critical. Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples should be taken from each system on a periodic basis, before a filter or fluid change interval. Certain systems require more frequent sampling. Consult your authorized John Deere dealer on a maintenance program for your specific application. Your authorized John Deere dealer has the sampling products and expertise to assist you in lowering your overall operating costs through fluid sampling.

TX1003513A —UN—20FEB06

Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way Coolant Test Kit

TX,ANALYSIS -19-20JAN11-1/1

3-2-5

061517

PN=152

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Service Intervals Model:

PIN/Serial Number:

Hour Meter Reading: SERVICE INTERVALS Service your machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily. FLUID SAMPLING Fluid samples should be taken from each system at its recommended change interval prior to actually draining the fluid. Regular oil sampling will extend the operational life of your machine. As Required □ Remove and clean fuel tank inlet screen

□ Check and adjust track sag

□ Check windshield washer fluid level

□ Clean rear camera lens—if equipped

□ Check and clean air cleaner dust unloader valve

□ Service exhaust filter Every 10 Hours or Daily

□ Check hydraulic tank oil level

□ Check engine oil level

□ Check engine coolant level

□ Lubricate hydraulic coupler—if equipped Every 50 Hours or Weekly

□ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank sump

□ Drain primary fuel filter and water separator

□ Drain auxiliary fuel filter and water separator—if equipped

□ Lubricate working tool pivots Every 100 Hours

□ Inspect and re-torque track hardware Every 250 Hours □ Check swing gear case oil level

□ Check travel gear case oil level

□ Check pump drive gear case oil level

□ Drain water and sediment from hydraulic tank

□ Check battery electrolyte level and terminals

□ Take engine oil sample

□ Lubricate front end pin joints Every 500 Hours □ Lubricate swing bearing gear

□ Take diesel fuel sample

□ Lubricate swing bearing

□ Take swing gear case oil sample

□ Replace final fuel filter

□ Take hydraulic oil sample

□ Replace primary fuel filter and water separator

□ Take engine coolant sample

□ Replace auxiliary fuel filter and water separator—if equipped

□ Take travel gear case oil sample

□ Drain and refill engine oil and replace filter

□ Take pump drive gear case oil sample

□ Clean cab fresh air and cab recirculating air filters (replace every 6 cleanings)

□ Check air intake hoses

Every 1000 Hours □ Drain and refill swing gear case oil

□ Inspect serpentine belt

□ Replace hydraulic tank oil filter

□ Replace air cleaner elements

□ Replace pilot oil filter

□ Replace air cleaner dust unloader valve

□ Drain and refill pump drive gear case oil

□ Check coolant condition

□ Remove and clean open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose Every 2000 Hours □ Check and adjust engine valve lash

□ Drain and refill travel gear case oil

□ Replace diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) header suction screen (S.N. —811697)

□ Clean diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank (S.N. —811697)

□ Changing diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) dosing unit filter

Continued on next page

3-2-6

JL58967,00006C9 -19-17NOV16-1/2

061517

PN=153

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance Every 4000 Hours □ Replace diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank breather filter

□ Inspect diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) baffle (S.N. 811698— )

□ Clean diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank (S.N. 811698— )

□ Replace diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) header suction filter (S.N. 811698— ) Every 5000 Hours

□ Drain and refill hydraulic tank oil

□ Replace hydraulic tank vent cap filter Every 6000 Hours

□ Drain, flush, and refill engine cooling system JL58967,00006C9 -19-17NOV16-2/2

3-2-7

061517

PN=154

Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance

Required Parts REQUIRED PARTS Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine John Deere parts. Verify part numbers are current and that any associated parts are also on hand, i.e., filter O-rings. Every 500 Hours

Every 1000 Hours

Every 2000 Hours

Every 4000 Hours

Every 5000 Hours

Every 6000 Hours

Engine Oil Filter

Primary Fuel Filter Element

Final Fuel Filter

Auxiliary Fuel Filter Element—If Equipped

Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter Element

Pilot Oil Filter

Primary Air Filter Element

Secondary Air Filter Element

Dust Unloader Valve

Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Screen (S.N. —811697)

Description

Every 250 Hours

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Filter (S.N. 811698— )

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Breather Filter

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter

Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter Element

Diesel Particulate Filter (component of exhaust filter)

As Required

Cab Fresh Air Filter

As Required

Cab Recirculating Air Filter

As Required

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Baffle (S.N. 811698— )

As Required

John Deere Plus-50™ II Engine Oil1

27.0 L (7.1 gal)

API GL-5 Gear Oil1

28.1 L (7.4 gal)

11.8 L (3.1 gal)

28.8 L (7.6 gal)

11.8 L (3.1 gal)

28.8 L (7.6 gal)

193.0 L (51.0 gal)

Hitachi SUPER EX 46HN Hydraulic Oil1

39.7 L (10.5 gal)

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix Fluid Analysis Kits2 1

Hydraulic Oil

Travel Gear Case Oil

Swing Gear Case Oil

Pump Drive Gear Case Oil

Diesel Fuel

Engine Coolant

Diesel Engine Oil

For recommended oil viscosities based on operating temperatures, see Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.) 2 Based on fluid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for operating conditions. See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company JL58967,0000703 -19-17NOV16-1/1

3-2-8

061517

PN=155

Maintenance—As Required Remove and Clean Fuel Tank Inlet Screen Clean fuel tank inlet screen (1) using solvent or diesel fuel to remove any debris. T135186 —UN—06NOV00

Replace screen if damaged. 1— Fuel Tank Inlet Screen

Fuel Tank Inlet Screen ER79617,0000A84 -19-07APR16-1/1

Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level 1. On left side of machine, open front service door to access windshield washer fluid bottle (1). TX1155920 —UN—10MAR14

NOTE: During winter season, use all-season windshield washer fluid which will not freeze. 2. Check fluid level in windshield washer fluid bottle and refill as required. 3. Close service door. 1— Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle

Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle KR46761,0000BD1 -19-18MAR14-1/1

Check and Clean Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve TX1156458A —UN—18MAR14

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. A missing, damaged, or hardened air cleaner dust unloader valve (1) will make the dust cup precleaner ineffective, causing very short element life. Valve should suck closed when engine is running. NOTE: If operating in high dust conditions, squeeze dust valve every 2 hours of operation to release dust. 1. On left side of machine, open front service door to access air cleaner dust unloader valve (1). 2. Squeeze air cleaner dust unloader valve to remove dust from the air cleaner.

Dust Unloader Valve 1— Dust Unloader Valve

3. Check condition of dust unloader valve. Replace if hardened or damaged. 4. Close service door. KR46761,0000BD2 -19-02MAY14-1/1

3-3-1

061517

PN=156

Maintenance—As Required

Check and Adjust Track Sag Check Track Sag T121723 —UN—10JUN99

1. Swing upperstructure 90°, and lower bucket to raise track off ground. 2. Keep the angle (1) between boom and arm 90—110°, and position the bucket’s round side on the ground. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Place blocks under machine frame to support machine while measuring track sag.

Machine Position

3. Place blocks under machine frame to support machine.

TX1103806 —UN—16DEC11

4. Rotate track forward two full rotations and then in reverse two full rotations. 5. Measure distance (2) at middle track roller from bottom of track frame to top surface of track shoe. Specification Track—Sag...................................................................340.0—380.0 mm 13.4—15.0 in. 1— Boom-To-Arm Angle

2— Distance

Track Sag Measurement KR46761,0000BCD -19-03FEB15-1/2

Adjust Track Sag

T135187 —UN—06NOV00

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to track components. DO NOT use the grease fitting on the track adjusting cylinder for lubrication. Use this fitting ONLY for track adjustment. 1. To tighten track, connect a grease gun to grease fitting (1) (located through access hole (4) in track frame.) Add grease until sag is within recommended limits. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from high pressure grease. DO NOT remove grease fitting (1) from nut (2).

Grease Fitting

2. To loosen, slowly turn nut (2) counterclockwise; grease will escape through the bleed hole (3).

T135188 —UN—06NOV00

3. When amount of track sag is satisfactory, turn nut clockwise to tighten. Specification Nut—Torque...............................................................................69.0 N·m 50.9 lb.-ft. 1— Grease Fitting 2— Nut

3— Bleed Hole 4— Access Hole Access Hole

KR46761,0000BCD -19-03FEB15-2/2

3-3-2

061517

PN=157

Maintenance—As Required

Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped

TX1086324A —UN—28DEC10

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. DO NOT climb on machine when inspecting or cleaning rear camera lens. NOTE: The camera lens surface is a resin product. Lightly wipe the surface with a wet, clean cloth. Never use an organic solvent. Inspect camera lens (1) for any accumulation of dirt, mud, snow, ice, or debris. Rear Camera

Clean lens as necessary. 1— Camera Lens

ER79617,0000D75 -19-27JUL15-1/1

Service Exhaust Filter

The exhaust filter (1) is designed to retain residual ash, which is a noncombustible result of additives used in crankcase lubrication oils and the fuel. As ash levels rise, the capacity for soot storage is reduced. Engine performance can be reduced due to increased exhaust system back pressure. The residual ash must be removed from the filter. Ash removal is performed by removing the exhaust filter from machine and having it cleaned by specialized equipment or replacing the exhaust filter. Do NOT attempt to remove exhaust filter from machine. Contact your authorized dealer to remove exhaust filter for ash removal or replacement.

TX1156071 —UN—14MAR14

CAUTION: Under federal, state, and/or local laws or regulations, exhaust filter ash may be classified as a hazardous waste. Hazardous waste must be disposed of in accordance with all applicable federal, state and local laws or regulations governing hazardous waste disposal. Only a qualified service provider should remove ash from the exhaust filter. See your authorized dealer for exhaust filter ash handling and disposal.

Exhaust Filter 1— Exhaust Filter

Failure to follow the approved ash removal methods may violate U.S. federal, state and local hazardous waste laws, along with damage to the exhaust filter resulting in potential denial of the emissions warranty. KR46761,0000BF3 -19-14MAR14-1/1

3-3-3

061517

PN=158

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily Check Engine Oil Level IMPORTANT: Prevent engine damage. Do not run engine when oil level is below the ADD mark. TX1156041A —UN—13MAR14

The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when the engine is cold before starting the engine for the day's operation. 1. Park machine on a level surface. 2. Shut off engine and allow oil to drain into oil pan for 10 minutes. 3. Open engine cover to access engine.

Engine Oil Dipstick and Filler Cap

4. Make sure dipstick (1) is fully seated. 5. Remove dipstick to check oil level.

3 ADD

T216546 —UN—29NOV05

BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: The engine is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area (3). It is acceptable to run the engine when the oil level is above the ADD mark.

FULL

AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow the oil to drain into the oil pan for 10 minutes before checking the oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown the engine oil level must be above the ADD mark. IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. Make sure that area around and above engine oil filler cap is clean and clear of debris before removing cap.

Cross-Hatch Area 1— Dipstick 2— Filler Cap

6. If necessary, remove filler cap (2) to add oil. 7. If oil level is below ADD mark, add oil as necessary. See Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV. (Section 3-1.)

3— Cross-Hatch Area

8. Install dipstick and close engine cover. KR46761,0000BD3 -19-29APR14-1/1

3-4-1

061517

PN=159

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

Check Engine Coolant Level

TS281 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely. IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Mixing different coolant types can degrade coolant and machine performance. Avoid mixing different brands or types of coolant. Coolant manufacturers engineer their coolants to meet certain specifications and performance requirements.

Service Cooling System Safely

1. Open engine cover and check coolant level in surge tank (1). TX1156042A —UN—13MAR14

2. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks on surge tank. 3. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to surge tank. See Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners). (Section 3-1.) 4. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks in tank, hoses, and radiator. Repair as required, then refill with coolant. Surge Tank

5. Close engine cover. 1— Surge Tank

KR46761,0000BC9 -19-10MAR14-1/1

3-4-2

061517

PN=160

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

TS281 —UN—15APR13

T6811AI —UN—18OCT88

Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level

Machine Position

Pressurized Fluids

IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system components. DO NOT run engine without oil in hydraulic tank. Avoid machine damage. Mixing different oil types can degrade lubricant and machine performance. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to meet certain specifications and performance requirements.

TX1155953A —UN—19MAR14

Avoid machine damage. This excavator is factory filled with Super EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing this excavator with products that do not meet this specification. If oils have been mixed or if alternate service oils are desired, the complete hydraulic system needs to be totally flushed by an authorized dealer. 1. Park machine on a level surface, and position machine with arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended. Hydraulic Oil Level Gauge

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly.

TX1155954A —UN—18MAR14

2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. 4. On right side of machine, open front service door to check hydraulic oil level gauge (1) on hydraulic tank. Oil must be between marks on window. If necessary, add oil. To add oil:

Hydraulic Tank Cover

CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure by pushing pressure release button.

1— Hydraulic Oil Level Gauge 2— Pressure Release Button

a. Push pressure release button (2).

3— Cap Screw (6 used) 4— Hydraulic Tank Cover

b. Remove cap screws (3). Continued on next page

3-4-3

KR46761,0000BD4 -19-29APR14-1/2

061517

PN=161

Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily

c. Remove hydraulic tank cover (4).

e. Install cover and cap screws.

d. Add oil.

5. Close service door. KR46761,0000BD4 -19-29APR14-2/2

Lubricate Hydraulic Coupler—If Equipped NOTE: Cylinders that are supplied without grease zerks DO NOT need to be lubricated. TX1017854A —UN—22JAN07

To keep hydraulic coupler in proper working condition, hydraulic coupler must be lubricated on a daily basis. Most hydraulic couplers are supplied with a cylinder grease zerk (1) located on the head end of the cylinder or cylinder barrel, a lock arm grease zerk (2), and a grease zerk on each side of the hydraulic coupler for the locking wedge. Apply grease to fittings until grease escapes from joints. See Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease. (Section 3-1.)

Lubrication Points 1— Cylinder Grease Zerk

2— Lock Arm Grease Zerk VD76477,0001376 -19-21DEC15-1/1

3-4-4

061517

PN=162

Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel Tank Sump 1. Park machine on a level surface. Rotate upperstructure 90° for easier access. T6811AJ —UN—18OCT88

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. Machine Position

4. Remove fuel tank fill cap. 5. Open right front service door to access the drain valve (1) for the fuel tank. TX1155921A —UN—18MAR14

NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. 6. Open drain valve for several seconds to drain water and sediment into a container. Dispose of waste properly. Close drain valve. 7. Close service door and install fuel tank fill cap. 1— Drain Valve

Drain Valve KR46761,0000BF9 -19-19MAR14-1/1

Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator 1. Open right front service door to access primary fuel filter and water separator (1). NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. 2. Open drain valve (2) to extract water from fuel system. Drain fluid until water and sediment is removed. Collect waste in a container and dispose of waste properly. 3. Close drain valve. TX1156128A —UN—11MAR14

4. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.) 5. Close service door. 1— Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator

2— Drain Valve

Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator KR46761,0000BDF -19-28APR14-1/1

3-5-1

061517

PN=163

Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly

Drain Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator—If Equipped 1. Open right front service door to access auxiliary fuel filter and water separator (1). NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. 2. Open drain valve (3) on bottom of water separator bowl (2) to extract water from fuel system. Drain until water and sediment is removed. Collect waste in a container and dispose of waste properly.

1— Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator 2— Water Separator Bowl

TX1156132A —UN—11MAR14

3. Close drain valve and service door. 3— Drain Valve

Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator KR46761,0000BE0 -19-28APR14-1/1

Lubricate Working Tool Pivots

TX1000687 —UN—23NOV05

Lubricate working tool pivots (4 points) until grease escapes from joints. Lubricate every 4 hours for first 20 hours, then every 50 hours thereafter.

Four Points JL58967,00006D5 -19-05OCT16-1/1

3-5-2

061517

PN=164

Maintenance—Every 100 Hours Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware

TX1176204 —UN—10NOV14

Each inspection and re-torquing should be documented by completing a service report for each unit, placing a copy of this report in the machine file, and forwarding a copy to the manufacturer’s attention. For shoes with missing or loose cap screws and nuts, remove shoes and clean the mating surface of shoes and links before replacing cap screws and nuts. The cap screws must be replaced because they have been stretched to yield previously. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Operating a machine with loose shoes can cause the cap screws and holes in the shoes and links to wear, making it difficult to keep the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also cause hardware malfunction and loss of shoes. Improper track shoe cap screw torque will result in serious damage to the undercarriage components, shorter life expectancy, and will void the manufacturer's warranty on the undercarriage components.

Cap Screw Torque Sequence

3. Re-torque cap screws in sequence to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Final Torque............................................................ 407 N·m + 1/3 Turn (120°) 300 lb·ft + 1/3 Turn (120°)

Torquing Replacement Track Shoe Hardware IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt, paint, and debris before installation.

Checking Track Shoe Hardware Torque 1. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Torque..................................................................1556 N·m 1148 lb·ft

2. Cap screws that have turned have reduced tightness and need to be re-torqued. 3. Check track shoe holes for wear or damage. Replace as necessary. Re-Torquing Track Shoe Hardware

1. Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt or paint. 2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Initial Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m 100 lb·ft

3. Torque cap screws in sequence to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Final Torque............................................................ 407 N·m + 1/3 Turn (120°) 300 lb·ft + 1/3 Turn (120°)

1. Loosen cap screw. 2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Initial Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m 100 lb·ft

KR46761,00009A8 -19-15FEB16-1/1

3-6-1

061517

PN=165

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level 1. Park machine on a level surface. TX1156407A —UN—17MAR14

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. 4. Remove dipstick (1). Wipe dipstick clean and replace completely into tube.

Swing Gear Case

5. Remove dipstick. Oil must be in the cross-hatch area (3) on the dipstick. 6. If oil is needed, remove filler cap (2) and add oil. See Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)

ADD

T216546 —UN—29NOV05

7. Check oil level.

3 FULL

8. Install filler cap. 1— Dipstick 2— Filler Cap

3— Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area

Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area KR46761,0000BF6 -19-20JUN16-1/1

3-7-1

061517

PN=166

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Drain Water and Sediment From Hydraulic Tank 1. Park machine on a level surface.

TS281 —UN—15APR13

2. Stop engine. CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Relieve pressure by pushing the pressure release button (1). 3. Push the pressure release button (1) to relieve pressure.

Pressurized Fluids

4. Remove cap screws (3). 5. Remove hydraulic tank oil cover (2). TX1156135A —UN—18MAR14

NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. 6. After oil is cool, loosen drain valve cap screw (4) for several seconds to drain water and sediment into a container. Do not remove cap screw completely. Dispose of waste properly. 7. Tighten drain valve cap screw.

Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover

8. Check hydraulic oil level. See Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level. (Section 3-4.) 9. Install hydraulic tank oil cover and cap screws. 3— Cap Screw (4 used) 4— Drain Valve Cap Screw

TX1156142A —UN—12MAR14

1— Pressure Release Button 2— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover

Drain Valve Cap Screw KR46761,0000BE1 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-7-2

061517

PN=167

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level

TX1156205A —UN—31MAR14

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 1. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 2. Stop engine. 3. Open right rear service door to access pump drive gear case. 4. Remove dipstick (1).

Pump Drive Gear Case

5. Wipe dipstick clean and insert completely into tube. 6. Remove dipstick.

T145092 —UN—31AUG01

7. Oil level must be approximately halfway below the H mark. Insert dipstick. To add oil: a. Remove filler plug (2). b. Add oil. See Pump Drive Gear Case Oil. (Section 3-1.) c. Install filler plug. Dipstick

8. Close service door. 1— Dipstick

2— Filler Plug KR46761,0000BE8 -19-29APR14-1/1

3-7-3

061517

PN=168

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte level. NEVER check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer. ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and replace it last. Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into eyes. Avoid the hazard by:

TS203 —UN—23AUG88

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area. 2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves. 3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added. 4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte. 5. Use proper jump start procedure. If acid is spilled on skin: 1. Flush skin with water. 2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid. 3. Flush eyes with water for 15–30 minutes. 4. Get medical attention immediately.

Avoid Acid Burns

2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt). 3. Get medical attention immediately.

If acid is swallowed:

1. Remove battery box cover.

1. Do not induce vomiting.

Continued on next page

3-7-4

KR46761,0001096 -19-17MAY16-1/3

061517

PN=169

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

TX1208617 —UN—05JAN16

IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during freezing weather, batteries must be charged after water is added to prevent batteries from freezing. Charge battery using a battery charger or by running the engine. 2. Fill each cell to within specified range with distilled water. DO NOT overfill. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and replace it last. 3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp first. 3— Electrolyte Level Range

T137536 —UN—25JAN01

1— Battery Post 2— Fill Tube

Battery Terminal and Fill Hole

Fill Level KR46761,0001096 -19-17MAY16-2/3

4. Clean battery terminal (1) and clamps with a stiff brush. 5. Apply lubricating grease (2) around battery terminal base only.

1— Battery Terminal

T137537 —UN—25JAN01

6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last. 2— Lubricating Grease

Terminal and Grease KR46761,0001096 -19-17MAY16-3/3

3-7-5

061517

PN=170

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level 1. Park the machine on level ground, rotating travel gear case until positioned as shown. TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05

2. Stop engine. CAUTION: High-pressure release of oils from pressurized system can cause serious burns. Wait for travel gear case oil to cool. Keep body and face away from fill plug (1). Gradually loosen fill plug to release pressure. 3. After travel gear case has cooled, slowly loosen fill plug (1) to release air and relieve pressure. 4. Remove check plug (2). Oil must be to bottom of hole. 5. If necessary, remove fill plug and add oil until oil flows out of check plug hole. See Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.) 6. Wrap threads of plugs with sealing-type tape. Install plugs. Tighten plugs to specification.

Travel Gear Case Oil Level 1— Fill Plug 2— Check Plug

3— Drain Plug

7. Check second travel gear case oil level.

Specification Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m 37 lb·ft DB84312,0000147 -19-31JAN17-1/1

Take Engine Oil Sample See an authorized John Deere dealer for procedures and sampling equipment. For more information, see Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped. (Section 4-1.) CN93077,000041E -19-26JAN16-1/1

3-7-6

061517

PN=171

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours

Lubricate Front End Pin Joints hours of operation, then every 250 hours thereafter. Lubricate daily when working in mud and water.

T134954 —UN—01NOV00

T136448 —UN—18DEC00

Lubricate front end pin joints (20 points) until grease escapes from joints. Lubricate every 4 hours for first 20 hours. Lubricate every 10 hours during first 30—100

Nine Points

Five Points

T134957 —UN—01NOV00

T134956 —UN—01NOV00

Four Points

Two Points JL58967,00006D6 -19-05OCT16-1/1

3-7-7

061517

PN=172

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours Lubricate Swing Bearing

T134968 —UN—01NOV00

Swing Bearing

5. Lower bucket to the ground. 6. Repeat steps 2—4 three times. VD76477,0000395 -19-26AUG15-1/1

Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear

T136458 —UN—18DEC00

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement if controls are moved by another person. Lubricating swing bearing and rotating the upperstructure must be done by one person. Before lubricating swing bearing gear, clear the area of all persons. 1. Remove swing bearing gear access cover (1). 2. Grease must be 13—25 mm (0.5—1 in) deep, measured from the bottom of the ring gear. The grease must also be free of contamination by dirt and water. If the grease is contaminated, remove grease and replace with clean grease. NOTE: If water or mud is found in swing gear area, see Operating in Water and Mud. (Section 2-3.) 3. Add grease as required (approximately 0.5 kg [1.1 lb] every 90°). See Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease. (Section 3-1.)

Access Cover 1— Access Cover

4. Remove any excess grease from over the top of the swing drive pinion. 5. Install access cover.

IMPORTANT: Excessive grease can damage the swing gear case seal. ER79617,0000DE4 -19-07APR16-1/1

3-8-1

061517

PN=173

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator 1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position. 2. Open right front service door to access primary fuel filter and water separator. 3. Thoroughly clean exterior of primary fuel filter assembly and surrounding area. NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. TX1156182A —UN—12MAR14

4. Loosen drain valve (1) to relieve pressure and drain water and contaminants from water separator bowl (3) into a suitable container. Dispose of waste properly. Close drain valve. 5. Disconnect the water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor wiring (2). NOTE: Additional fuel will remain in the primary fuel filter housing. 6. Rotate primary fuel filter counterclockwise and remove from mounting base. Remove water separator bowl from primary fuel filter. Dispose of used fuel filter properly.

Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator 1— Drain Valve 2— Water-in-Fuel (WIF) Sensor Wiring

3— Water Separator Bowl

7. Clean filter mounting base. 8. Clean and dry water separator bowl. Replace if necessary. 9. Install water separator bowl to new primary fuel filter.

10. Install new primary fuel filter onto mounting base. Rotate filter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten 1/2—3/4 turn after seal contacts mounting base. 11. Connect WIF sensor wiring.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system components.

12. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel before installing.

13. Close service door. KR46761,0000BE4 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-8-2

061517

PN=174

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Replace Final Fuel Filter NOTE: Do not clean fuel tank inlet screen and change fuel filter at the same time. Clean fuel tank inlet screen and run engine before changing fuel filter. 1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position. 2. Open right front service door to access final fuel filter (1). 3. Thoroughly clean exterior of final fuel filter and surrounding area. TX1156169A —UN—12MAR14

NOTE: Some fuel will be present in final fuel filter housing. 4. Remove final fuel filter using a filter wrench. Dispose of used filter properly. 5. Clean filter mounting base (2). IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system components. Final Fuel Filter

Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel before installing.

1— Final Fuel Filter

6. Install new final fuel filter onto mounting base. Rotate filter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten one turn after seal contacts mounting base.

2— Mounting Base

8. Close service door.

7. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.) KR46761,0000BE2 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-8-3

061517

PN=175

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Replace Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator—If Equipped 1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position. 2. Open right front service door to access auxiliary fuel filter and water separator (1). 3. Thoroughly clean exterior of auxiliary fuel filter and water separator assembly and surrounding area. NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly. TX1156132A —UN—11MAR14

4. Loosen drain valve (3) to relieve pressure and drain contaminants from water separator bowl (2). Dispose of waste properly. Close drain valve. 5. Rotate auxiliary fuel filter counterclockwise and remove from mounting base. Remove water separator bowl from auxiliary fuel filter. Dispose used fuel filter properly. 6. Clean filter mounting base.

Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator

7. Clean and dry water separator bowl. Replace if necessary. 8. Install water separator bowl to new auxiliary fuel filter. IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system components.

1— Auxiliary Fuel Filter and Water Separator 2— Water Separator Bowl

3— Drain Valve

11. Operate engine and check for leaks.

Only lubricate filter seal with diesel fuel before installing.

12. Tighten filter element and bowl only enough to stop leaks.

9. Install new auxiliary fuel filter onto mounting base. Rotate filter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten 1/2—3/4 turn after seal contacts mounting base.

13. Close service door.

10. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.) KR46761,0000BE3 -19-28APR14-1/1

Check Air Intake Hoses 1. Check air intake hoses (1) for cracks. Replace as necessary. TX1156305A —UN—14MAR14

2. Check for loose connections and tighten clamps as necessary. 1— Air Intake Hose

Air Intake Hose KR46761,0000BF1 -19-14MAR14-1/1

3-8-4

061517

PN=176

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Drain and Refill Engine Oil and Replace Filter

TX1156183A —UN—31MAR14

IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. Make sure that area around and above engine oil filler cap is clean and clear of debris before removing cap. 1. Park machine on a level surface. IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.

Engine Oil Filter

3. Stop engine.

TX1156041A —UN—13MAR14

4. Remove middle access cover under the machine. Open drain valve on side of engine oil pan. Allow oil to drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly. 5. Close drain valve and install access cover. 6. Open right rear service door to access engine oil filter (3). 7. Turn engine oil filter counterclockwise to remove. Clean mounting surface on base. 8. Apply thin film of oil to rubber gasket of new filter. Engine Oil Dipstick and Filler Cap

9. Install new filter. Turn filter clockwise by hand until gasket touches mounting surface. 1— Dipstick 2— Filler Cap

10. Tighten filter 1/2—3/4 turn more.

3— Engine Oil Filter

11. Open engine cover. 12. Remove filler cap (2) and fill engine with oil. For specific engine oil, see Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, and Stage IV. (Section 3-1.) Specification Engine Oil With Filter—Capacity.............................................................................. 27.0 L 7.1 gal.

14. Start engine. 15. Stop engine, remove dipstick (1) and check oil level. Engine is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area. 16. Check for any leakage at filter. Tighten filter just enough to stop leakage. 17. Close engine cover and service door.

13. Install filler cap. KR46761,0000BE5 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-8-5

061517

PN=177

Maintenance—Every 500 Hours

Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab Recirculating Air Filters Replace filters after the sixth cleaning. TX1087411A —UN—27JAN11

Removing Cab Fresh Air Filter: 1. Unlock cab side cover (1) on left side of machine with key to access fresh air filter (2). 2. Squeeze tab on each side of the filter to remove. Removing Cab Recirculating Air Filter: 1. Move operator's seat forward to access recirculating air filter (3) located under the rear deck.

Cab Side Cover

2. Squeeze tab (4) on right side of filter to remove. Cleaning Filters: TX1087400A —UN—27JAN11

1. Clean filters in one of two ways. CAUTION: Avoid injury from flying debris. Clear area of bystanders and wear personal protection equipment including eye protection. Reduce compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.06 bar) (28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.

• Use compressed air opposite to the normal air flow. • Wash filters with water. Soak the filters in warm,

Cab Fresh Air Filter

soapy water for 5 minutes. Flush filter. Allow filter to dry before installing.

2. Install filters.

1— Cab Side Cover 2— Fresh Air Filter

TX1013147A —UN—12OCT06

3. Secure cab side cover. 3— Recirculating Air Filter 4— Tab

Cab Recirculating Air Filter CN93077,0000013 -19-29JAN15-1/1

Take Fluid Samples See an authorized John Deere dealer for procedures and sampling equipment. For more information, see Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped. (Section 4-1.)

• Engine Coolant • Hydraulic Oil • Swing Gear Case Oil • Pump Drive Gear Case Oil • Travel Gear Case Oil

• Diesel Fuel KR46761,0000E35 -19-04FEB16-1/1

3-8-6

061517

PN=178

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours Drain and Refill Swing Gear Case Oil 1. Park machine on a level surface. TX1156407A —UN—17MAR14

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. 4. Remove plug mounted on end of drain pipe to drain oil into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.

Swing Gear Case

5. Install plug. 6. Remove filler cap (2), and add oil. See Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.) Specification Swing Gear Case Oil—Capacity................................................................................. 11.8 L 3.1 gal

1— Dipstick

2— Filler Cap

7. Install filler cap. 8. Check oil level on dipstick (1). KR46761,0000BF7 -19-21JUN16-1/1

3-9-1

061517

PN=179

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter 1. Park machine on a level surface with arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended.

T6811AI —UN—18OCT88

2. Stop engine. CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank is pressurized. DO NOT remove hydraulic cap. Relieve pressure by pushing the pressure release button (7). 3. To release pressure, push the pressure release button (7).

Machine Position

4. Hold down hydraulic oil filter cover (1) against light spring load when removing the last two cap screws. TX1156219A —UN—02APR14

5. Remove spring (3), valve (5), and filter element (4). 6. Remove and discard filter element and O-ring (6). NOTE: Remove element, and inspect for metal particles and debris in bottom of filter canister. Excessive amounts of brass and steel particles can indicate a hydraulic pump, motor, or valve malfunction, or a malfunction in process. A rubber type of material can indicate cylinder packing problem.

Hydraulic Tank Cover

7. Install filter element, valve, and spring. 8. Install hydraulic oil filter cover and tighten cap screws (2) to specification. Specification Cap Screw—Torque...................................................................50.0 N·m 36.9 lb.-ft. 5— Valve 6— O-Ring 7— Pressure Release Button

TX1087387 —UN—27JAN11

1— Hydraulic Oil Filter Cover 2— Cap Screw (6 used) 3— Spring 4— Filter Element

Hydraulic Filter Element KR46761,0000BE9 -19-03FEB15-1/1

3-9-2

061517

PN=180

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Pilot Oil Filter 1. Park machine on a level surface. TX1156220A —UN—14MAR14

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Relieve pressure by pushing the pressure release button (5).

Hydraulic Tank Cover

TX1156315A —UN—14MAR14

4. To relieve hydraulic pressure push the pressure release button (5). 5. Open right rear service door to access pilot oil filter (4). 6. Remove filter canister (1) from head cover by turning counterclockwise. 7. Clean head cover contact area. 8. Remove filter element (2) and O-ring (3).

Pilot Oil Filter

9. Install new O-ring and filter element. 10. Install filter canister clockwise by hand. Check for any leakage.

1— Filter Canister 2— Filter Element 3— O-Ring

T136461 —UN—19DEC00

11. Close service door. 4— Pilot Oil Filter 5— Pressure Release Button

Filter Canister KR46761,0000BEA -19-28APR14-1/1

3-9-3

061517

PN=181

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Inspect Serpentine Belt 1. Check belt (1) regularly for wear, especially for cracks at the bottom of grooves and for frayed edges. TX1156217 —UN—19MAR14

2. If necessary, replace belt. 3. Install a 1/2 in. drive socket wrench to the belt tension adjuster (2). Turn wrench to pull tension adjuster pulley away from belt, releasing belt tension. 4. Hold tension adjuster away from belt while removing old belt and installing new belt. 5. Slowly release wrench tension to allow tension adjuster to move against new belt. Tension is automatically adjusted.

Serpentine Belt 1— Belt 2— Belt Tension Adjuster 3— Alternator

6. Remove wrench.

4— Crankshaft Pulley 5— Idler Pulley (2 used) 6— A/C Compressor KR46761,0000BE6 -19-02MAR16-1/1

Drain and Refill Pump Drive Gear Case Oil 1. Park machine on a level surface. TX1156258A —UN—31MAR14

IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly. 2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes. 3. Stop engine. 4. Open right rear service door to access pump drive gear case.

Pump Drive Gear Case

5. Remove filler plug (2). NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly.

T145092 —UN—31AUG01

6. Remove drain plug (3). Allow oil to drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly. 7. Apply liquid pipe thread sealant to drain plug. Install plug. Specification Pump Drive Gear Case—Oil Capacity.......................................................................... 1.1 L 1.2 qt.

Dipstick

8. Add oil. See Pump Drive Gear Case Oil. (Section 3-1.) 9. Remove dipstick (1), and check oil level. Oil level must be approximately halfway below H mark.

1— Dipstick 2— Filler Plug

3— Drain Plug

10. Install filler plug. 12. Close service door.

11. Install dipstick.

KR46761,0000BED -19-30APR14-1/1

3-9-4

061517

PN=182

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Remove and Clean Open Crankcase Ventilation (OCV) Hose 1. Remove small rear access cover under the machine. 2. Remove the open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose (1).

TX1156469A —UN—18MAR14

IMPORTANT: Restrictions in the OCV hose can cause sludge to form in crankcase. This can lead to clogging of oil passages, filters, and screens, resulting in serious engine damage. Avoid engine damage by cleaning the OCV hose at shorter intervals if operating machine in dusty conditions. 3. Inspect OCV hose for dirt and debris. 4. Clean OCV hose with solvent and compressed air if restricted. 5. Install OCV hose and rear access cover. 1— Open Crankcase Ventilation (OCV) Hose

View Shown From Under Machine Looking Through Access Cover

KR46761,0000BFB -19-18MAR14-1/1

3-9-5

061517

PN=183

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Air Cleaner Elements 1. Open left front service door to access air cleaner. TX1156320A —UN—14MAR14

2. Release latch (1) to unlock cover. 3. Rotate cover counterclockwise, and remove cover. 4. Remove primary element (2). 5. Remove secondary element (3). 6. Clean the inside of the filter canister. 7. Install elements, making sure the secondary element is centered in canister.

Air Cleaner Cover Latch

8. Replace cover and secure latch. 9. Close service door. TX1156317A —UN—14MAR14

3— Secondary Element

Primary Air Cleaner Element

TX1156318A —UN—14MAR14

1— Latch 2— Primary Element

Secondary Air Cleaner Element KR46761,0000BF2 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-9-6

061517

PN=184

Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours

Replace Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve

TX1156458A —UN—18MAR14

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. A missing, damaged, or hardened air cleaner dust unloader valve (1) will make the dust cup precleaner ineffective, causing very short element life. Valve should suck closed when engine is running. 1. On left side of machine, open front service door to access dust unloader valve (1). 2. Twist and pull on dust unloader valve to remove dust unloader valve from the air cleaner cover. 3. Install new dust unloader valve on air cleaner cover. 4. Close service door.

Dust Unloader Valve 1— Dust Unloader Valve KR46761,0000BEF -19-02MAY14-1/1

Check Coolant Condition

TS281 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot, spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely. NOTE: Coolant should be checked every 1000 hours or 1 year, or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant using SERVICEGARD™ tool program. 1. Open engine cover to access surge tank.

Pressurized Fluids

2. Test engine coolant. See Testing Coolant Freeze Point. (Section 3-1.) 4. Close engine cover.

3. Install surge tank cap. SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

KR46761,0000BB7 -19-17APR17-1/1

3-9-7

061517

PN=185

Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter

TX1157414 —UN—09APR14

NOTE: Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) dosing unit filter is located on right front side of machine under steps. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure rotated 90° for easier access. To access diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) dosing unit filter, remove cap screws (1) and cover (2) located underneath machine. 1— Cap Screw (6 used)

2— Cover

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter Access KR46761,0000BC4 -19-18FEB15-1/1

Changing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter

IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface other than the storage tank, immediately clean the surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and can distort some plastic and rubber components. Spilled DEF, if left to dry or if only wiped away with a cloth, leaves a white residue. Improperly cleaned DEF spill can interfere with diagnosis of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system leakage problems. NOTE: Servicing DEF dosing unit filter may require removing additional covers or components. See Access DEF Dosing Unit for location information. 1. Remove DEF dosing unit filter cover (A). 2. Remove and discard DEF dosing unit filter equalizing element (B). 3. Insert “Black” end of DEF dosing unit filter tool (C) into DEF dosing unit filter (D) until CLICK is felt or heard indicating DEF dosing unit filter tool is fully engaged. NOTE: A tool such as a screwdriver can be inserted into DEF dosing unit filter tool slot to assist removal. 4. Pull DEF dosing unit filter tool and DEF dosing unit filter from DEF dosing unit. Discard DEF dosing unit filter and DEF dosing unit filter tool.

RG22534 —UN—21MAR13

DEF Dosing Unit Filter A—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Cover B—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Equalizing Element

C—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Tool D—DEF Dosing Unit Filter

5. Clean DEF dosing unit threads and mating surfaces with distilled water. 6. Lubricate new DEF filter O-rings with clean engine oil. Carefully insert DEF dosing unit filter into DEF dosing unit. 7. Install new DEF dosing unit filter equalizing element into DEF dosing unit filter. 8. Install DEF dosing unit filter cover and tighten to specifications. Specification DEF Dosing Unit Filter Cover—Torque..............................................................................23 N·m (204 lb.-in.)

DX,DEF,CHANGE,FILT -19-12JUL13-1/1

3-10-1

061517

PN=186

Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours

Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash See an authorized John Deere dealer for engine valve clearance adjustment. CED,OUO1032,2768 -19-30MAR17-1/1

Clean Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. —811697) See an authorized John Deere dealer. JL58967,00006D8 -19-17NOV16-1/1

Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Screen (S.N. —811697) See an authorized John Deere dealer. JL58967,00006D7 -19-17NOV16-1/1

Drain and Refill Travel Gear Case Oil 1. Park the machine on level ground, rotating travel gear case until positioned as shown. TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05

Travel Gear Case 1— Fill Plug 2— Check Plug

3— Drain Plug

5. Wrap threads of drain plug with a sealing-type tape. Install plug. Tighten plug to specification. Specification Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m 37 lb·ft

6. Remove fill plug and check plug (2). 7. Add oil until oil flows out of check plug hole. See Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)

Specification Travel Gear Case Oil—Capacity (each)........................................................................ 8.5 L 2.2 gal

8. Wrap threads of check plug and fill plug with sealing-type tape. Install plugs. Tighten plugs to specification. 9. Change oil of second travel gear case. DB84312,00000ED -19-08APR16-1/1

3-10-2

061517

PN=187

Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours

Cap Screws and Cover

TX1157610 —UN—09APR14

TX1157415 —UN—09APR14

Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Breather Filter

Cap Screws and Side Panel

Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank breather filter (1) is located behind toolbox on right side of machine. 1. Remove cap screws (2) and cover (3). TX1157611 —UN—09APR14

2. Open toolbox and remove cap screws (4) on side of toolbox. Remove side panel (5). 3. Remove cap screws (6) on bottom of toolbox. 4. Close toolbox. 5. Pull handle (7) to tilt toolbox forward to access diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank breather filter. 6. Loosen clamp.

Cap Screws

7. Remove diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank breather filter. 8. Install new diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank breather filter and tighten clamp. TX1157612 —UN—09APR14

5— Side Panel 6— Cap Screw (4 used) 7— Handle

Cap Screws

TX1157614 —UN—09APR14

1— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Breather Filter 2— Cap Screw (4 used) 3— Cover 4— Cap Screw (4 used)

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Breather Filter KR46761,0000BC3 -19-11APR14-1/1

3-11-1

061517

PN=188

Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours

Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Header Suction Filter (S.N. 811698— ) See an authorized John Deere dealer JL58967,00006D9 -19-17NOV16-1/1

Clean Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. 811698— ) See an authorized John Deere dealer. JL58967,00006DA -19-17NOV16-1/1

Inspect Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Baffle (S.N. 811698— ) See an authorized John Deere dealer. JL58967,00006DB -19-17NOV16-1/1

3-11-2

061517

PN=189

Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours Drain and Refill Hydraulic Tank Oil

TS281 —UN—15APR13

NOTE: Change original factory fill hydraulic oil after first 5000 hours. Change every 5000 hours thereafter if using Super EX 46HN, if using alternative oils see Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.) NOTE: Perform this service at the 5000 hour interval when operating in normal conditions. When operating with an attachment, drain and refill as necessary. CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from high pressure fluid. High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure by pushing pressure release button (5).

Pressurized Fluids

T6811AJ —UN—18OCT88

IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system components. DO NOT run engine without oil in the tank. Avoid mixing different brands or types of oils. Oil manufacturers engineer their oils to meet certain specifications and performance requirements. Mixing different oil types can degrade lubricant and machine performance. This excavator is factory filled with Super EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing this excavator with products that do not meet this specification. If oils have been mixed or if alternate service oils are desired, the complete hydraulic system needs to be totally flushed by an authorized dealer.

TX1156313A —UN—14MAR14

Machine Position

1. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure rotated 90° for easier access. 2. Position machine with arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended. IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged if procedure to shutdown engine is not done properly.

Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover 5— Pressure Release Button 6— Cap Screw (6 used)

3. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.

7— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover With Suction Screen

4. Stop engine. 5. To relieve pressure, press the pressure release button (5). 6. Remove cap screws (6).

Specification Hydraulic Tank—Oil Capacity....................................................................................... 193.0 L 51.0 gal.

7. Remove hydraulic tank oil cover with suction screen (7). Continued on next page

3-12-1

CN93077,0000252 -19-03FEB15-1/2

061517

PN=190

Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours

NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly.

TX1156142A —UN—12MAR14

8. Remove drain valve cap screw (4). Allow oil to drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly. 9. Clean inside of tank and suction screen. NOTE: The hydraulic tank oil filter and pilot oil filter can be changed at this point in the procedure. See Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours. (Section 3-9.) 10. Install suction screen with cover. Suction screen must seal against outlet pipe in bottom of tank. If necessary, loosen nut (2) to adjust rod length.

Drain Valve Cap Screw

11. Replace cap screw. IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic pump is not filled with oil, it will be damaged when the engine is started.

Specification Suction Screen Rod (1)—Length.............................................................................. 889.0 mm 35.0 in. Suction Screen Rod Nut—Torque...............................................................................17.0 N·m 150.5 lb.-in. Hydraulic Cover Cap Screw—Torque...........................................................................50.0 N·m 36.9 lb.-ft.

T135193 —UN—06NOV00

12. Add oil until it is between marks on sight glass.

Suction Screen

TX1156480 —UN—18MAR14

13. Remove air bleed plugs (3) from hydraulic pump until oil flows from bleed holes. 14. Install air bleed plugs in hydraulic pump. 15. Check oil level in sight glass. Add oil if necessary. Install and tighten tank cover. 16. Purge air from cylinders and swing motor by slowly cycling hydraulic functions. 1— Suction Screen Rod 2— Suction Screen Rod Nut

3— Bleed Plug (2 used) 4— Drain Valve Cap Screw

Bleed Plugs

CN93077,0000252 -19-03FEB15-2/2

3-12-2

061517

PN=191

Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours

TS281 —UN—15APR13

T6811AI —UN—18OCT88

Replace Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter

Pressurized Fluids

Machine Position

TX1156323A —UN—14MAR14

CAUTION: High pressure release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve by pushing pressure release button (1). To prevent possible burn injury from hot hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool before starting work. 1. Park machine on solid level surface as shown. Stop engine. 2. Push the pressure release button (1) on top of the hydraulic tank oil cover with suction screen (5).

Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover

3. Remove rubber pressure release button. 4. Remove cap screw under the pressure release button. 5. Remove hydraulic tank vent cap filter cover (2) by turning counterclockwise. 6. Remove vent cap filter (3). Install new filter. IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system components. Do not allow water or contaminants between cover and body (4).

TX1001448 —UN—16DEC05

7. Install filter cover until it comes in contact with the filter element. Then, further tighten the cover 1/4 turn. 8. Install cap screw and pressure release button. 1— Pressure Release Button 2— Hydraulic Tank Vent Cap Filter Cover 3— Vent Cap Filter

4— Body 5— Hydraulic Tank Oil Cover With Suction Screen

Hydraulic Tank Oil Vent Cap CN93077,0000255 -19-14MAR14-1/1

3-12-3

061517

PN=192

Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours Drain Cooling System

TS281 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely. 1. Check coolant hoses for cracks and leaks. Replace if necessary. 2. Tighten clamps. 3. Check radiator, charge air, and oil cooler for dirt, grease, leaks, and loose or broken mountings. Clean radiator, charge air, and oil cooler fins. See Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air Cooler, and Fuel Cooler. (Section 4-1.)

Pressurized Fluids

TX1156042A —UN—13MAR14

4. Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure. Specification Cooling System—Capacity.................................................................................................... 39.7 L 10.5 gal.

5. Remove cover from underside of machine to access radiator drain valve (2). NOTE: Drain waste into a container. Dispose of waste properly.

Surge Tank Cap

TX1156275 —UN—16APR14

6. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose of waste coolant properly. 7. Close radiator drain valve and replace cover. 8. Install surge tank cap. 1— Surge Tank Cap

2— Radiator Drain Valve

Radiator Drain Valve CN93077,0000250 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-13-1

061517

PN=193

Maintenance—Every 6000 Hours

Cooling System Fill and Deaeration Procedure CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely. TS281 —UN—15APR13

IMPORTANT: Avoid mixing different brands or types of coolant. Coolant manufacturers engineer their coolants to meet certain specifications and performance requirements. Mixing different coolant types can degrade coolant and machine performance. Use only permanent-type low silicate ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant solution. Other types of antifreeze may damage cylinder seals.

Pressurized Fluids

TX1156042A —UN—13MAR14

John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix coolant is recommended when adding new coolant to cooling system. Follow directions on container for correct mixture ratio. FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type, low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak additive) and clean, soft water. Fill

Surge Tank Cap

Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure. Fill surge tank to above the full hot mark. Replace surge tank cap.

1— Surge Tank Cap

Deaeration The cooling system requires several warmup and cool down cycles to deaerate. It will NOT deaerate during normal operation. Only during warmup and cool down cycles will the system deaerate. 1. Start engine. Run engine until coolant reaches a warm temperature. 2. Stop engine. Allow coolant to cool. 3. Check coolant level at surge tank.

refill procedures to insure that all air is out of the system which allows the coolant level to stabilize. Check coolant level only when the engine is cold. 5. If necessary, fill surge tank to above the MIN COLD mark. Specification Cooling System—Capacity.................................................................................................... 39.7 L 10.5 gal.

4. Repeat steps 1—3 until surge tank coolant level is repeatedly at the same level (stabilized). NOTE: The level of the coolant in the cooling system MUST BE repeatedly checked after all drain and COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company CN93077,0000251 -19-28APR14-1/1

3-13-2

061517

PN=194

Miscellaneous—Machine Bleed Fuel System electric priming pump. Prime fuel system and bleed air as follows:

IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill fuel filters. Debris in unfiltered fuel will damage fuel system components. NOTE: This procedure should be performed after each fuel filter drain, fuel filter change, or when the engine has run out of fuel. Air can enter fuel system when draining fuel filters, changing fuel filters, or when machine has run out of fuel. Air in the fuel system can prevent the engine from starting or cause rough idle. This machine is equipped with an

1. Turn key switch to the ON position to energize ignition system and fuel pump. Let pump run for 60 seconds to prime fuel system. 2. After 60 seconds, turn key switch to the OFF position. 3. Turn key switch back to the ON position. 4. Run engine for 5 minutes at slow idle. ER79617,0000DF9 -19-04MAY16-1/1

Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air Cooler and Fuel Cooler

TX1156621 —UN—21MAR14

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating fan and flying debris. Shut off engine before opening cover. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast. 1. Turn machine off. 2. Open the engine cover. 3. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow dirt and debris back through cooling system. Coolers

4. Close engine cover. 5. Open left service doors to access coolers. 6. Use compressed air to clean out the charge air cooler (6).

1— Windshield Washer Fluid Tank 2— Fuel Cooler 3— Air Conditioner Condenser

4— Hydraulic Oil Cooler 5— Radiator Cooler 6— Charge Air Cooler

7. Close service doors. KR46761,0000BFE -19-03APR14-1/2

If machine is equipped with a hydraulic reverse fan function, use the reversing fan switch to clean the cooling system. The reversing fan switch is located on the left console. TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05

NOTE: The reversing fan function shall not be reactivated within 1 minute of its last completion (this time includes AUTO cycle). The reversing fan switch has three positions:

• AUTO: Every 60 minutes the radiator cooling fan will

automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without intervention from the operator. • OFF: Fan resumes normal operation. • MANUAL: When pressed and held for 3 seconds, the fan will reverse direction for 30 seconds when right portion of switch is pressed.

Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped

KR46761,0000BFE -19-03APR14-2/2

4-1-1

061517

PN=195

Miscellaneous—Machine

Replace Coolant Filter—If Equipped (S.N. —811697)

TX1186061 —UN—23FEB15

1. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure rotated 90° for easier access. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot spraying fluids. Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only when cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing completely. 2. Allow engine to cool and remove surge tank cap. 3. Drain cooling system. See Drain Cooling System. (Section 3-13.)

Access Panel (view from underneath machine)

TX1186062 —UN—23FEB15

4. Underneath the machine on the right side, remove cap screws (1) and access panel (2) to access coolant filter (6). 5. Remove cap screws (3) from mounting clamps. 6. Remove hose clamps (4) from each end of the coolant filter. Close all openings using caps and plugs. 7. Remove filter brackets (5) and remove coolant filter. IMPORTANT: Avoid component damage. Install coolant filter in correct orientation. Coolant filter inlet is the hose coming from the engine and coolant filter outlet is the hose going to the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank. 8. Install new coolant filter removing caps and plugs.

Coolant Filter 1— Cap Screw (5 used) 2— Access Panel 3— Cap Screw (2 used)

4— Hose Clamp (2 used) 5— Filter Bracket (2 used) 6— Coolant Filter

9. Install and tighten hose clamps and filter brackets. 12. Install surge tank cap and refill engine cooling system. See Cooling System Fill and Deaeration Procedure. (Section 3-13.)

10. Install cap screws to mounting clamps. 11. Install access panel and cap screws.

JL58967,00006DC -19-17NOV16-1/1

Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles or High-Pressure Fuel Pump If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty, the engine will not run normally. See an authorized John Deere dealer for service.

Changing the high-pressure fuel pump in any way not approved by the manufacturer will end the warranty. See copy of the John Deere warranty on this machine. Do not service a high-pressure fuel pump that is not operating correctly. See an authorized John Deere dealer. VD76477,0000366 -19-30MAR17-1/1

Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders, Pumps, or Motors

If these parts need service, see an authorized John Deere dealer.

Special tools and information are needed to service control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors. TX,90,DH2537 -19-27JUL15-1/1

4-1-2

061517

PN=196

Miscellaneous—Machine

Precautions for Alternator and Regulator When batteries are connected, follow these rules: 1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable when working on or near alternator or regulator.

6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [-] to negative [-]).

2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR REGULATOR.

7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is running and alternator is charging.

3. Be sure alternator wires are correctly connected BEFORE connecting batteries.

8. Disconnect battery cables before connecting battery charger to the batteries. If machine has more than one battery, each battery must be charged separately.

4. Do not ground alternator output terminal. 5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or regulator wires while batteries are connected or while alternator is operating.

CED,OUO1021,185 -19-30MAR17-1/1

4-1-3

061517

PN=197

Miscellaneous—Machine

Handling, Checking, and Servicing Batteries Carefully

TS204 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte level. Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer. Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and replace it last. Exploding Battery Gas

Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. Sulfuric acid is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness if splashed into eyes. Avoid the hazard by: 1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area. 2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves. 3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added. 4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte. 5. Using proper jump start procedure. If acid is spilled on a person: 1. Flush contacted skin with water. 2. Apply baking soda or lime to contacted area to help neutralize the acid. 3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. 4. Get medical attention immediately. If acid is swallowed:

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

TS203 —UN—23AUG88

1. Do not induce vomiting. 2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt). 3. Get medical attention immediately.

Battery Electrolyte

T85402 —UN—10NOV88

If electrolyte spills on the floor, use one of the following mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb) baking soda in 4 L (1 gal) water, or 0.47 L (1 pt) household ammonia in 4 L (1 gal) water. IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the battery cells. Check the specific gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell. See an authorized John Deere dealer for SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow directions included with the tester. Battery and Coolant Tester

A fully charged battery will have a corrected specific gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200, charge the battery. Continued on next page

4-1-4

JS93577,0000479 -19-01MAR17-1/2

061517

PN=198

Miscellaneous—Machine SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company JS93577,0000479 -19-01MAR17-2/2

Using Battery Charger

TS204 —UN—15APR13

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding battery. Do not charge a battery if the battery is frozen or it may explode. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before charging. Turn off charger before connecting or disconnecting it. IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a booster if a battery has a 1.150 specific gravity reading or lower. Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before charging batteries in the machine to prevent damage to electrical components.

Prevent Battery Explosions

Turn the battery disconnect switch (if equipped) to the OFF position. A battery charger may be used as a booster to start engine. Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.

N36890 —UN—07OCT88

Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case feels hot or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must not exceed 52°C (125°F).

Charger KR46761,0000C06 -19-30MAR17-1/1

4-1-5

061517

PN=199

Miscellaneous—Machine

Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System

T7233JN —UN—21MAY90

Before boost starting, machine must be properly shut down to prevent unexpected machine movement when engine starts. CAUTION: An explosive gas is produced while batteries are in use or being charged. Keep flames or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure the batteries are charged in a well-ventilated area. IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is a 24-volt negative (-) ground. Connect two 12-volt booster batteries together as shown for 24 volts. 1. Connect one end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the machine batteries (A) and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster batteries (B). 2. Connect one end of the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster batteries. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable to the machine frame as far away from the machine batteries as possible. 3. Start engine.

Booster Batteries, 2-Battery Application A—Machine Battery (2 used)

B—Booster Battery (2 used)

4. Immediately after starting engine, disconnect the end of the negative (-) cable from the machine frame. Then disconnect the other end of the negative (-) cable from the negative (-) terminal of the booster batteries. 5. Disconnect positive (+) cable from booster batteries and machine batteries. OUT4001,0000238 -19-09MAR17-1/1

Replacing Batteries

TX1156626 —UN—21MAR14

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from battery acid. Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing and cause blindness if splashed into eyes. NOTE: Reserve capacity is the time in minutes it takes a fully charged battery at 26.6°C (80°F) to drop below 10 volts. Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.) Open left rear service door to access batteries (1). This machine has two 12-volt batteries with negative (-) ground connected in series to provide 24-volts.

Batteries 1— Battery (2 used)

Use only batteries which meet the following specifications. Specification Battery—Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) At -18°C (0°F) per Battery.......................................................................1000 CCA Battery—Minutes Reserve Capacity At 25 Amps per Battery........................................................................ 320 min.

type. For example, replace a failed maintenance-free battery with a new maintenance-free battery. Different types of batteries may have different rates of charge. This difference could overload one of the batteries and cause it to fail.

If one battery in a 24-volt system has failed but the other is still good, replace the failed battery with one of the same KR46761,0000C00 -19-08FEB16-1/1

4-1-6

061517

PN=200

Miscellaneous—Machine

Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped Engine Oil Test Port TX1156945A —UN—31MAR14

On right side of machine, open rear service door to access the engine oil test port (1). 1— Engine Oil Test Port

Engine Oil Test Port KR46761,0000C02 -19-31MAR14-1/2

Hydraulic Oil Test Port On right side of machine, open rear service door to access the hydraulic oil test port (2). TX1156639A —UN—31MAR14

2— Hydraulic Oil Test Port

Hydraulic Oil Test Port KR46761,0000C02 -19-31MAR14-2/2

Welding on Machine

• When sanding or grinding paint, avoid breathing the dust.

CAUTION: Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust. Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch. Do all work outside or in a well-ventilated area. Dispose of paint and solvent properly. When sanding or grinding painted surfaces, avoid breathing the dust. Wear an approved respirator. When using solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or heating. IMPORTANT: Have only a qualified welder perform this job. Connect welder ground clamp close to each weld area so electrical current does not pass through any bearings, articulation joints, or pivot points. Remove or protect all parts that can be damaged by heat or weld splatter.

• Wear an approved respirator. When using solvent or

paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. • Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area. • Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before welding or heating. IMPORTANT: Electrical current traveling from the welder through the machine electrical system may damage the machine electrical system, including battery and control units. Disconnect battery positive and negative cables before welding on machine. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cables. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cables. 4. Cover, protect, or move any wiring harness sections away from welding area. For any repairs, see an authorized John Deere dealer.

1. Remove paint before welding or heating. VD76477,00005A0 -19-30MAR17-1/1

4-1-7

061517

PN=201

Miscellaneous—Machine

Clean the Machine Regularly

T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from flying debris. Be careful when removing any grease, oil, fuel, or debris buildup. IMPORTANT: Directing pressurized water at electronic/electrical components or connectors, bearings and hydraulic seals, fuel injection pumps or other sensitive parts, and components may cause product malfunctions. Reduce pressure and spray at a 45—90° angle. High-pressure washing (greater than 1379 kPa [13.8 bar] [200 psi]) can damage freshly painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to air-dry for 30 days minimum after receipt of machine before cleaning with high pressure. Use low-pressure wash operations until 30 days have elapsed.

Clean Machine Regularly

Do not spray heat exchangers at an angle. ER79617,0000D50 -19-31MAR16-1/1

Adding 12-Volt Accessories IMPORTANT: This machine has a 24-volt electrical system. Installing 12-volt accessories without addition of 24-volt to 12-volt converter may cause battery failure.

and manufacturer’s recommendations to determine the capacity of the converter required and its installation requirements. If standard equipment, verify if amperage is adequate for application.

This machine is equipped with a 12-volt, 5-amp outlet.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT connect an accessory to one battery. Connecting a 12-volt accessory to one battery will cause one battery to overcharge, and the other battery to undercharge, causing battery failure.

When possible, use 24-volt accessories. If 12-volt accessories are added, use a 24-volt to 12-volt converter. Converters are available from an authorized John Deere dealer. Converter capacity requirements depend on the load of the accessories installed. Follow electronic dealer

TX,90,DH3734 -19-30MAR17-1/1

JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System (MMS)—If Equipped

and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical machine health data and service status.

JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and manages information about where and how construction

For more information, see an authorized John Deere dealer or visit www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services and Support, JDLink™).

JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company VD76477,0001541 -19-26MAR15-1/1

4-1-8

061517

PN=202

Miscellaneous—Machine

Keep ROPS Installed Properly

TS176 —UN—23AUG88

CAUTION: Make certain all parts are installed correctly if the roll-over protective structure (ROPS) is loosened or removed for any reason. Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque. The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an overturn incident, or is in any way altered. A damaged ROPS should be replaced, not reused. When installation of equipment on a machine necessitates loosening or removing ROPS, mounting bolts must be tightened to specification.

ROPS Maintenance

Specification ROPS Mounting Bolts—Torque..............................................................................620 N·m 457 lb·ft KR46761,0001089 -19-13JAN16-1/1

4-1-9

061517

PN=203

Miscellaneous—Machine Amperage Rating

Color

Black

The fuse box is located inside the cab underneath the left rear panel labeled FUSE.

Violet

Pink

Remove cover.

Tan

IMPORTANT: Install fuse with correct amperage rating to prevent electrical system damage from overload.

7-1/2

Brown

Red

Light Blue

Yellow

Additional fuses located in battery compartment:

Natural (white)

• F60—ALT 65-Amp Fuse • F61—BAT 45-Amp Fuse

Replacing Fuses

Light Green

F10

F20

F30

F40

F19

F29

F39

F18

F28

F38

F17

F27

F37

F16

F26

F36

F15

F25

F35

F14

F24

F34

F13

F23

F33

F12

F22

F32

F11

F21

F31

TX1161372 —UN—22MAY14

Fuse Color Codes

TX1161372 Fuse Blocks

F21 — SEAT HEATER 10-Amp Fuse F22 — CAB LAMP FRONT 10-Amp Fuse F23 — CAB LAMP REAR 10-Amp Fuse F24 — IMOBI 5-Amp Fuse F25 — QUICK HITCH 5-Amp Fuse F26 — AUX 3 5-Amp Fuse F27 — NOT USED F28 — NOT USED F29 — NOT USED F30 — NOT USED F31 — SEAT COMPR 10-Amp Fuse F32 — CAB LAMP FRONT +2 10-Amp Fuse F33 — WARNING LAMP 10-Amp Fuse F34 — AUX 2 10-Amp Fuse F35 — DIAG 5-Amp Fuse F36 — ECU P2 20-Amp Fuse F37 — ECU P3 20-Amp Fuse F38 — ECU P4 20-Amp Fuse F39 — NOT USED F40 — NOT USED

F1 — LAMP 20-Amp Fuse F2 — WIPER 10-Amp Fuse F3 — HEATER 20-Amp Fuse F4 — SOLENOID 20-Amp Fuse F5 — OPT. 1 (ALT) 5-Amp Fuse F6 — OPT. 2 (ALT) 20-Amp Fuse F7 — START 5-Amp Fuse F8 — ECU P1 20-Amp Fuse F9 — BACK UP 10-Amp Fuse F10 — CONTROLLER 5-Amp Fuse F11 — TRAVEL ALARM 5-Amp Fuse F12 — RADIO 5-Amp Fuse F13 — LIGHTER 10-Amp Fuse F14 — MONITOR 5-Amp Fuse F15 — AUX 10-Amp Fuse F16 — 12V UNIT 10-Amp Fuse F17 — POWER ON 5-Amp Fuse F18 — IDLE STOP 5-Amp Fuse F19 — HORN 10-Amp Fuse F20 — OPT. 3 (BAT) 5-Amp Fuse

Continued on next page

4-1-10

KR46761,0000C3A -19-01SEP15-1/3

061517

PN=204

Miscellaneous—Machine

JDLink™ In-Line Fuses—If Equipped 1. Turn machine off. 2. Open left front service door to access the JDLink™ unswitched power in-line 7.5-amp fuse (F6001) on the yellow wire. 3. To deactivate the JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System, remove the JDLink™ unswitched power in-line 7.5-amp fuse. 4. Close service door. F6003—JDLink™ Switched Power In-Line 7.5-Amp Fuse

TX1200492 —UN—27AUG15

F6001—JDLink™ Unswitched Power In-Line 7.5-Amp Fuse

JDLink In-Line Fuses JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company Continued on next page

4-1-11

KR46761,0000C3A -19-01SEP15-2/3

061517

PN=205

Miscellaneous—Machine

In-Line Fuses Open left rear service door to access engine light in-line 7.5-amp fuse (F46). Open left front service door to access the fuel transfer pump in-line 10-amp fuse (F5002), flex power converter (FPC) in-line 10-amp fuse (F5004), and ether control solenoid in-line 7.5-amp fuse (F5671).

TX1200707A —UN—01SEP15

F5004—Flex Power Converter (FPC) In-Line 10-Amp Fuse F5671—Ether Control Solenoid In-Line 7.5-Amp Fuse

Engine Light In-Line Fuse

TX1157895 —UN—14APR14

F46— Engine Light In-Line 7.5-Amp Fuse F5002—Fuel Transfer Pump In-Line 10-Amp Fuse

In-Line Fuses KR46761,0000C3A -19-01SEP15-3/3

4-1-12

061517

PN=206

Miscellaneous—Machine

Replacing Bucket Teeth CAUTION: Guard against injury from flying pieces of metal; wear goggles or safety glasses. T95784 —UN—10NOV88

IMPORTANT: Angle the drift toward the bucket to avoid damaging the rubber pin lock. Check bucket teeth periodically so that wear does not extend to the bucket tooth shank. 1. Use a hammer and drift to drive out locking pin. NOTE: Alternate buckets may use different tooth assemblies.

Bucket Teeth

2. Remove tooth. 3. Inspect rubber pin lock (A) for damage. Replace if necessary. T95785 —UN—10NOV88

4. If rubber pin lock has moved, reposition in slot in adapter tooth shank. 5. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank. 6. Drive the locking pin into the hole fully. A—Rubber Pin Lock

T95786 —UN—10NOV88

Rubber Pin Lock

Tooth Shank 04T,90,M16 -19-05JAN16-1/1

4-1-13

061517

PN=207

Miscellaneous—Machine

Replacing Bucket Tooth Tip—Heavy-Duty Bucket 1. Clean tooth (A) and tooth tip (B). T6879EE —UN—06DEC88

2. Insert lock removal tool under U-shaped pin (C). CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Pin may fly after pin is released from tooth tip. Keep a firm grip on pin to prevent injury. 3. Remove pin. 4. Turn tooth tip counterclockwise and pull tooth tip up to remove.

Bucket Tooth Tip

5. Clean tooth shank. 6. Replace U-shaped pin and tooth tip at the same time.

T7527DO —UN—27JUN91

7. Insert tooth tip on shank turning tip clockwise. 8. Install U-shaped pin. The side of the pin with the FRONT mark (D) must face tooth tip. Make sure pin is firmly engaged over tooth tip. A—Tooth B—Tooth Tip

C—Pin D—FRONT Mark U-Shaped Pin

04T,90,K273 -19-30MAR16-1/1

Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series

TX1150806 —UN—10JAN14

IMPORTANT: Prevent machine damage. Check bucket teeth periodically so that wear does not extend to the bucket tooth shank. 1. Remove pin (1) by rotating counterclockwise 180° using a ratchet and socket. 2. Remove tooth. 3. Inspect pin and rubber locks (2) for damage. Replace if necessary. 4. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank.

5. Install pin by rotating clockwise 180°. 2— Rubber Lock (2 used)

TX1150895 —UN—10JAN14

1— Pin

Rubber Lock DB84312,00000BC -19-20JAN14-1/1

4-1-14

061517

PN=208

Miscellaneous—Machine

Bucket Remove and Install 0.5—1.5 mm 0.020—0.060 in

Split O-Ring Seal Nut Torque

6 N·m 53 lb·in

Split O-Ring Seal Retainer Cap Screw Length

10—20 mm 0.394—0.787 in

TX1237262A —UN—12APR17

SPECIFICATIONS Bucket Link and Arm End Play

APPROXIMATE PIN WEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS 12 kg 26 lb

160GLC, 180GLC, 210G, and 210GLC Bucket Pin Weight

20 kg 44 lb

250GLC, 290GLC, and 300GLC Bucket Pin Weight

34 kg 75 lb

350GLC and 380GLC Bucket Pin Weight

46 kg 101 lb

470GLC Bucket Pin Weight

61 kg 134 lb

Bucket Arm and Bucket Link Pins

TX1237052A —UN—12APR17

130G Bucket Pin Weight

Bucket Removal 1. Park and prepare machine for service safely. See Prepare Machine for Maintenance. (Section 3-2.) CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Bucket could possibly roll. Secure bucket position with appropriate blocking.

Dust Seal 1— Bucket Link Pin 2— Bucket Arm Pin 3— Cap Screw (2 used)

2. Position bucket flat side down and use appropriate blocking to stabilize.

4— Nut (4 used) 7— Dust Seal (4 used)

3. Remove nuts (4) and cap screws (3). CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device.

prematurely wear components. Clean all components thoroughly. 7. Clean contaminated grease, dirt, and debris from bucket link pin and bucket arm pin pivot area.

4. Use appropriate lifting device to remove bucket link pin (1) and bucket arm pin (2). See pin weight specification table for bucket pin weights.

8. Inspect dust seals (7) for wear or damage. Replace as necessary.

5. Separate bucket from arm and link.

9. Inspect pins and bushings for wear or damage. Replace as necessary.

6. Remove 2MAD™ seals, O-ring seals, or split O-ring seals. Clean, inspect, and replace as necessary. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to pins, bushings, and bosses. Dirt and debris can 2MAD is a trademark of ESP International

Continued on next page

4-1-15

DH10862,0000008 -19-01JUN17-1/4

061517

PN=209

Miscellaneous—Machine Bucket Installation—2MAD™ Seal

TX1237624A —UN—01MAY17

1. Install 2MAD™ seal (8) by securing seal with one hand, sliding fingers under seal, and pulling seal onto bucket boss (5) as shown. 2. Apply grease to pins and bores. 3. Align machine arm and link with bucket. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Using a larger diameter shim than recommended does not allow 2MAD seal to seat properly. 2MAD seal must seat properly to keep out dirt and debris.

2MAD Seal

4. Measure bucket link and arm end play and add shims (6) as necessary. If multiple shims are used, divide the shims equally on each side of boom arm and bucket link.

5 8

Specification Bucket Link and Arm—End Play.....................................................................0.5—1.5 mm 0.020—0.060 in

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device. TX1237908 —UN—27APR17

5. Use appropriate lifting device to install bucket link pin and bucket arm pin. See pin weight specification table for bucket pin weights. NOTE: Tighten nuts against each other, not against retainer. Cap screw must be free to turn in hole. 6. Install cap screws and tighten nuts against each other.

7. Slide 2MAD seals from bucket boss into bucket link and bucket arm pivot points as shown.

2MAD Seal Correctly Installed

8. Grease bucket link and bucket arm pivot points. 8— 2MAD Seal (4 used) TX1237625A —UN—19APR17

5— Bucket Boss 6— Shim (as needed)

Measuring Bucket Link and Arm End Play 2MAD is a trademark of ESP International Continued on next page

4-1-16

DH10862,0000008 -19-01JUN17-2/4

061517

PN=210

Miscellaneous—Machine Bucket Installation—O-Ring Seal 1. Install O-ring seal (9) over bucket boss (5).

TX1237202A —UN—12APR17

2. Apply grease to pins and bores. 3. Align machine arm and link with bucket. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Using a larger diameter shim than recommended does not allow O-ring seal to seat properly. O-ring seal must seat properly to keep out dirt and debris. 4. Measure bucket link and arm end play and add shims (6) as necessary. If multiple shims are used, divide the shims equally on each side of boom arm and bucket link.

O-Ring Seal

Specification Bucket Link and Arm—End Play.....................................................................0.5—1.5 mm 0.020—0.060 in

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device.

TX1237913 —UN—27APR17

6 O-Ring Seal Correctly Installed

8. Grease bucket link and bucket arm pivot points. 9— O-Ring Seal (4 used)

TX1237625A —UN—19APR17

5— Bucket Boss 6— Shim (as needed)

Measuring Bucket Link and Arm End Play Continued on next page

4-1-17

DH10862,0000008 -19-01JUN17-3/4

061517

PN=211

Miscellaneous—Machine Bucket Installation—Split O-Ring Seal 1. Apply grease to pins and bores. 2. Align machine arm and link with bucket.

TX1237242A —UN—12APR17

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage. Using a larger diameter shim than recommended does not allow split O-ring seal to seat properly. Split O-ring seal must seat properly to keep out dirt and debris. 3. Measure bucket link and arm end play and add shims (6) as necessary. If multiple shims are used, divide the shims equally on each side of boom arm and bucket link. Specification Bucket Link and Arm—End Play.....................................................................0.5—1.5 mm 0.020—0.060 in

CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device.

Split O-Ring Seal

4. Use appropriate lifting device to install bucket link pin and bucket arm pin. See pin weight specification table for bucket pin weights. NOTE: Tighten nuts against each other, not against retainer. Cap screw must be free to turn in hole. 5. Install cap screws and tighten nuts against each other.

TX1237984 —UN—27APR17

6. Install split O-ring seal (10) into bucket link and bucket arm pivot points as shown. Tighten split O-ring seal nut to specification. Specification Split O-Ring Seal Nut—Torque....................................................................................6 N·m 53 lb·in

7. Trim excess split O-ring seal retainer cap screw (11) to specification.

6 Split O-Ring Seal Correctly Installed

TX1237625A —UN—19APR17

Specification Split O-Ring Seal Retainer Cap Screw—Length.......................................................................10—20 mm 0.394—0.787 in

8. Grease bucket link and bucket arm pivot points. 5— Bucket Boss 6— Shim (as needed)

10— Split O-Ring Seal (4 used) 11— Split O-Ring Seal Retainer Cap Screw (4 used)

Measuring Bucket Link and Arm End Play DH10862,0000008 -19-01JUN17-4/4

4-1-18

061517

PN=212

Miscellaneous—Machine

Track Sag General Information To maximize undercarriage life, keep track sag within specification. Tracks may require adjustment several times during a working day due to changing soil type and moisture content. Adjust tracks in the actual operating conditions. TIGHT TRACK: Packing causes a tight track. If material packs in the undercarriage, adjust tracks with the material packed in the components. While the track spring will recoil and the machine can continue to operate with a tight track, continued operation will result in excessive pin and bushing wear, sprocket

popping, tooth tip wear, and excessive loads on the entire undercarriage and travel drive system. Machine productivity and fuel consumption are also adversely affected because increased horsepower is needed to move the machine. LOOSE TRACK: A loose track has more side to side motion, increasing side wear on the links, rollers, and front idler. An excessively loose track will slap at high ground speeds, resulting in high impact loads on the sprocket teeth, bushings, and carrier rollers. VD76477,00001F7 -19-28AUG09-1/1

Check Track Shoe Hardware

TX1176204 —UN—10NOV14

Track shoes should be checked periodically for loose or missing cap screws and nuts. For shoes with missing or loose cap screws and nuts, remove shoes and clean the mating surface of shoes and links before tightening cap screws and nuts. The cap screws should be replaced because they have been stretched to yield previously. Operating a machine with loose shoes can cause the cap screws and holes in the shoes and links to wear, making it difficult to keep the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also cause hardware malfunction and loss of shoes. 1. Clean the mating surface of shoe and links. Install shoes. 2. Apply a light coating of oil to cap screw threads before installing. 3. Install nuts with the rounded corners against milled surface of link and chamfered side is away from link.

Cap Screw Tightening Sequence

4. Starting at any cap screw, tighten all cap screws in sequence shown to the torque specification, then 1/2 turn (180°) more.

Check that nuts are square with the milled surface of link and there is full contact between nut and milled surface. As necessary, hold the nut so it does not turn. CN93077,00005F0 -19-30MAR16-1/1

Hardware Torque Specifications Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight. If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the following charts unless a special torque is specified. TX,90,FF1225 -19-15MAR93-1/1

4-1-19

061517

PN=213

Miscellaneous—Machine

Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values TS1671 —UN—01MAY03

Bolt or Screw Size 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16

SAE Grade 2a

SAE Grade 1 b

Lubricated

Lubricatedb

Dry

SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2

Dryc

Lubricatedb

Dryc

SAE Grade 8 or 8.2 Lubricatedb

Dryc

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

3.7

4.7

7.5

9.5

106

13.5

120

150

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

20.5

7.7 13.5

68 120

194

N·m

lb.-ft.

9.8

106

15.5

137

17.5

155

194

240

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

20.5

32.5

lb.-in.

19.5

172

221

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

32.5

100

1/2

110

120

155

115

9/16

35.5

125

155

115

175

130

220

165

5/8

105

135

100

170

125

215

160

240

175

305

225

3/4

120

150

110

190

140

240

175

300

220

380

280

425

315

540

400

7/8

190

140

240

175

190

140

240

175

490

360

615

455

690

510

870

640

285

210

360

265

285

210

360

265

730

540

920

680

1030

760

1300

960

1-1/8

400

300

510

375

400

300

510

375

910

670

1150

850

1450

1075

1850

1350

1-1/4

570

420

725

535

570

420

725

535

1280

945

1630

1200

2050

1500

2600

1920

1-3/8

750

550

950

700

750

550

950

700

1700

1250

2140

1580

2700

2000

3400

2500

1-1/2

990

730

1250

930

990

730

1250

930

2250

1650

2850

2100

3600

2650

4550

3350

Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade.

Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

a Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length. b “Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in. and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating. c “Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.

DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1

4-1-20

061517

PN=214

Miscellaneous—Machine

Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values TS1670 —UN—01MAY03

Bolt or Screw Size M6 M8 M10

4.8

8.8

9.8

10.9

12.9

4.8

8.8

9.8

10.9

12.9

Class 4.8 Lubricateda

Class 8.8 or 9.8 Dryb

Lubricateda

Class 10.9

Dryb

Lubricateda

Class 12.9 Dryb

Lubricateda

Dryb

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

lb.-in.

N·m

4.7

8.9

11.3

100

115

16.5

146

15.5

137

19.5

172

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

23.5

29.5

27.5

11.5

102

14.5

128

194

27.5

243

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

N·m

lb.-ft.

lb.-in.

204

N·m

lb.-ft.

M12

29.5

110

140

105

130

165

120

M14

120

150

110

175

130

220

165

205

150

260

190

M16

100

125

190

140

240

175

275

200

350

255

320

235

400

300

M18

135

100

170

125

265

195

330

245

375

275

475

350

440

325

560

410

M20

190

140

245

180

375

275

475

350

530

390

675

500

625

460

790

580

M22

265

195

330

245

510

375

650

480

725

535

920

680

850

625

1080

800

M24

330

245

425

315

650

480

820

600

920

680

1150

850

1080

800

1350

1000

M27

490

360

625

460

950

700

1200

885

1350

1000

1700

1250

1580

1160

2000

1475

M30

660

490

850

625

1290

950

1630

1200

1850

1350

2300

1700

2140

1580

2700

2000

M33

900

665

1150

850

1750

1300

2200

1625

2500

1850

3150

2325

2900

2150

3700

2730

M36

1150

850

1450

1075

2250

1650

2850

2100

3200

2350

4050

3000

3750

2770

4750

3500

Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the specific application.

“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20 and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating. b “Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating. DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1

4-1-21

061517

PN=215

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Operational Checkout to doing checkout. The machine must be at operating temperature for many of the checks.

This procedure is used to check operation of machine. It is designed so you can do a walk around inspection, check machine operation, and perform specific checks from the operator's seat. If there is a problem with machine, diagnostic information in this checkout will help pinpoint the probable cause. This information may allow you to perform a simple adjustment to correct the problem. Use the table of contents to help find adjustment procedures. A location will be required which is level and has adequate space to complete checks. No tools or equipment are needed to perform checkout.

Read each check completely before performing. If no problem is found, you will be instructed to go to the next check. If a problem is indicated, you will be referred to a procedure for adjustment, repair, or replacement. The monitor can be used to perform diagnostic and operational checks. The monitor can display engine speed, pressures, and diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). Before performing any check or test below, verify battery disconnect is turned to the ON position.

Complete necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil condition, external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, wiring) prior KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-1/54

Diagnostic Trouble Code Check KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-2/54

Display and Clear Trouble Always check for diagnostic trouble codes and correct them before performing Codes operational checkout. Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using one of the following methods:

• Monitor • With Service ADVISOR™ • MPDr

YES: Correct all diagnostic trouble codes before proceeding.

LOOK: Are diagnostic trouble codes present?

NO: Proceed with operational checkout.

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-3/54

Operational Checks—Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks Continued on next page

4-2-1

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-4/54

061517

PN=216

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Horn Circuit Check

TX1159741 —UN—02MAY14

Horn Circuit 1— Horn Button Key switch in OFF position.

YES: Go to next check.

Press horn button (1) on top of left pilot control lever.

NO: Check horn 10 A fuse (F19) (marked HORN). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LISTEN: Does horn sound?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. Continued on next page

4-2-2

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-5/54

061517

PN=217

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Hour Meter and Fuel Gauge Checks

2 PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT OFF

ACC

N O

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086727 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel

50.0 h

10:00 AM 11 H

0.00 gal/h C

TX1160748 —UN—15MAY14

Hour Meter and Fuel Gauge Screen 1— Hour Meter 2— Home Button 6— Fuel Gauge 11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge Press and hold home button (2) until default screen appears.

Continued on next page

4-2-3

YES: Go to next check.

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-6/54

061517

PN=218

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout LOOK: Does hour meter (1) display machine hours?

NO: Check information controller and main controller battery power 5 A fuse (F10) (marked CONTROLLER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-7/54

Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine Off Checks Continued on next page

4-2-4

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-8/54

061517

PN=219

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Monitor Start-Up Check

TX1086287A —UN—28DEC10

System Starting Screen

TX1160713A —UN—15MAY14

Default Screen 1— System Starting Screen 2— Default Screen NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started, the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been disabled by the operator through the monitor. When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the system starting screen (1) displays for approximately 2 seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed. Turn key switch to ON position.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does monitor display system starting screen?

NO: Check information controller and main controller battery power 5 A fuse (F10) (marked CONTROLLER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does default screen with hour meter appear after system starting screen disappears?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-5

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-9/54

061517

PN=220

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Monitor, Gauges, and Battery Relay Checks

TX1160749A —UN—15MAY14

Default Screen 1— Work Mode Indicator 2— Exhaust Filter Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator 3— Power Mode Indicator 4— Hour Meter 5— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 6— Fuel Gauge 7— Travel Mode Indicator 11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started, the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been disabled by the operator through the monitor. NOTE: If engine coolant temperature is below 30°C (86°F) engine temperature gauge needle may not move. Turn key switch to ON. LISTEN: Does battery relay click? LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (5) display correct engine coolant temperature? LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level? LOOK: Does diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge (11) display correct fluid level? LOOK: Does hour meter (4) display machine hours?

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does work mode indicator (1) display correct work mode (bucket or attachment)?

NO: Battery relay does not click. Verify battery disconnect is turned to the ON position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)

LOOK: Does travel mode indicator (7) display correct travel mode?

NO: Monitor does not come ON. Check monitor 5 A fuse (F14) (marked MONITOR). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does power mode indicator (3) display correct power mode?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-6

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-10/54

061517

PN=221

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Rear Camera Check

TX1160715A —UN—15MAY14

Default Screen 5— Default Screen

TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10

Main Menu Screen 1— Main Menu Screen

TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10

Switch Panel 2— Monitor Dial 3— Back Button 4— Home Button Continued on next page

4-2-7

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-11/54

061517

PN=222

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

CAUTION: To avoid possible injury or death to operator or others, the rear view camera image is designed to supplement other safety practices and is not intended to be the sole method of collision avoidance. Always be alert and aware of the surroundings when operating this machine. Turn key ON. When the default screen (5) is displayed, press monitor dial (2) on the switch panel. LOOK: Does main menu screen (1) display? Rotate monitor dial to highlight settings menu. Press monitor dial. LOOK: Does settings menu display? At settings menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight rear view camera monitor. Press monitor dial to display rear view camera monitor menu. LOOK: Does rear view camera monitor menu display? Press monitor dial to turn camera ON (enable). Press home button (4).

TX1160752A —UN—15MAY14

Rear View Image 6— Rear View Image LOOK: Does rear view image (6) display on default screen? Repeat above steps. At rear view camera monitor menu, press monitor dial to turn camera OFF (disable). Press home button.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does default screen appear without rear view image?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-8

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-12/54

061517

PN=223

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel Lever and Pedal Neutral Checks

TX1157583 —UN—09APR14

Travel Lever and Pedal 1— Forward 2— Rearward Push both travel levers and pedals forward (1), then release. Pull both travel levers and pedals rearward (2), then release. FEEL: Do levers and pedals require equal effort to operate in forward and reverse?

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Do levers and pedals return to neutral at the same time when released?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-9

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-13/54

061517

PN=224

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Light Circuit Checks

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

ACC

OFF

N O

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086747 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 3— Work Light Switch Turn work light switch (3) to 1st position. LOOK: Is monitor panel back light and base machine work light on? LOOK: Does switch panel illuminate? Turn light switch to 2nd position.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does base machine work light stay on and switch panel stay illuminated?

NO: Check work and boom lights 20 A fuse (F1) (marked LAMP) and information controller and main controller battery power 5 A fuse (F10) (marked CONTROLLER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does boom work light come on and monitor back panel light change to night mode?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-10

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-14/54

061517

PN=225

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Windshield Wiper Control Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT OFF

START

ACC

N O

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch NOTE: Front window must be fully closed and latched for windshield wiper to operate. Turn windshield wiper and washer switch (4) to 1st INT position. LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently (8-second interval)? Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to 2nd INT position. LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in first position (5-second interval)? Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to 3rd INT position. LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in second position (3-second interval)? Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to ON position. LOOK: Does wiper operate continuously?

YES: Go to next check.

Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to OFF position.

NO: Check windshield wiper and washer 10 A fuse (F2) (marked WIPER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does wiper arm stop and retract to left side of windshield?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-11

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-15/54

061517

PN=226

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Windshield Washer Control Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT OFF

START

ACC

N O

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is held for more than 20 seconds, or continually operated with no fluid in the washer fluid tank. NOTE: While wiper is being operated in INT mode, when windshield wiper and washer switch is pressed, wiper mode is changed to continuous mode. Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4). LOOK: Is washer fluid supplied to windshield? Press and hold windshield wiper and washer switch for 3 seconds.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does wiper start and continue operating until switch is released?

NO: Check washer fluid level. See Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level. (Section 3-3.)

Release windshield wiper and washer switch.

NO: Check windshield wiper and washer 10 A fuse (F2) (marked WIPER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does wiper stop and retract to left side of windshield?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-12

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-16/54

061517

PN=227

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Windshield Wiper Circuit Check

2 1

TX1001270 —UN—14DEC05

Front Window Release Handle 1— Lock Pin 2— Lock Release Bar CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window closing. Upper front window comes down very forcefully. Close window only when sitting on operator's seat. Guide window down slowly.

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from window closing. Always lock the pin in cab frame boss hole. NOTE: The wiper cannot operate with the upper front window open. The washer can operate with the upper front window open. When closing window, check that window upper left corner makes good contact with the cab. Slide lock pin (1) inward, then down into notch. Pull lock release bar (2) toward operator’s seat. While holding lower handle on window, pull window up and back as far as it can go. Slide lock pin into cab frame boss hole and rotate downward into the locked position.

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

START

ACC

N O

OFF

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch Turn windshield wiper and washer switch (4) to ON position.

Continued on next page

4-2-13

YES: Go to next check.

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-17/54

061517

PN=228

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout LISTEN: Does wiper circuit click?

NO: Check windshield wiper and washer 10 A fuse (F2) (marked WIPER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Does wiper remain stationary in park position?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-18/54

Windshield Washer Circuit Check

IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is held for more than 20 seconds, or continually operated with no fluid in the washer fluid tank. YES: Go to next check.

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

START

N O

OFF

ACC

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch

NO: Check washer fluid level. See Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level. (Section 3-3.)

Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4) and hold for 3 seconds.

NO: Check windshield wiper and washer 10 A fuse (F2) (marked WIPER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Is washer fluid supplied to windshield?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-19/54

Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine On Checks Continued on next page

4-2-14

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-20/54

061517

PN=229

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Monitor and Gauge Circuit Checks

TX1160754A —UN—15MAY14

Operating Screen 1— Power Mode Indicator 2— Hour Meter 3— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 4— Fuel Gauge 5— Alarm Indicator 11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge IMPORTANT: Engine damage could occur if the alarm indicator (5) or engine oil pressure alarm indicator comes on after engine starts. Turn off machine immediately. NOTE: The exhaust filter auto cleaning disabled indicator will display on the monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started, the indicator will disappear unless exhaust filter auto cleaning has been disabled by the operator through the monitor. Start engine. LOOK: Do all alarm indicator displays remain off after engine starts?

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does alarm indicator remain off after engine starts?

NO: Engine oil pressure alarm displayed. Immediately stop engine and check engine oil level. See Check Engine Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)

LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (3) display correct engine coolant temperature?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

LOOK: Does fuel gauge (4) display correct fuel level?

NO: Alternator alarm indicator displayed. Check alternator drive belt.

LOOK: Does diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge (11) display correct fluid level?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-15

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-21/54

061517

PN=230

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Pilot Shutoff Circuit Check

TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13

Engine Speed Dial

TX1093763 —UN—19JUL11

Locked 1— Engine Speed Dial CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine may move during this check. Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate all machine functions. Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position. Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position. Slowly actuate dig and travel functions.

YES: See your authorized dealer.

LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate?

NO: Continue check.

TX1093764 —UN—19JUL11

Unlocked Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position. Slowly actuate dig and travel functions.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-16

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-22/54

061517

PN=231

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Reversing Fan System—If Equipped

TX1015264A —UN—09JAN07

Reversing Fan Switch

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM

PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1088406 —UN—21FEB11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Blower Speed Switch 9— Reversing Fan Switch Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Warm hydraulic oil to greater than 12°C (54°F). Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Press blower speed switch (3) OFF. Press reversing fan switch (9) to MANUAL position. LISTEN: Does fan speed slow down? LOOK/LISTEN: After approximately 20 seconds, does the fan speed increase and rotate in reverse direction for approximately 30 seconds? LISTEN/LOOK: Does the fan speed slow for approximately 20 seconds? Does fan direction return to normal?

YES: Go to next check.

LISTEN: Does fan speed increase?

NO: See your authorized dealer. Continued on next page

4-2-17

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-23/54

061517

PN=232

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Engine Speed Dial Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

ACC

N O

OFF

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Mode Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position. Turn engine speed dial (1) clockwise. LISTEN: Does engine speed increase?

YES: Go to next check.

Turn engine speed dial counterclockwise.

NO: Check information controller and main controller battery power 5 A fuse (F10) (marked CONTROLLER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-18

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-24/54

061517

PN=233

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout ECO (economy) Mode and PWR (power) Mode Checks

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button until ECO (economy) mode is displayed on monitor. LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease? Press and release power mode button until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. YES: Go to next check. LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase? Continued on next page

4-2-19

NO: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-25/54

061517

PN=234

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout H/P (high power) Mode Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

YES: Go to next check.

Actuate arm in function over relief.

NO: Check information controller and main controller battery power 5 A fuse (F10) (marked CONTROLLER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase as function goes over relief?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-20

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-26/54

061517

PN=235

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Auto-Idle Circuit Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor. Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position. Turn auto-idle switch to A/I ON position. LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4—6 seconds?

YES: Go to next check.

Slowly actuate dig function.

NO: Check solenoid 20 A fuse (F4) (marked SOLENOID). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to fast idle?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-21

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-27/54

061517

PN=236

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel Alarm Check

C TX1095497 —UN—09AUG11

Travel Alarm A—Pilot Shutoff Lever B—Travel Lever and Pedal Forward C—Travel Lever and Pedal Rearward CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check. Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine. Place pilot shutoff lever (A) in unlocked (DOWN) position. Push travel pedals or levers forward (B). LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?

YES: Go to next check.

Push travel pedals or pull levers rearward (C).

NO: Check travel alarm 5 A fuse (F5) (marked OPT. 1 ALT). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. Continued on next page

4-2-22

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-28/54

061517

PN=237

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel Alarm Cancel Switch Circuit Check

TX1086700A —UN—08JAN11

Left Console 1— Reversing Fan Switch 2— Seat Heater Switch 3— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check. Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine. NOTE: Travel alarm must operate for this check. Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position. Push travel pedals or levers and allow travel alarm to operate for a minimum of 12 seconds. LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound?

YES: Go to next check.

While continuing travel, push travel alarm cancel switch (3).

NO: Check travel alarm 5 A fuse (F5) (marked OPT. 1 ALT). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LISTEN: Does travel alarm stop sounding?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-23

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-29/54

061517

PN=238

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressurization Check

2 TX1093766 —UN—28JUN13

Hydraulic Oil Tank Cover 1— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure Release Button 2— Hydraulic Oil Tank Cover IMPORTANT: The pressurized oil tank creates pressure at the inlet to the hydraulic pumps. If tank cover does not seal, hydraulic pumps could cavitate and be damaged. Raise boom to full height, then lower boom to ground. Slowly depress pressure release button (1) on hydraulic oil tank cover.

YES: Go to next check.

LISTEN: Is air heard escaping from the pressure release button on hydraulic oil tank cover?

NO: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-30/54

Control Lever Pattern Check—Excavator Pattern

5 7

TX1093767 —UN—28JUN13

Control Lever Pattern Check—Excavator Pattern 1— Arm Out 2— Arm In 3— Swing Left 4— Swing Right 5— Boom Down 6— Boom Up 7— Bucket Load 8— Bucket Dump CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear all persons from the area before operating machine. Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position. Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.

YES: Go to next check.

Slowly move hydraulic levers to all positions.

NO: See Control Lever Pattern Operation. (Section 2-3.)

LOOK: Do bucket, boom, arm, and swing move according to pattern?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-24

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-31/54

061517

PN=239

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Control Lever Pattern Check—Backhoe Pattern

1 7

TX1093769 —UN—28JUN13

Control Lever Pattern Check—Backhoe Pattern 1— Arm Out 2— Arm In 3— Swing Left 4— Swing Right 5— Boom Down 6— Boom Up 7— Bucket Load 8— Bucket Dump CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear all persons from the area before operating machine. Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position. Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.

YES: Go to next check.

Slowly move hydraulic levers to all positions.

NO: See Control Lever Pattern Operation. (Section 2-3.)

LOOK: Do bucket, boom, arm, and swing move according to pattern?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-25

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-32/54

061517

PN=240

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Swing Dynamic Braking Check

45˚

90˚

TX1095482 —UN—28JUN13

Swing Dynamic Braking

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough to swing extended arm and bucket. Machine must be on level ground. Position upperstructure with boom to the front. Move arm to the extended position, bucket to the retracted position, and bucket-to-arm pivot pin at same level as boom-to-frame pivot pin. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Fully actuate swing function. Swing clockwise 90 degrees and then release lever. LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing lever? Position upperstructure with boom to the front. Fully actuate swing function. Swing counterclockwise 90 degrees and then release lever. YES: Go to next check. LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing lever? Continued on next page

4-2-26

NO: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-33/54

061517

PN=241

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Swing Park Brake and Circuit Drift Checks

TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13

Machine Position Fill the bucket with dirt. Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft.) with the boom and insert a block under the track. Move arm to the fully extended position. Raise boom so arm-to-bucket pivot pin are the same height as boom-to-frame pivot pin. Position upperstructure with cab over travel motors, perpendicular to tracks. Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position. Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral. NOTE: Function does not need to be fully actuated to disengage the swing park brake. Slowly actuate bucket load function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold the function over relief for more than 10 seconds. LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged? LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged? Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure. Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position. Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral. Slowly actuate bucket load function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold the function over relief for more than 10 seconds. LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged?

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged? NO: See your authorized dealer. Continued on next page

4-2-27

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-34/54

061517

PN=242

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Swing Power Check

TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13

Machine Position

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Fill the bucket with dirt. Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft.) with the boom and insert a block under the track. Move arm to the fully extended position. Raise boom so arm-to-bucket pivot pin is the same height as boom-to-frame pivot pin. Swing upperstructure clockwise so it is 90 degrees to the slope. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor. Actuate the swing function to swing uphill. LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill? Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure. Actuate the swing function to swing uphill.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-28

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-35/54

061517

PN=243

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Dig Function Drift Check (loaded bucket)

TX1095487 —UN—28JUN13

Machine Position—Loaded Bucket Fill bucket with material to specification. Specification Loaded Bucket—Weight (approximate).............................................................. 2100 kg 4630 lb. Position bucket at maximum reach with bucket pivot pin at same height as boom pivot pin. Retract arm cylinder, then extend about 50 mm (2 in.). Extend bucket cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.). Stop engine. Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes. Measure distance from bottom of bucket to ground. Compare measurements to specifications. Dig Function Drift Specifications (loaded bucket)—Specification Boom Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................ 20 mm 0.79 in. Arm Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................... 30 mm 1.18 in. Bucket Cylinder—Drift........................................................................................... 20 mm 0.79 in. Bottom Of Bucket-To-Ground—Drift................................................................... 150 mm 5.91 in.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specification?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-29

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-36/54

061517

PN=244

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Dig Function Drift Check (empty bucket)

TX1109902 —UN—28JUN13

Machine Position—Empty Bucket Empty bucket of material. Extend arm cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.). Extend bucket cylinder, then retract about 50 mm (2 in.). Lower boom until arm tip position above ground (1) is 1 m (40 in.). Stop engine. Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes. Measure distance from arm tip to ground. Compare measurements to specifications. Dig Function Drift Specifications (empty bucket)—Specification Boom Cylinder—Bucket Empty—Drift.................................................................... 5 mm 0.20 in. Arm Cylinder—Bucket Empty—Drift..................................................................... 15 mm 0.59 in. Bucket Cylinder—Bucket Empty—Drift................................................................. 10 mm 0.39 in. Arm Tip-to-Ground—Drift.................................................................................... 110 mm 4.33 in.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specification?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-30

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-37/54

061517

PN=245

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Swing Priority Circuit Check

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough to swing extended arm and bucket. Machine must be on level ground.

TX1095439 —UN—10AUG11

Swing Priority Check

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button IMPORTANT: Position machine as shown. Operate swing and arm in slowly a few times before attempting to perform check to ensure bucket does not contact machine or ground. Position machine as shown. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Operate swing function and from a running start record time required for 3 complete revolutions. Divide that time by three to get an average time for 1 revolution. Specification Swing Function—Time (1 revolution)...................................................... 5.40—6.10 sec. Position machine as shown, arm extended, bucket curled, and upper structure 90 degrees to tracks. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Raise boom high enough so bucket does not contact the machine or ground during arm in and swing combined operation. Continued on next page

4-2-31

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-38/54

061517

PN=246

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Operate swing function and slowly actuate arm in function when upperstructure is in line with tracks. Record time required for 1 complete revolution. NOTE: Swing speed should not slow when actuating arm in.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does swing speed remain unchanged when actuating arm in?

NO: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-39/54

Control Valve Lift Check Test

TX1095449 —UN—28JUN13

Control Valve Lift

TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13

Engine Speed Dial 1— Engine Speed Dial Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position. Position machine as shown. Slowly lower boom, extend arm (retract cylinder), and dump bucket (retract cylinder).

YES: See your authorized dealer.

LOOK: Do functions move in opposite direction as pilot control levers are first moved, then change direction as levers are moved farther?

NO: Go to next check.

Continued on next page

4-2-32

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-40/54

061517

PN=247

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Boom Up, Arm In, and Bucket Combined Function Operation Check

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Actuate boom up, arm in, and bucket functions in combined operation.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does boom continue to move at approximately the same speed after bucket function is actuated?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-33

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-41/54

061517

PN=248

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Boom Regenerative Valve Operation Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Raise boom and extend the arm to full extension. Actuate the boom down, arm in, and bucket curl functions in combined operation.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does the boom move smoothly through the complete cycle down and up and not hesitate when it goes past the vertical position?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-34

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-42/54

061517

PN=249

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Arm Regenerative Valve Operation Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Extend the arm to full extension and then lower boom so bucket is on the ground. Actuate the boom up and arm in functions in combined operation.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does the arm move smoothly through the complete cycle and not hesitate when it goes through the vertical position?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-35

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-43/54

061517

PN=250

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Bucket Regenerative Valve Operation Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Actuate boom up, arm out and bucket dump functions in combined operation. Actuate boom down, arm in, and bucket curl functions in combined operation.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does the bucket move smoothly through the complete cycle and not hesitate when it goes to the curl position?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-36

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-44/54

061517

PN=251

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel Speed Selection Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn travel speed switch (3) to slow speed (turtle) mode. Actuate travel function to full speed. Turn travel speed switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode. LOOK: Does machine travel speed increase? Actuate a dig function and then return to neutral. LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease and then increase as dig function is actuated and then released? Turn travel speed switch to slow speed (turtle) mode.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-37

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-45/54

061517

PN=252

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel System Tracking Check

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear all persons from the area before operating machine. Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.

TX1120783 —UN—20AUG12

Machine Position 9— Bucket Height Fully extend arm cylinder and bucket cylinder. Position boom so bucket height (9) is approximately 400 mm (16 in.) above ground.

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.

Continued on next page

4-2-38

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-46/54

061517

PN=253

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout

7 5

6 TX1120481 —UN—17AUG12

Tracking Check 5— Distance of Mistrack 6— Acceleration and Deceleration Zone (approximate): 3—5 m (10—16 ft.) 7— Test Line (distance): 20 m (66 ft.) 8— Track Print Operate machine at full travel forward speed on a flat and level surface approximately 30 m (99 ft.). NOTE: When machine mistracks right, hydraulic pump 1 circuit oil flow may be less than specification. When machine mistracks left, hydraulic pump 2 circuit oil flow may be less than specification. Observe direction of mistrack. Create a straight test line 20 m (66 ft.) (7) long between two points on track print (8). Measure and record greatest distance of mistrack (5) between inside edge of track print and test line.

YES: Go to next check.

Repeat procedure in reverse travel.

NO: Check track sag. See Check and Adjust Track Sag. (Section 3-3.)

LOOK: Does machine mistrack less than 200 mm (7.87 in.)?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-39

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-47/54

061517

PN=254

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel System Tracking Checks While Operating a Dig Function

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button NOTE: Machine will slow down during this test. Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode. Operate machine at full speed forward on a flat and level surface. After machine is moving, actuate arm out from neutral to full actuation and extend the arm.

YES: See your authorized dealer.

LOOK: Does machine mistrack excessively when the arm is extended?

NO: Go to next check.

Continued on next page

4-2-40

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-48/54

061517

PN=255

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Travel System Maneuverability Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

4 TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn travel speed switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode. Drive machine at full speed forward down a slope. Turn in each direction. LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order to turn? Repeat the procedure in reverse travel. Turn travel speed switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode. Drive machine at full speed in reverse down a slope. Turn in each direction.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order to NO: See your authorized turn? dealer. Continued on next page

4-2-41

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-49/54

061517

PN=256

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Cycle Times Check CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear all persons from the area before operating machine. NOTE: For accurate cycle time readings, hydraulic oil must be at operating temperature.

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

N O

OFF

ACC

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1136301 —UN—10MAY13

Switch Panel 1— Engine Speed Dial 2— Auto-Idle Switch 3— Travel Speed Switch 4— Power Mode Button 5— Monitor Dial Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position. Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position. Press and release power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. Rotate monitor dial (5) to highlight and select Bucket mode from Work Mode menu. See Main Menu—Work Mode. (Section 2-2.)

TX1095475 —UN—11AUG11

Boom

TX1095499 —UN—28JUN13

Arm, Bucket, Swing Move machine to position shown for each test. Record cycle time for each function. Continued on next page

4-2-42

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-50/54

061517

PN=257

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Specification Boom Raise (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 3.0—3.6 sec. Boom Lower (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 1.9—2.5 sec. Arm In (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time........................................................ 3.4—4.0 sec. Arm Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time...................................................... 2.7—3.3 sec. Bucket Load (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 3.3—3.9 sec. Bucket Dump (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time............................................................................................................ 2.1—2.7 sec. Swing Left or Right, 3 Revolutions From a Running Start—Cycle Time................................................................. 16.3—18.3 sec. Drive 20 m (65 ft.) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse with travel speed switch in FAST position)—Cycle Time........................................................................................................ 13.2—15.6 sec. Drive 20 m (65 ft.) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse with travel speed switch in SLOW position)—Cycle Time........................................................................................................ 20.6—24.6 sec. Track Raised for 3 Revolutions From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse with travel mode switch in FAST position)—Cycle Time............................................................................. 32.8—36.8 sec. Track Raised for 3 Revolutions From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse with travel mode switch in SLOW position)—Cycle Time............................................................................. 32.8—36.8 sec.

YES: Go to next check.

LOOK: Does machine perform within specifications?

NO: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-43

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-51/54

061517

PN=258

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Heater and Air Conditioner Circuit Check PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

H PUSH

VOL/PWR

6 min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

ACC N O

OFF

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11

Switch Panel 5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch 6— Blower Speed Switch Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature. Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position. FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents? Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.

YES: Checks complete.

LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”?

NO: Heater does not operate. Check air conditioner and heater 20 A fuse (F3) (marked HEATER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?

IF OK: See your authorized dealer.

Continued on next page

4-2-44

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-52/54

061517

PN=259

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout Heater And Air Conditioning Controls Check (automatic temperature control)

PUSH MENU/SET

PUSH

MODE

PUSH

TUNE/AM-FM PUSH

/VOL /PWR

PUSH

VOL/PWR

6 min -1

A/I A/I ON OFF OFF INT

ACC N O

OFF

START

PUSH MODE

1 2 3 4 5

OFF 1 2

6 7 8 9 0

TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11

Switch Panel 50.0 h ECO 10:00 AM

0.00 gal/h

9 8

AUTO

24.0˚C

VOL

CH1

81.3 ST MHz

7 TX1160755 —UN—15MAY14

Monitor—Air Conditioner and Heater Display 5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch 6— Blower Speed Switch 7— Fan Speed 8— AUTO Display 9— Vent Position 10— Temperature Setting Key ON, press blower speed switch (6). Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature. Press blower speed switch. LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”? LOOK: Does AUTO display (8), display on monitor? LOOK: Does monitor display vent position (9), fan speed (7), and temperature setting (10)? Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position. LOOK: Does vent position change? LOOK: Does temperature setting increase? Continued on next page

4-2-45

KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-53/54

061517

PN=260

Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents? Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position. LOOK: Does vent position change? LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease? FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents? Press blower speed switch. LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”? (Air conditioner and heater are ON in manual mode.) LOOK: Does AUTO display go OFF? Turn temperature control/mode switch clockwise to maximum heat position. LOOK: Does vent position change? LOOK: Does temperature setting increase? FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents? Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position. LOOK: Does vent position change? LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease? FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents? Press temperature control/mode switch. LOOK: Does vent position change? Repeat for all four vent positions. LOOK: Does vent position change each time switch is pressed?

YES: Checks complete.

Press blower speed switch.

NO: Heater fan does not blow air. Check air conditioner and heater 20 A fuse (F3) (marked HEATER). See Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)

LOOK: Are air conditioner and heater OFF? (Press blower speed switch to start air conditioner and heater).

IF OK: See your authorized dealer. KR46761,0000C3F -19-19FEB15-54/54

4-2-46

061517

PN=261

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedure

Step 1. Operational Checkout Procedure

NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the simplest to verify, to least likely, more difficult to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use all possible means to isolate the problem to a single component or system. Use the following steps to diagnose problems:

Step 2. Troubleshooting Charts Step 3. Adjustments Step 4. See your authorized John Deere dealer. TX,TROUBLESHOOT -19-20JAN11-1/1

4-3-1

061517

PN=262

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Engine Symptom

Problem

Solution

Engine Will Not Crank

Low battery power

Charge or replace battery.

Corroded or loose battery connections Clean battery terminals and connections. Fuse

Check ECU P1 20 A fuse (F8). Check POWER ON 5 A fuse (F17). Replace if necessary.

Engine Cranks but Will Not Start or Low battery power Hard to Start No fuel

Charge or replace battery. Add correct fuel. Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Incorrect fuel

Drain fuel tank and refill with correct fuel.

Fuel filters restricted

Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel tank inlet screen.

Primary fuel filter and water separator Check primary fuel filter and water restricted or not primed separator. Replace filter, prime filter, and bleed air from fuel system. Fuel filter not installed correctly

Install new filter and O-ring. Ensure proper O-ring seal. Bleed air.

Water in fuel tank

Check, drain, and refill fuel tank.

Leaks in fuel system

Locate source of leak and repair as required.

Contaminated fuel

Drain fuel tank. Replace primary fuel filter and water separator. Bleed air. Add clean fuel.

Air in fuel system

Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Slow cranking speed (poor electrical connection)

Clean and tighten battery and starter connections.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Starter

Repair or replace starter. See an authorized John Deere dealer. Continued on next page

4-3-2

KR46761,0000C35 -19-10MAR17-1/5

061517

PN=263

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Problem

Solution

Engine Knocks, Runs Irregularly, or Stops

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Fuel filters restricted

Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel tank inlet screen.

Fuel filter not installed correctly

Install new filter and O-ring. Ensure proper O-ring seal. Bleed air.

Air in fuel system

Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Contaminated fuel

Drain fuel tank. Replace primary fuel filter and water separator. Bleed air. Add clean fuel.

Low crankcase oil level

Fill crankcase to proper oil level.

Coolant temperature low

Check for proper thermostat temperature and operation. Replace if necessary.

Cold oil

Perform hydraulic warm-up procedure.

Injection pump

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Engine speed control system

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Incorrect fuel

Drain fuel tank and refill with correct fuel.

Poor fuel quality

Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel of the proper grade.

Leaks in fuel system

Locate source of leak and repair as required.

Exhaust filter restricted

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Oil leaks

Locate source of leak and repair as required.

Poor fuel quality

Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel of the proper grade.

Engine temperature too high

Check cooling system.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Excessive Fuel Consumption

Excessive Oil Consumption

Continued on next page

4-3-3

KR46761,0000C35 -19-10MAR17-2/5

061517

PN=264

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Engine Idles Poorly

Auto-Idle Does Not Work

Engine Not Developing Full Power

Problem

Solution

Worn engine

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Poor fuel quality

Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel of the proper grade.

Air in fuel system

Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Fuel filters restricted

Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel tank inlet screen.

Fuel filter not installed correctly

Install new filter and O-ring. Ensure proper O-ring seal. Bleed air.

Diesel exhaust fluid empty

Refill diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank. See Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank. (Section 3-1.)

Engine speed control system

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Exhaust filter restricted

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Worn engine

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Auto-idle is off

Turn auto-idle switch to the A/I ON position.

Idle is not above 1000 rpm

Advance engine speed dial to high idle.

Hydraulic functions operating

Release hydraulic functions for 10 seconds.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Fuel filters restricted

Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel tank inlet screen.

Fuel filter not installed correctly

Install new filter and O-ring. Ensure proper O-ring seal. Bleed air.

Contaminated fuel

Drain fuel tank. Change primary fuel filter and water separator. Bleed air. Add clean fuel.

Incorrect fuel

Drain fuel tank and refill with correct fuel.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Continued on next page

4-3-4

KR46761,0000C35 -19-10MAR17-3/5

061517

PN=265

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Engine Oil Pressure Low

Engine Oil Pressure High

Problem

Solution

Diesel exhaust fluid empty

Refill diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank. See Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank. (Section 3-1.)

Exhaust filter restricted

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Incorrect valve clearance

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Worn engine

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Hydraulic issue

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Low crankcase oil level

Fill crankcase to proper oil level.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Oil filter restricted

Replace oil filter.

Oil leaks

Locate source of leak and repair as required.

Excessive oil temperature

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Worn engine

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Fill cooling system to proper level. Engine Coolant Temperature Above Lack of coolant in cooling system Normal Radiator and/or cooler cores restricted Clean radiator and cooler cores as or dirty required.

Engine Emits Excessive Black or Gray Exhaust Smoke

Loose surge tank cap

Secure cap properly.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Low crankcase oil level

Fill crankcase to proper oil level.

Incorrect engine oil

Drain crankcase and refill with correct oil.

Engine overloaded

Reduce engine load.

Incorrect fuel

Drain fuel tank and refill with correct fuel.

Restricted or dirty air intake or exhaust Clean air intake and exhaust system. system

Continued on next page

4-3-5

KR46761,0000C35 -19-10MAR17-4/5

061517

PN=266

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Engine Emits Excessive White Exhaust Smoke

Problem

Solution

Coolant temperature low

Check for proper thermostat temperature and operation. Replace if necessary.

Exhaust filter is cracked or damaged

See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Incorrect fuel

Drain fuel tank and refill with correct fuel.

Cold engine

Run engine until warm.

Exhaust filter is cracked or damaged

See an authorized John Deere dealer. KR46761,0000C35 -19-10MAR17-5/5

4-3-6

061517

PN=267

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Hydraulic System Symptom

Problem

Solution

No Hydraulic Functions

Pilot shutoff lever

Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.

Low hydraulic oil level

Fill tank to proper oil level.

Suction screen restricted

Inspect and clean.

Fuse

Check SOLENOID 20 A fuse (F4). Replace if necessary.

Hydraulic Functions are Slow or Have Little or No Power

Hydraulic Oil Overheats

Oil Foams

Low hydraulic oil level

Fill tank to proper oil level.

Cold oil

Perform hydraulic oil warm-up procedure.

Incorrect oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with correct oil.

Suction screen restricted

Inspect and clean.

Hydraulic tank cap/cover

Replace cap/cover.

Engine speed too slow

Increase engine speed.

Incorrect oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with correct oil.

Low hydraulic oil level

Fill tank to proper oil level.

Contaminated oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with clean oil.

Restricted radiator or oil cooler

Clean and straighten fins.

Cooler cores restricted

Clean cooler cores.

Restricted filters

Install new filters.

High or low oil level

Correct level.

Incorrect oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with correct oil.

Contaminated oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with clean oil.

Water in oil

Drain hydraulic tank and refill with oil.

Air leak in oil line from reservoir

Repair leak.

Continued on next page

4-3-7

KR46761,0000C45 -19-19MAY16-1/2

061517

PN=268

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Problem

Solution

Kinks or dents in oil lines

Inspect and correct.

No Swing Function

Pilot shutoff lever

Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position. Inspect and correct.

Swing Function is Jerky

Pilot control valve hoses pinched or kinked Lack of grease in swing bearing

Fill with grease.

Rocks or mud jammed in track frame

Remove and repair.

Pilot control valve hoses pinched or kinked Cold oil

Inspect and correct.

Engine speed too slow

Increase engine speed.

Track sag adjustment

Adjust track sag.

Rocks or mud jammed in track frame

Remove and repair.

Air filters restricted or dirty

Replace air filter elements.

Fuel filters restricted

Replace filters. Bleed air. Clean fuel tank inlet screen.

Air in fuel system

Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)

Slow Travel Speed Only

Travel is Jerky

Engine Stops When Travel or Control Lever Actuated

Perform hydraulic warm-up procedure.

KR46761,0000C45 -19-19MAY16-2/2

4-3-8

061517

PN=269

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting

Electrical System Symptom

Problem

Solution

No Electrical Functions

Battery disconnect switch is in the OFF position

Turn battery disconnect switch to the ON position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)

Batteries undercharged or dead

Recharge or replace.

Fuse

Check ALT 65-amp fuse (F60). Check BAT 45-amp fuse (F61). Replace if necessary.

Batteries Undercharged

Loose or corroded connections

Clean and tighten connections or replace batteries.

Batteries Will Not Take a Charge

Loose or corroded connections

Clean and tighten connections or replace batteries.

Weak batteries

Replace both batteries.

Cracked battery case

Replace battery.

High ambient temperature

Refill with distilled water and recharge battery.

No battery hold-down clamp

Replace battery and install hold-down clamp.

Loose battery hold-down clamp

Replace battery and tighten hold-down clamp.

Frozen battery

Replace battery. Keep batteries fully charged in cold weather.

Low water level

Add distilled water and recharge battery.

Dirty or wet battery top, causing discharge Corroded or loose battery cables

Clean and wipe battery top dry.

Broken battery post

Wiggle battery post by hand. If post wiggles or turns, replace both batteries.

Battery disconnect switch is in the OFF position

Turn battery disconnect switch to the ON position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)

Battery undercharged or dead

Recharge or replace.

Battery cables making poor connections

Clean and tighten connections.

Battery Uses Too Much Water

Cracked Battery Case

Low Battery Output

Starter Will Not Turn

Continued on next page

4-3-9

Clean and tighten battery cables.

KR46761,0000C36 -19-04FEB16-1/3

061517

PN=270

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

Problem

Solution

Fuse

Check POWER ON 5-amp fuse (F17). Replace if necessary.

Starter

Repair or replace starter. See an authorized dealer.

Starter pinion jammed in flywheel gear Repair or replace starter or ring gear. See an authorized dealer. Starter Turns but Will Not Crank Engine

Starter

Repair or replace starter. See an authorized dealer.

Engine Cranks Slowly

Battery cables damaged or broken internally Battery or starter cable connections loose or corroded Batteries undercharged or dead

Inspect and replace cables.

Low battery voltage

Recharge or replace.

Starter

Repair or replace starter. See an authorized dealer.

Starter

Repair or replace starter. See an authorized dealer.

Key switch malfunction

Disconnect battery ground. See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Starter relay

Disconnect battery ground. See an authorized John Deere dealer.

Starter Continues to Run After Engine Starts

Charging Indicator Light On, Engine Running

Clean and tighten connections. Recharge or replace.

Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical Loose or corroded electrical connections on battery, ground strap, connections. starter, or alternator Worn drive belt Replace belt. Fuse

Check CONTROLLER 5-amp fuse (F10). Check ECU P1 20-amp fuse (F8). Check ALT 65-amp fuse (F60). Replace if necessary.

Noisy Alternator

Worn drive belt

Replace belt.

Worn pulleys

Replace pulleys and belt.

Pulley misaligned

Adjust alternator mount.

Continued on next page

4-3-10

KR46761,0000C36 -19-04FEB16-2/3

061517

PN=271

Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting Symptom

No Monitor Panel Indicators or Gauges Work

Problem

Solution

Alternator bearing

Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley by hand. If any roughness is felt, repair alternator.

Fuse

Check CONTROLLER 5-amp fuse (F10). Replace if necessary.

No Switch Panel Switches or Engine Speed Dial Work

Fuse

Check POWER ON 5-amp fuse (F17). Check MONITOR 5-amp fuse (F14). Check SOLENOID 20-amp fuse (F4). Check BACK UP 10-amp fuse (F9). Replace if necessary. KR46761,0000C36 -19-04FEB16-3/3

Software Update Symptom

Problem

Solution

Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Updates Not Operating Properly

Software updates not operating properly

Follow screen instructions on the display monitor. If problem persists, see an authorized John Deere dealer.

Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company OUT4001,00006CA -19-19MAY15-1/1

4-3-11

061517

PN=272

Miscellaneous—Storage Prepare Machine for Storage

T5813AM —UN—09FEB89

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Do not use biodiesel during machine storage. When using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum diesel for long-term storage. 1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during storage to prevent water buildup due to condensation. NOTE: For blends up to and including B20, it is recommended that biodiesel be used within 3 months of its manufacture. For blends greater than B20, it is recommended that the biodiesel be used within 45 days. The poor oxidation stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in long-term storage problems. John Deere does not recommend using biodiesel in engines powering standby applications or vehicles operating on a seasonal basis. Consult an authorized John Deere dealer or fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel storage and performance of biodiesel fuels. These additives must be added to the biodiesel close to its time of production for them to be effective. 2. Repair worn or damaged parts. If necessary, install new parts to avoid needless delays later. 3. Replace air cleaner elements.

Prepare Machine for Storage

IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy painted finish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor on painted areas. 7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. If not, coat exposed cylinder rods with LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor. 8. Lubricate all grease points. NOTE: If the batteries are kept disconnected for more than 1 month or when the batteries are reconnected, resetting of the controllers may be required. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer. 9. Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position. See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)

4. Drain water separator. IMPORTANT: High-pressure washing greater than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi) can damage freshly painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to air dry for a minimum of 30 days after receipt of machine before cleaning parts or machines with high pressure. Use low-pressure wash operations until 30 days have elapsed. 5. Wash the machine. Use low-pressure wash operations (less than 1379 kPa [13.8 bar] [200 psi]) until 30 days after receipt of machine have elapsed. Paint areas to prevent rust. Replace decals where needed.

10. Remove the batteries and store in a dry, protected place after charging fully. If not removed, disconnect the negative battery cable from the (-) terminal. 11. Add a fuel stabilizer additive and top off fuel tank with fuel to prevent condensation. 12. Store machine in a dry, protected place. If stored outside, cover with a waterproof material. 13. Place a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the right pilot control lever. 14. Remove keys and lock all covers and doors.

6. Apply oil to track chains. Run machine back and forth several times. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from freezing to ground. LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works KR46761,0000C07 -19-24MAR16-1/1

4-4-1

061517

PN=273

Miscellaneous—Storage

Monthly Storage Procedure

T6191AA —UN—18OCT88

CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. Start engine ONLY in a well-ventilated area. 1. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank when air temperature is above freezing. 2. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with a cleaning solvent. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage. During cold temperatures, check fluidity of engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy and/or jelly-like rather than liquid, DO NOT attempt to start engine. Use external heat source to warm the crankcase until oil appears fluid.

Clean Cylinder Rods

T6181AU —UN—18OCT88

3. Check all fluid levels. If low, check for leaks and add oil as required. 4. Check belts. 5. Check condition of all hoses and connections. 6. Check battery electrolyte level. Charge and install battery. 7. For machines with tires, check condition of tires and tire pressure. For machines with tracks, check condition of tracks and track sag. On crawler machines with non-sealed and lubricated track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints. Run machine back and forth several times. 8. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from freezing to ground. 9. Fill fuel tank. 10. Pre-lubricate turbocharger bearings if equipped:

Check Oil on Dipstick

Run at 1/2 speed for 5 minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle.

• If engine does not start or runs poorly after starting, change fuel filters. Bleed fuel system.

12. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc. CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement. Clear the area of all persons before running machine through the operation procedure. 13. Make sure the area is clear to allow for movement. Cycle all hydraulic functions several times. Check condition of all hoses and connections.

a. Disconnect fuel shutoff fuse. b. Crank engine for 10 seconds.

14. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if possible. Shut engine off.

c. Connect fuel shutoff fuse. 11. Inspect engine compartment and remove any foreign material that may have accumulated. Start engine and run until machine reaches operating temperature.

15. Apply LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod areas.

LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works CN93077,000069F -19-13APR16-1/1

4-4-2

061517

PN=274

Miscellaneous—Storage

Preparing Engine for Long-Term Storage IMPORTANT: Any time the engine is not used for over 6 months, the following recommendations for storing and removing the engine from storage helps to minimize corrosion and deterioration. IMPORTANT: Long-term storage is not advised when using biodiesel. For storage longer than 1 year, use straight hydrocarbon fuel. If biodiesel must be used, it is recommended the blend not exceed B7 and a high-quality fuel stabilizer be used. Storage should not exceed 1 year. For more information, see BioDiesel Fuel. (Section 3-1.) NOTE: The following storage preparations are used for long-term engine storage up to 1 year. After that, the engine should be started, warmed up, and retreated for an extended storage period. 1. Change engine oil and replace filter. Used oil does not give adequate protection. Add 30 mL of rust preventive oil to the engine crankcase for every 1 L of engine oil, or 1 oz of rust preventative oil per 1 qt of engine oil. This rust preventive oil should be a SAE 10 oil with 1%—4% morpholine or equivalent vapor corrosion inhibitor such as NOX RUST VCI-10 OIL from Daubert Chemical Company, Inc. 2. Replace air cleaner. 3. Draining and flushing of cooling system is not necessary if the engine is only stored for less than 1 year. However, for extended storage periods of 1 year or longer, the recommendation is that the cooling system be drained, flushed, and refilled. Refill with appropriate coolant. See Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners). (Section 3-1.) 4. Prepare a solution of diesel fuel and rust preventive oil in a temporary container, add 78 mL of rust preventive oil per 1 L of diesel fuel (10 oz of rust preventive oil per 1 gal of diesel fuel).

the engine fuel intake located before the fuel filters. Run another temporary line from the fuel return to the temporary container. This set up allows rust preventive oil solution to circulate through the injection system during cranking. IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to starter. Do not operate starter more than 30 seconds at a time. Wait at least 2 minutes for starter to cool before trying again. 6. Crank the engine several revolutions with starter. Do not allow the engine to start. Cranking the engine without starting allows rust preventive oil solution to circulate. See an authorized John Deere dealer for the proper procedure. 7. Remove temporary lines installed in step 5 and replace any lines or plugs previously removed. 8. Loosen (or remove) and store fan and alternator poly-vee belt. 9. Remove and clean batteries. Store them in a cool, dry place and keep them fully charged. 10. Disengage the clutch for any driveline. 11. For extended storage periods of 1 year or longer, drain or siphon diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) from DEF tank. 12. Clean the exterior of the engine with salt-free water and touch up any scratched or chipped painted surfaces with a high-quality paint. 13. Coat all exposed bare metal surfaces with grease or corrosion inhibitor if not feasible to paint. 14. Seal all openings on engine with plastic bags and tape. 15. Store the engine in a dry, protected place. If engine must be stored outside, cover it with a waterproof canvas or other suitable protective material and use a strong, waterproof tape.

5. Remove existing lines and plugs as required. Run a temporary line from the temporary container to KR46761,0000FF0 -19-05FEB16-1/1

4-4-3

061517

PN=275

Miscellaneous—Storage

Removing Engine From Long-Term Storage NOTE: The following storage removal procedure is used for long-term engine storage up to 1 year. After that, the engine should be started, warmed up, and retreated for an extended storage period.

IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to starter. DO NOT operate starter more than 30 seconds at a time. Wait at least 2 minutes for starter to cool before trying again.

Refer to the appropriate section for detailed services listed below or have an authorized servicing dealer or engine distributor perform unfamiliar services.

8. Crank engine for 20 seconds with starter. Do not allow the engine to start. Wait 2 minutes and crank engine an additional 20 seconds to ensure bearing surfaces are adequately lubricated.

1. Remove all protective coverings from engine. Unseal all openings in engine and remove covering from electrical systems. 2. Remove grease from all exposed metal surfaces. 3. Remove the batteries from storage. Install batteries (fully charged) and connect the terminals. 4. Install fan and alternator poly-vee belt if removed. 5. Fill fuel tank. 6. If drained, fill diesel exhaust fluid tank with new DEF. If not drained, DEF must pass visual, smell, and concentration checks before the engine can be ran. See Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)—Use in Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines. (Section 3-1.)

See an authorized John Deere dealer for the proper procedure. 9. Start engine and run at low idle and no load for 15 minutes. 10. Shut engine off. Change engine oil and replace filter. 11. Warm up engine and check all gauges before placing engine under load. 12. On the first day of operation after storage, check overall engine for leaks and check all gauges for correct operation. NOTE: If using biodiesel blends after long-term storage, frequency of fuel filter plugging can increase initially.

7. Perform all appropriate prestarting checks. See Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting. (Section 2-3.) CN93077,00005FE -19-11JAN16-1/1

4-4-4

061517

PN=276

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers Record Product Identification Number (PIN) Purchase Date

TX1156411 —UN—27MAR14

Product Identification Number (PIN)

Record all 17 characters of the product identification number (PIN). The PIN plate (1) is located on the front right corner of the operator's station frame. 1— PIN Plate Product Identification Number (PIN) Plate

KR46761,0000C38 -19-04APR16-1/1

Record Engine Serial Number Engine Serial Number

TX1157064 —UN—01APR14

The engine serial number plate (1) is located on the engine above the starter. 1— Engine Serial Number Plate

TX1157049 —UN—01APR14

Engine Serial Number Plate Location

Engine Serial Number Plate KR46761,0000C39 -19-02MAY14-1/1

4-5-1

061517

PN=277

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers Travel Motor Serial Number Travel Motor Serial Number TX1086495A —UN—04JAN11

NOTE: Remove cover to access travel motor serial number plate (1). The travel motor serial number plate (1) is located behind the travel motor cover. 1— Travel Motor Serial Number Plate Travel Motor Serial Number Plate (left side shown)

ER79617,0000D8E -19-29JAN15-1/1

Record Swing Motor Serial Number Swing Motor Serial Number:

TX1156395A —UN—17MAR14

The swing motor serial number plate (1) is located on top of the swing motor. 1— Swing Motor Serial Number Plate

Swing Motor Serial Number KR46761,0000BF4 -19-15APR16-1/1

4-5-2

061517

PN=278

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

Record Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number—If Equipped Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number:

The hydraulic coupler serial number plate (1) is located on the front side of the coupler.

TX1086497A —UN—04JAN11

1— Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number Plate

TX1086500A —UN—04JAN11

Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number Plate Location

Hydraulic Coupler Serial Number Plate ER79617,0000D8F -19-05JAN16-1/1

Record Hydraulic Pump Serial Number Hydraulic Pump Serial Number Hydraulic Pump Serial Number TX1157002A —UN—01APR14

Open right rear service door to access hydraulic pump serial number plate (1). Hydraulic pump serial number plate is located on the front of the hydraulic pump. 1— Hydraulic Pump Serial Number Plate (2 used)

Hydraulic Pump Serial Number Plate KR46761,0000C37 -19-01FEB16-1/1

4-5-3

061517

PN=279

Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers

1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory of all product and component serial numbers. 2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates. 3. Other steps you can take: - Mark your machine with your own numbering system - Take color photographs from several angles of each machine

TS1680 —UN—09DEC03

Keep Proof of Ownership

DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1

1. Install vandal-proof devices. 2. When machine is in storage: - Lower equipment to the ground - Set wheels to widest position to make loading more difficult - Remove any keys and batteries 3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of exits and lock your storage buildings. 4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and fenced area. 5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts immediately to law enforcement agencies. 6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.

TS230 —UN—24MAY89

Keep Machines Secure

DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1

4-5-4

061517

PN=280

Miscellaneous—Specifications Engine Specifications Item

Measurement

Specification

John Deere PowerTech PSS 9.0 L

Type

Turbocharged with air-to-air charge air cooler

Bore And Stroke

116 x 129 mm 4.56 x 5.06 in.

Cylinders

Displacement

9.0 L 549 cu in.

Net Torque @ 1300 RPM

1220.0 N·m 899.8 lb.-ft.

Compression Ratio

16:1

Power At 1900 RPM

202 kW 271 hp

Cooling Fan

Variable Hydraulic Suction

Electrical System

24 Volt

Batteries (2) 12 volt

320 Minutes Reserve Capacity KR46761,0000BB2 -19-02FEB16-1/1

Drain and Refill Capacities Item

Measurement

Specification

Fuel Tank

Capacity

628.0 L 166.0 gal.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. —811697)

Capacity

35.0 L 9.3 gal.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank (S.N. 811698— )

Capacity

35.6 L 9.4 gal.

Cooling System

Capacity

39.7 L 10.5 gal.

Engine

Oil Capacity, Including Filter Change

27.0 L 7.1 gal.

Hydraulic Tank

Oil Capacity

193.0 L 51.0 gal.

Hydraulic System

Oil Capacity

290.0 L 76.6 gal.

Swing Gear Case

Oil Capacity

11.8 L 3.1 gal.

Travel Gear Case (each)

Oil Capacity

8.5 L 2.2 gal.

Pump Drive Gear Case

Oil Capacity

1.1 L 1.2 qt. JL58967,00006DD -19-17NOV16-1/1

4-6-1

061517

PN=281

Miscellaneous—Specifications

TX1156817 —UN—02APR14

Machine Specifications

Excavator 1— Sprocket Center To Idler Center 2— Undercarriage Length 3— Counterweight Clearance

4— Rear End Swing Radius 5— Overall Width 6— Cab Height 7— Minimum Ground Clearance

8— Center Of Sprocket To Center 11— Overall Length Of Sprocket 12— Transport Height 9— Track Shoe Width 10— Undercarriage Width

(32 in.) shoes, 6928 kg (15 274 lb.) counterweight, 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.) arm, 1160 kg (2557 lb.) 1.76 m 3 (2.3 yd. 3) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175 lb.) operator and standard equipment.

NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards. Except where otherwise noted these specifications are based on a machine equipped with 800 mm Item

Measurement

Specification

1—Sprocket Center To Idler Center

Distance

4050 mm 13 ft. 3 in.

2—Undercarriage

Length

4940 mm 16 ft. 2 in.

3—Counterweight Clearance

Distance

1180 mm 3 ft. 10 in.

4—Rear End Swing Radius

Distance

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in.

5—Upperstructure

Width

2990 mm 9 ft. 10 in.

6—Cab

Height

3140 mm 10 ft. 4 in.

7—Minimum Ground Clearance

Distance

500 mm 1 ft. 8 in.

8—Center Of Sprocket To Center Of Sprocket

Distance Continued on next page

4-6-2

2590 mm 8 ft. 6 in.

KR46761,0000C0A -19-02MAY14-1/2

061517

PN=282

Miscellaneous—Specifications Item

Measurement

Specification

9—Track Shoe

Width

600 mm 24 in. 700 mm 28 in. 800 mm 32 in.

10—Machine

Overall Width

With 600 mm shoes: 3190 mm With 24 in. shoes: 10 ft. 6 in. With 700 mm shoes: 3290 mm With 28 in. shoes: 10 ft. 10 in. With 800 mm shoes: 3390 mm With 32 in. shoes: 11 ft. 2 in.

11—Machine

Overall Length

With 2.10 m arm: 10 990 mm With 6 ft. 10 in. arm: 36 ft. 1 in. With 2.67 m arm and 5.70 m boom: 11 330 mm With 8 ft. 9 in. arm and 18 ft. 8 in. boom: 37 ft. 2 in. With 2.67 m arm and 6.40 m boom: 11 350 mm With 8 ft. 9 in. arm and 21 ft. 0 in. boom: 37 ft. 3 in. With 3.20 m arm: 11 200 mm With 10 ft. 6 in. arm: 36 ft. 9 in. With 4.00 m arm: 11 290 mm With 13 ft. 1 in. arm: 37 ft. 0 in.

12—Machine

Transport Height

With 2.10 m arm: 3680 mm With 6 ft. 10 in. arm: 12 ft. 1 in. With 2.67 m arm: 3470 mm With 8 ft. 9 in. arm: 11 ft. 5 in. With 3.20 m arm: 3270 mm With 10 ft. 6 in. arm: 10 ft. 9 in. With 4.00 m arm: 3600 mm With 13 ft. 1 in. arm: 11 ft. 10 in.

Machine

Operating Weight

35 650 kg 78 550 lb. KR46761,0000C0A -19-02MAY14-2/2

4-6-3

061517

PN=283

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Working Ranges

2 7

TX1156824 —UN—28MAR14

TX1156824 Working Ranges 1— Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level 2— Maximum Digging Reach

6— Maximum Digging Depth 8— Maximum Vertical Wall 7— Maximum Digging Depth (flat 9— Tail Swing Radius bottom)

3— Minimum Swing Radius 4— Maximum Cutting Height 5— Maximum Dumping Height

m 3 (2.3 yd. 3) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175 lb.) operator and standard equipment.

Continued on next page

4-6-4

KR46761,0000C0B -19-02MAY14-1/4

061517

PN=284

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Working Ranges—equipped with a 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.) Arm Item

Measurement

Specification

1—Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level

Distance

9160 mm 30 ft. 1 in.

2—Maximum Digging Reach

Distance

9410 mm 30 ft. 10 in.

3—Minimum Swing Radius

Radius

4040 mm 13 ft. 3 in.

4—Maximum Cutting Height

Height

9430 mm 30 ft. 11 in.

5—Maximum Dumping Height

Height

6390 mm 21 ft. 0 in.

6—Maximum Digging Depth

Depth

5620 mm 18 ft. 5 in.

7—Maximum Digging Depth (flat bottom)

Depth

5390 mm 17 ft. 8 in.

8—Maximum Vertical Wall

Depth

4150 mm 13 ft. 7 in.

9—Tail Swing Radius

Radius

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in.

Working Ranges—equipped with a 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.) Arm and 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.) Boom Item

Measurement

Specification

1—Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level

Distance

9690 mm 31 ft. 9 in.

2—Maximum Digging Reach

Distance

9930 mm 32 ft. 7 in.

3—Minimum Swing Radius

Radius

4050 mm 13 ft. 3 in.

4—Maximum Cutting Height

Height

9660 mm 31 ft. 8 in.

5—Maximum Dumping Height

Height

6600 mm 21 ft. 8 in.

6—Maximum Digging Depth

Depth

6220 mm 20 ft. 5 in.

7—Maximum Digging Depth (flat bottom)

Depth

6020 mm 19 ft. 9 in.

8—Maximum Vertical Wall

Depth

4780 mm 15 ft. 8 in.

9—Tail Swing Radius

Radius

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in.

Working Ranges—equipped with a 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.) Arm and 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Boom: Item

Measurement

Specification Continued on next page

4-6-5

KR46761,0000C0B -19-02MAY14-2/4

061517

PN=285

Miscellaneous—Specifications Item

Measurement

Specification

1—Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level

Distance

1036 mm 34 ft. 0 in.

2—Maximum Digging Reach

Distance

1057 mm 34 ft. 8 in.

3—Minimum Swing Radius

Radius

4610 mm 15 ft. 1 in.

4—Maximum Cutting Height

Height

9990 mm 32 ft. 9 in.

5—Maximum Dumping Height

Height

6940 mm 22 ft. 9 in.

6—Maximum Digging Depth

Depth

6840 mm 22 ft. 5 in.

7—Maximum Digging Depth (flat bottom)

Depth

6640 mm 21 ft. 9 in.

8—Maximum Vertical Wall

Depth

5510 mm 18 ft. 1 in.

9—Tail Swing Radius

Radius

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in.

Working Ranges—equipped with a 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.) Arm Item

Measurement

Specification

1—Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level

Distance

10 890 mm 35 ft. 9 in.

2—Maximum Digging Reach

Distance

11 100 mm 36 ft. 5 in.

3—Minimum Swing Radius

Radius

4460 mm 14 ft. 8 in.

4—Maximum Cutting Height

Height

10 360 mm 34 ft. 0 in.

5—Maximum Dumping Height

Height

7240 mm 23 ft. 9 in.

6—Maximum Digging Depth

Depth

7380 mm 24 ft. 3 in.

7—Maximum Digging Depth (flat bottom)

Depth

7210 mm 23 ft. 8 in.

8—Maximum Vertical Wall

Depth

6420 mm 21 ft. 1 in.

9—Tail Swing Radius

Radius

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in.

Working Ranges—equipped with a 4.00 m (13 ft. 1 in.) Arm Item

Measurement

1—Maximum Digging Reach At Ground Level

Distance

Specification

Continued on next page

4-6-6

11 670 mm 38 ft. 3 in.

KR46761,0000C0B -19-02MAY14-3/4

061517

PN=286

Miscellaneous—Specifications Item

Measurement

Specification

2—Maximum Digging Reach

Distance

11 860 mm 38 ft. 11 in.

3—Minimum Swing Radius

Radius

4470 mm 14 ft. 8 in.

4—Maximum Cutting Height

Height

10 750 mm 35 ft. 3 in.

5—Maximum Dumping Height

Height

7630 mm 25 ft. 0 in.

6—Maximum Digging Depth

Depth

8180 mm 26 ft. 10 in.

7—Maximum Digging Depth (flat bottom)

Depth

8040 mm 26 ft. 5 in.

8—Maximum Vertical Wall

Depth

7270 mm 23 ft. 10 in.

9—Tail Swing Radius

Radius

3600 mm 11 ft. 10 in. KR46761,0000C0B -19-02MAY14-4/4

4-6-7

061517

PN=287

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.)

Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.)

Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

10 841* (23 900*)

4.5 (15)

14 674* (32 350*)

11 635* (25 650*)

3.0 (10)

12 746 (28 100)

8709 (19 200)

1.5 (5)

12 315 (27 150)

8528 (18 800)

Ground Line

19 028* (41 950*)

12 088 (26 650) 12 111 (26 700)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

17 305* (38 150*)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

13 676* (30 150*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8301 (18 300)

6.0 (20) 12 905 (28 450)

4.5 (15)

7983 (17 600)

3.0 (10)

7530 (16 600)

5171 (11 400)

1.5 (5)

7167 (15 800)

5012 (11 050)

Ground Line

10 909 (24 050)

6963 (15 350) 6985 (15 400)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

11 000 (24 250)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

11 317 (24 950) KR46761,0000C23 -19-28APR14-1/1

4-6-8

061517

PN=288

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.)

Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.)

Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

10 841* (23 900*)

4.5 (15)

14 674* (32 350*)

11 635* (25 650*)

3.0 (10)

12 859* (28 350*)

8868 (19 550)

1.5 (5)

12 542 (27 650)

8709 (19 200)

Ground Line

19 028* (41 950*)

12 315 (27 150) 12 338 (27 200)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

17 305* (38 150*)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

13 676* (30 150*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8437 (18 600)

6.0 (20) 13 109 (28 900)

4.5 (15)

8119 (17 900)

3.0 (10)

7666 (16 900)

5284 (11 650)

1.5 (5)

7280 (16 050)

5126 (11 300)

Ground Line

11 113 (24 500)

7099 (15 650) 7121 (15 700)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

11 204 (24 700)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

11 521 (25 400) KR46761,0000C24 -19-23APR14-1/1

4-6-9

061517

PN=289

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.)

Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.)

Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

10 841* (23 900*)

4.5 (15)

14 674* (32 350*)

11 635* (25 650*)

3.0 (10)

12 859* (28 350*)

8868 (19 550)

1.5 (5)

12 791 (28 200)

8868 (19 550)

Ground Line

19 028* (41 950*)

12 565 (27 700) 12 587 (27 750)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

17 305* (38 150*)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

13 676* (30 150*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8573 (18 900)

6.0 (20) 13 313 (29 350)

4.5 (15)

8255 (18 200)

3.0 (10)

7802 (17 200)

5375 (11 850)

1.5 (5)

7439 (16 400)

5216 (11 500)

Ground Line

11 317 (24 950)

7235 (15 950) 7257 (16 000)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

11 408 (25 150)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

11 725 (25 850) KR46761,0000C25 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-10

061517

PN=290

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.)

Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.)

Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

10 841* (23 900*)

4.5 (15)

14 674* (32 350*)

11 635* (25 650*)

3.0 (10)

12 859* (28 350*)

8981 (19 800)

1.5 (5)

12 701 (28 000)

8800 (19 400)

Ground Line

19 028* (41 950*)

12 474 (27 500) 12 496 (27 550)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

17 305* (38 150*)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

13 676* (30 150*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8528 (18 800)

6.0 (20) 13 245 (29 200)

4.5 (15)

8187 (18 050)

3.0 (10)

7756 (17 100)

5330 (11 750)

1.5 (5)

7371 (16 250)

5194 (11 450)

Ground Line

11 249 (24 800)

7189 (15 850) 7212 (15 900)

-1.5 (-5)

21 818* (48 100*)

11 317 (24 950)

-3.0 (-10)

17 463* (38 500*)

11 657 (25 700) KR46761,0000C26 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-11

061517

PN=291

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9888* (21 800*)

4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

10 864* (23 950*)

8981 (19 800)

3.0 (10)

16 579* (36 550*)

12 270* (27 050*)

8754 (19 300)

1.5 (5)

18 847* (41 550*)

12 406 (27 350)

8550 (18 850)

Ground Line

19 323* (42 600*)

12 111 (26 700)

8391 (18 500)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

18 189* (40 100*)

12 043 (26 550)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

15 377* (33 900*)

10 977* (24 200*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8459 (18 650)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

13 268 (29 250)

8119 (17 900)

5420 (11 950)

3.0 (10)

12 156 (26 800)

7643 (16 850)

5216 (11 500)

1.5 (5)

11 317 (24 950)

7235 (15 950)

5012 (11 050)

Ground Line

10 954 (24 150)

6963 (15 350)

4899 (10 800)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

10 909 (24 050)

6895 (15 200)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

11 136 (24 550)

7076 (15 600) KR46761,0000C27 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-12

061517

PN=292

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9888* (21 800*)

4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

10 864* (23 950*)

9185 (20 250)

3.0 (10)

16 579* (36 550*)

12 270* (27 050*)

8958 (19 750)

1.5 (5)

18 847* (41 550*)

12 678 (27 950)

8732 (19 250)

Ground Line

19 323* (42 600*)

12 383 (27 300)

8956 (18 950)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

18 189* (40 100*)

12 315 (27 150)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

15 377* (33 900*)

10 977* (24 200*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8641 (19 050)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

8278 (18 250)

5534 (12 200)

3.0 (10)

12 406 (27 350)

7824 (17 250)

5352 (11 800)

1.5 (5)

11 567 (25 500)

7394 (16 300)

5148 (11 350)

Ground Line

11 204 (24 700)

7144 (15 750)

5012 (11 050)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

11 181 (24 650)

7076 (15 600)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

11 385 (25 100)

7235 (15 950) KR46761,0000C28 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-13

061517

PN=293

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9888* (21 800*)

4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

10 864* (23 950*)

9389 (20 700)

3.0 (10)

16 579* (36 550*)

12 270* (27 050*)

9185 (20 250)

1.5 (5)

18 847* (41 550*)

12 995 (28 650)

8958 (19 750)

Ground Line

19 323* (42 600*)

12 678 (27 950)

8822 (19 450)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

18 189* (40 100*)

12 610 (27 800)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

15 377* (33 900*)

10 977* (24 200*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8822 (19 450)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

8482 (18 700)

5693 (12 550)

3.0 (10)

12 678 (27 950)

8006 (17 650)

5488 (12 100)

1.5 (5)

11 839 (26 100)

7575 (16 700)

5284 (11 650)

Ground Line

11 476 (25 300)

7326 (16 150)

5171 (11 400)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

11 453 (25 250)

7257 (16 000)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

11 680 (25 750)

7439 (16 400) KR46761,0000C29 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-14

061517

PN=294

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9888* (21 800*)

4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

10 864* (23 950*)

9299 (20 500)

3.0 (10)

16 579* (36 550*)

12 270* (27 050*)

9095 (20 050)

1.5 (5)

18 847* (41 550*)

12 895 (28 350)

8868 (19 550)

Ground Line

19 323* (42 600*)

12 565 (27 700)

8732 (19 250)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

18 189* (40 100*)

12 474 (27 500)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

15 377* (33 900*)

10 977* (24 200*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8732 (19 250)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

13 404* (29 550*)

8391 (18 500)

5625 (12 400)

3.0 (10)

12 565* (27 700*)

7938 (17 500)

5420 (11 950)

1.5 (5)

11 725* (25 850*)

7507 (16 550)

5239 (11 550)

Ground Line

11 362 (25 050)

7235 (15 950)

5103 (11 250)

-1.5 (-5)

19 686* (43 400*)

11 340 (25 000)

7189 (15 850)

-3.0 (-10)

20 752* (45 750*)

11 544 (25 450)

7348 (16 200) KR46761,0000C2A -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-15

061517

PN=295

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.) Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9496* (20 636*)

8705* (19 093*)

4.5 (15)

14 206* (30 447*)

10 894* (23 562*)

9279* (20 190*)

3.0 (10)

17 742* (38 067*)

12 506* (27 011*)

9256 (19 887)

(36 850*)

12 962 (27 855)

9003 (19 353)

18 814* (42 867*)

12 691 (27 257)

8838 (19 002) 8800 (18 933)

1.5 (5) Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

12 495* (28 545*)

18 754* (40 705*)

12 622 (27 105)

-3.0 (-10)

21 868*) (47 544*)

16 665* (36 066*)

12 606* (27 142*)

-4.5 (-15)

16 500* (35 354*)

12 776* (27 209*)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8947 (19 229)

5961 (12 746)

4.5 (15)

13 627 (29 406)

8535 (18 386)

5821 (12 489)

3.0 (10)

12 433 (26 843)

8019 (17 283)

5597 (12 028)

1.5 (5)

11 465 (25 276)

7602 (16 375)

5370 (11 548)

Ground Line

11 538 (24 797)

7368 (15 858)

5222 (11 233) 5189 (11 171)

-1.5 (-5)

12 495* (28 545*)

11 565 (24 844)

7309 (15 727)

-3.0 (-10)

21 868* (47 544*)

11 753 (25 259)

7413 (15 966)

-4.5 (-15)

16 500* (35 354*)

12 157 (26 177) KR46761,0000C2B -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-16

061517

PN=296

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.) Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9496* (20 636*)

8705* (19 093*)

4.5 (15)

14 206* (30 447*)

10 894* (23 562*)

9279* (20 190*)

3.0 (10)

17 742* (38 067*)

12 506* (27 011*)

9573 (20 571)

(36 850*)

13 399 (28 794)

9319 (20 037)

18 814* (42 867*)

13 127 (28 197)

9155 (19 685) 9117 (19 617)

1.5 (5) Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

12 495* (28 545*)

18 754* (40 705*)

13 059 (28 045)

-3.0 (-10)

21 868* (47 544*)

16 665* (36 066*)

12 606* (27 142*)

-4.5 (-15)

16 500* (35 354*)

12 776* (27 209*)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9213 (19 803)

6162 (13 179)

4.5 (15)

14 021 (30 255)

8801 (18 960)

6021 (12 922)

3.0 (10)

12 827 (27 693)

8285 (17 857)

5798 (12 462)

(26 125)

7868 (16 949)

5570 (11 982)

11 932 (25 647)

7634 (16 432)

5423 (11 666) 5389 (11 605)

1.5 (5) Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

12 495* (28 545*)

11 959 (25 693)

7575 (16 301)

-3.0 (-10)

21 868* (47 544*)

12 147 (26 109)

7679 (16 540)

-4.5 (-15)

16 500* (35 354*)

12 551 (27 027) KR46761,0000C2C -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-17

061517

PN=297

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9117* (20 100*)

8482* (18 700*)

4.5 (15)

13 449* (29 650*)

10 387* (22 900*)

8913* (19 650*)

3.0 (10)

16 874* (37 200*)

11 929* (26 300*)

8618 (19 000)

1.5 (5)

17 055* (37 600*)

12 111 (26 700)

8369 (18 450)

Ground Line

19 006* (41 900*)

11 816 (26 050)

8210 (18 100) 8187 (18 050)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

18 030* (39 750*)

11 771 (25 950)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

15 944* (35 150*)

11 907 (26 250)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 952* (26 350*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8369 (18 450)

5534 (12 200)

4.5 (15)

12 769 (28 150)

7938 (17 500)

5352 (11 800)

3.0 (10)

11 567 (25 500)

7416 (16 350)

5103 (11 250)

1.5 (5)

10 818 (23 850)

6985 (15 400)

4876 (10 750)

Ground Line

10 614 (23 400)

6736 (14 850)

4740 (10 450) 4717 (10 400)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

10 637 (23 450)

6690 (14 750)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

10 841 (23 900)

6804 (15 000)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 272 (24 850) KR46761,0000C2D -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-18

061517

PN=298

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9117* (20 100*)

8482* (18 700*)

4.5 (15)

13 449* (29 650*)

10 387* (22 900*)

8913* (19 650*)

3.0 (10)

16 874* (37 200*)

11 929* (26 300*)

8800 (19 400)

1.5 (5)

17 055* (37 600*)

12 338 (27 200)

8550 (18 850)

Ground Line

19 006* (41 900*)

12 043 (26 550)

8369 (18 450) 8346 (18 400)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

18 030* (39 750*)

11 975 (26 400)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

15 944* (35 150*)

11 975* (26 400*)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 952* (26 350*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8505 (18 750)

5625 (12 400)

4.5 (15)

12 973 (28 600)

8074 (17 800)

5466 (12 050)

3.0 (10)

11 771 (25 950)

7552 (16 650)

5216 (11 500)

1.5 (5)

11 022 (24 300)

7121 (15 700)

4990 (11 000)

Ground Line

10 818 (23 850)

6872 (15 150)

4831 (10 650) 4808 (10 600)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

10 841 (23 900)

6804 (15 000)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

11 045 (24 350)

6940 (15 300)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 476 (25 300) KR46761,0000C2E -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-19

061517

PN=299

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9117* (20 100*)

8482* (18 700*)

4.5 (15)

13 449* (29 650*)

10 387* (22 900*)

8913* (19 650*)

3.0 (10)

16 874* (37 200*)

11 929* (26 300*)

8958 (19 750)

1.5 (5)

17 055* (37 600*)

12 565 (27 700)

8709 (19 200)

Ground Line

19 006* (41 900*)

12 292 (27 100)

8550 (18 850) 8505 (18 750)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

18 030* (39 750*)

12 224 (26 950)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

15 944* (35 150*)

11 975* (26 400*)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 952* (26 350*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8641 (19 050)

5738 (12 650)

4.5 (15)

13 177 (29 050)

8210 (18 100)

5557 (12 250)

3.0 (10)

11 975 (26 400)

7688 (16 950)

5307 (11 700)

1.5 (5)

11 226 (24 750)

7257 (16 000)

5080 (11 200)

Ground Line

11 022 (24 300)

7008 (15 450)

4944 (10 900) 4921 (10 850)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

11 045 (24 350)

6963 (15 350)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

11 249 (24 800)

7076 (15 600)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 680 (25 750) KR46761,0000C2F -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-20

061517

PN=300

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.)

Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.) Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.) Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9117* (20 100*)

8482* (18 700*)

4.5 (15)

13 449* (29 650*)

10 387* (22 900*)

8913* (19 650*)

3.0 (10)

16 874* (37 200*)

11 929* (26 300*)

8890 (19 600)

1.5 (5)

17 055* (37 600*)

12 474 (27 500)

8641 (19 050)

Ground Line

19 006* (41 900*)

12 202 (26 900)

8482 (18 700) 8459 (18 650)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

18 030* (39 750*)

12 134 (26 750)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

15 944* (35 150*)

11 975* (26 400*)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 952* (26 350*)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

8596 (18 950)

5693 (12 550)

4.5 (15)

13 109 (28 900)

8142 (17 950)

5534 (12 200)

3.0 (10)

11 884 (26 200)

7620 (16 800)

5284 (11 650)

1.5 (5)

11 158 (24 600)

7212 (15 900)

5058 (11 150)

Ground Line

10 932 (24 100)

6963 (15 350)

4899 (10 800) 4876 (10 750)

-1.5 (-5)

13 177* (29 050*)

10 954 (24 150)

6895 (15 200)

-3.0 (-10)

21 001* (46 300*)

11 158 (24 600)

7008 (15 450)

-4.5 (-15)

15 490* (34 150*)

11 612 (25 600) KR46761,0000C30 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-21

061517

PN=301

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.)

Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.)

Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

8008* (17 528*)

4.5 (15)

10 108* (21 858*)

8700* (18 923*)

6425*

3.0 (10)

16 457* (35 331*)

11 834* (25 561*)

9303 (19 981)

6754 (14 472)

1.5 (5)

19 033* (41 053*)

13 049 (28 035)

9021 (19 386)

6633 (14 230)

Ground Line

19 818* (42 912*)

12 703 (27 279)

8815 (18 944)

6545 (14 055)

11 956* (27 138*)

19 291* (41 824*)

12 565 (26 977)

8725 (18 758)

19 673* (44 674*)

17 649* (38 194*)

12 615 (27 093)

8788 (18 924)

19 521* (41 956*)

14 491* (31 054*)

10 645* (22 511*)

-1.5 (-5) -3.0 (-10)

14 280* (32 048*)

-4.5 (-15) LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

6048 (12 947)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

8674 (18 668)

5876 (12 608)

4107

3.0 (10)

12 784 (27 579)

8137 (17 528)

5631 (12 095)

4019 (8587)

1.5 (5)

11 906 (25 643)

7667 (16 510)

5379 (11 562)

3908 (8366)

Ground Line

11 535 (24 800)

7369 (15 856)

5194 (11 165)

3827 (8204)

11 956* (27 138*)

11 470 (24 640)

7250 (15 594)

5114 (10 998)

19 673* (44 674*)

11 594 (24 913)

7293 (15 694)

5170 (11 147)

19 521* (41 956*)

11 913 (25 632)

7529 (16 249)

-1.5 (-5) -3.0 (-10) -4.5 (-15)

14 280* (32 048*)

KR46761,0000C31 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-22

061517

PN=302

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.)

Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.)

Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

8008* (17 528*)

4.5 (15)

10 108* (21 858*)

8700* (18 923*)

6425*

3.0 (10)

16 457* (35 331*)

11 834* (25 561*)

9604* (20 664)

7003 (15 009)

1.5 (5)

19 033* (41 053*)

13 321* (28 796*)

9338 (20 070)

6882 (14 768)

Ground Line

19 818* (42 912*)

13 140 (28 219)

9132 (19 628)

6794 (14 592)

11 956* (27 138*)

19 291* (41 824*)

13 002 (27 916)

9042 (19 442)

19 673* (44 674*)

17 649* (38 194*)

13 051 (28 032)

9105 (19 608)

19 521* (41 956*)

14 491* (31 054*)

10 645* (22 511*)

-1.5 (-5) -3.0 (-10)

14 280* (32 048*)

-4.5 (-15) LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

6249 (13 381)

6.0 (20) 4.5 (15)

8940 (19 242)

6077 (13 042)

4268

3.0 (10)

13 179 (28 428)

8402 (18 102)

5832 (12 529)

4180 (8936)

1.5 (5)

12 300 (26 492)

7933 (17 084)

5579 (11 995)

4069 (8714)

Ground Line

11 930 (25 649)

7635 (16 430)

5395 (11 598)

3988 (8553)

11 956* (27 138*)

11 864 (25 490)

7516 (16 168)

5314 (11 431)

19 673* (44 674*)

11 988 (25 762)

7558 (16 269)

5371 (11 580)

19 521* (41 956*)

12 307 (26 481)

7794 (16 823)

-1.5 (-5) -3.0 (-10) -4.5 (-15)

14 280* (32 048*)

KR46761,0000C32 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-23

061517

PN=303

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.)

Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

(14 716*)

6.0 (20)

7015* (15 348*)

5727* (11 021*)

4.5 (15)

7813* (16 997*)

6970 (14 924)

3.0 (10)

14 409* (30 952*)

10 708* (23 138*)

8838* (19 174*)

6821 (14 623)

1.5 (5)

17 673* (38 094*)

12 469* (26 955*)

9084 (19 515)

6656 (14 278)

6735* (15 416*)

19 386* (41 927*)

12 758 (27 392)

8816 (18 940)

6517 (13 989) 6443 (13 843)

Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

6807* (15 227*)

10 880* (24 662*)

19 638* (42 536*)

12 513 (26 857)

8657 (18 601)

-3.0 (-10)

11 398* (25 572*)

16 291* (36 941*)

18 694* (40 455*)

12 462 (26 753)

8629 (18 553)

-4.5 (-15)

16 873* (38 021*)

23 293* (50 183*)

16 436* (35 373*)

12 165* (26 067*)

8782 (18 456*)

16 669* (35 135*)

12 038* (25 239*)

8137*

-6.0 (-20) LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

(13 423)

6.0 (20)

6209 (13 301)

4281 (9104)

4.5 (15)

6002 (12 878)

4209 (8986)

3.0 (10)

13 323 (28 714)

8346 (17 969)

5722 (12 288)

4073 (8709)

1.5 (5)

12 230 (26 335)

7800 (16 788)

5425 (11 656)

3921 (8393)

6735* (15 416*)

11 610 (24 963)

7404 (15 925)

5186 (11 140)

3794 (8127) 3726 (7993)

Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

6807* (15 227*)

10 880* (24 662*)

11 375 (24 436)

7192 (15 463)

5043 (10 835)

-3.0 (-10)

11 398* (25 572*)

16 291* (36 941*)

11 385 (24 458)

7148 (15 373)

5018 (10 792)

-4.5 (-15)

16 873* (38 021*)

23 293* (50 183*)

11 593 (24 926)

7270 (15 659)

5155 (11 142)

16 669* (35 135*)

12 038* (25 239*)

7661

-6.0 (-20)

KR46761,0000C33 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-24

061517

PN=304

Miscellaneous—Specifications

Lift Capacity—Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) Ratings are at bucket lift hook, using standard counterweight, situated on firm, level, uniform supporting surface.

marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically-limited capacities. Remaining figures are stability-limited capacities.

Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.)

Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.)

Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.)

Power Dig: On LIFTING OVER FRONT Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

(14 716*)

6.0 (20)

7015* (15 348*)

5727* (11 021*)

4.5 (15)

7813* (16 997*)

7212* (15 462)

3.0 (10)

14 409* (30 952*)

10 708* (23 138*)

8838* (19 174*)

7070 (15 160)

1.5 (5)

17 673* (38 094*)

12 469* (26 955*)

9401 (20 198)

6904 (14 815)

6735* (15 416*)

19 386* (41 927*)

13 195 (28 331)

9133 (19 623)

6766 (14 526) 6692 (14 381)

Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

6807* (15 227*)

10 880* (24 662*)

19 638* (42 536*)

12 949 (27 797)

8974 (19 285)

-3.0 (-10)

11 398* (25 572*)

16 291* (36 941*)

18 694* (40 455*)

12 899 (27 693)

8945 (19 236)

-4.5 (-15)

16 873* (38 021*)

23 293* (50 183*)

16 436* (35 373*)

12 165* (26 067*)

8817* (18 456*)

16 669* (35 135*)

12 038* (25 239*)

8137*

-6.0 (-20) LIFTING OVER SIDE Load Point Height m (ft.)

Horizontal Distance from Centerline of Rotation 1.5 (5)

3.0 (10)

4.5 (15)

6.0 (20)

7.5 (25)

9.0 (30)

(13 856)

6.0 (20)

6409 (13 734)

4442 (9453)

4.5 (15)

6203 (13 312)

4370 (9335)

3.0 (10)

13 717 (29 563)

8612 (18 543)

5923 (12 721)

4234 (9058)

1.5 (5)

12 624 (27 185)

8065 (17 362)

5626 (12 090)

4082 (8741)

6735* (15 416*)

12 004 (25 812)

7669 (16 500)

5386 (11 573)

3955 (8476) 3887 (8342)

Ground Line -1.5 (-5)

6807* (15 227*)

10 880* (24 662*)

11 769 (25 286)

7458 (16 037)

5244 (11 269)

-3.0 (-10)

11 398* (25 572*)

16 291* (36 941*)

11 779 (25 307)

7414 (15 947)

5218 (11 226)

-4.5 (-15)

16 873* (38 021*)

23 293* (50 183*)

11 987 (25 775)

7536 (16 233)

5356 (11 576)

16 669* (35 135*)

12 038* (25 239*)

7927

-6.0 (-20)

KR46761,0000C34 -19-27MAR14-1/1

4-6-25

061517

PN=305

Miscellaneous—Specifications

4-6-26

061517

PN=306

Index Page Page

A Access Doors ..................................................................... 3-2-3 Adjustment Armrest ....................................................2-1-15, 2-1-16 Belt tension ............................................................ 3-9-4 Seat..........................................................2-1-15, 2-1-16 Track sag ............................................................... 3-3-2 Aftertreatment indicators overview ............................ 2-2-3 Aftertreatment system Emergency SCR override .................................... 2-3-13 Air Intake hoses........................................................... 3-8-4 Air cleaner Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6 Primary filter ....................................................... 3-9-6 Secondary filter .................................................. 3-9-6 Unloader valve ................................................... 3-9-7 Unloader valve ....................................................... 3-3-1 Air conditioner Cab ........................................................................ 2-1-8 Air conditioner display ............................................... 2-2-1 Air suspension Seat If equipped........................................................ 2-1-16 Alternative exit Tool ...................................................................... 2-1-11 Window ................................................................ 2-1-12 Alternator Precautions ............................................................ 4-1-3 Arm Lubricate ................................................................ 3-7-7 Arm regenerative valve Operational check ................................................ 4-2-35 Armrest Adjustment ...............................................2-1-15, 2-1-16 Attachments Adding safely ......................................................... 1-3-5 Operating safely..................................................... 1-3-5 Auto shutdown indicator ............................................ 2-2-1 Auto-idle Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Auto-idle circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-21 Auto-idle indicator...................................................... 2-2-1 Auxiliary Fuel filter and water separator (if equipped) ...................................................3-5-2, 3-8-4 Auxiliary function Lever If equipped.......................................................... 2-3-7 Auxiliary function enable Switch If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-7

Auxiliary function lever Power dig button If equipped.......................................................... 2-3-7 Auxiliary indicator ...................................................... 2-2-1 Avoid static electricity risk when fueling .................... 1-2-5

B Back Button..................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Backhoe pattern Control lever pattern check .................................. 4-2-25 Backover Accidents ................................................... 1-3-3 Battery Acid burns .............................................................. 3-7-4 Booster batteries.................................................... 4-1-6 Disconnect switch .................................................. 2-3-2 Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-7-4 Explosion ............................................................... 3-7-4 Handling, checking, and servicing ......................... 4-1-4 Replace.................................................................. 4-1-6 Specification........................................................... 4-1-6 Terminals................................................................ 3-7-4 Using charger......................................................... 4-1-5 Battery charger Using...................................................................... 4-1-5 Before starting work................................................... 2-3-1 Belt Tension adjust ........................................................ 3-9-4 BioDiesel fuel............................................................. 3-1-3 Blower speed Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Bolt and screw torque values Metric ................................................................... 4-1-21 Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-20 Boom Lubricate ................................................................ 3-7-7 Boom lower With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-25 Boom regenerative valve Operational check ................................................ 4-2-34 Boom up, arm in, and bucket combined function Operational check ................................................ 4-2-33 Boost starting............................................................. 4-1-6 Break-in engine oil Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV .............................................................. 3-1-10 Breaker ...................................................................... 3-2-5 Bucket Heavy-duty tooth, replace .................................... 4-1-14 Lubricate ......................................................3-5-2, 3-7-7 Teeth-TK series Replacing ......................................................... 4-1-14 Tooth, replace ...................................................... 4-1-13 Continued on next page

Index-1

061517

PN=1

Index

Page

Bucket Install Mud And Dirt (MAD) Seal Mud And Dirt (MAD) Seal .................................... 4-1-16 Bucket Install O-ring Seal O-ring Seal........................................................... 4-1-17 Bucket Install Split O-ring Seal Split O-ring Seal................................................... 4-1-18 Bucket loop Lifting point attachment Lifting................................................................ 2-3-28 Bucket regenerative valve Operational check ................................................ 4-2-36 Bucket Remove Remove Bucket.................................................... 4-1-15 Bucket remove and install Bucket .................................................................. 4-1-15 Bucket teeth-TK series Replacing ............................................................. 4-1-14 Button Back ....................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Home ..................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Horn ....................................................................... 2-1-3 Power dig ............................................................... 2-1-3 Power mode........................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2

Control lever pattern Conversion...............................................2-3-21, 2-3-22 Operation ............................................................. 2-3-20 Control lever pattern check - backhoe pattern Operational check ................................................ 4-2-25 Control lever pattern check - excavator pattern Operational check ................................................ 4-2-24 Control pattern........................................................... 1-2-2 Control valve lift check valve Operational check ................................................ 4-2-32 Control valves Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2 Conversion Control lever pattern ................................2-3-21, 2-3-22 Coolant Diesel engine Engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners.............. 3-1-16 Disposing ............................................................. 3-1-18 Mixing with concentrate, water quality ................. 3-1-17 Test ........................................................................ 3-9-7 Testing freeze point.............................................. 3-1-18 Warm temperature climates ................................. 3-1-17 Coolant filter Replace.................................................................. 4-1-2 Coolant level Surge tank.............................................................. 3-4-2 Coolant temperature gauge....................................... 2-2-1 Coolant temperature mark......................................... 2-2-1 Cooling system Clean...................................................................... 4-1-1 Deaeration ........................................................... 3-13-2 Drain .................................................................... 3-13-1 Fill ........................................................................ 3-13-2 Service safely......................................................... 1-4-1 Coupler, hydraulic Locking................................................................. 2-3-17 Lubrication ............................................................. 3-4-4 Unlocking ............................................................. 2-3-19 Cover Engine.................................................................... 3-2-4 Fuse box ................................................................ 2-1-1 Crusher...................................................................... 3-2-5 Cycle times check Operational check ................................................ 4-2-42 Cylinders Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2

C Cab Air conditioner ........................................................ 2-1-8 Fresh air filter, clean............................................... 3-8-6 Fresh air filter, replace ........................................... 3-8-6 Heater .................................................................... 2-1-8 Recirculating air filter, clean ................................... 3-8-6 Recirculating air filter, replace................................ 3-8-6 Cab dome light Switch .................................................................. 2-1-12 Cab door Window ................................................................ 2-1-13 Cab door release Lever ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Celsius and fahrenheit Selecting display .................................................... 2-1-9 Charge air cooler Clean...................................................................... 4-1-1 Clock.......................................................................... 2-2-1 Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18 Cold weather Starting................................................................... 2-3-4 Cold weather warm-up Engine.................................................................... 2-3-5 Compartment Storage .................................................................. 2-1-1 Console Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-16 Left ......................................................................... 2-1-1 Right....................................................................... 2-1-1

D Daily machine check.................................................. 2-3-1 Date Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18 Decals Safety...........................................................1-5-1, 1-5-8 Deck Rear ....................................................................... 2-1-1 Continued on next page

Index-2

061517

PN=2

Index

Page

DEF Baffle.................................................................... 3-11-2 Disposal ................................................................. 3-1-9 Dosing unit filter, changing................................... 3-10-1 Storing.................................................................... 3-1-8 Suction filter ......................................................... 3-11-2 Suction screen ..................................................... 3-10-2 Tank, clean............................................... 3-10-2, 3-11-2 Tank, refilling .......................................................... 3-1-7 Testing.................................................................... 3-1-8 Use in SCR equipped engines............................... 3-1-6 DEF baffle Inspect ................................................................. 3-11-2 DEF dosing unit filter Access ................................................................. 3-10-1 Changing.............................................................. 3-10-1 DEF tank Clean........................................................ 3-10-2, 3-11-2 DEF tank breather filter Replace................................................................ 3-11-1 Default screen ........................................................... 2-2-1 Diagnose malfunctions Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1 Diagnostic trouble code check Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1 Dial Engine speed ......................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Monitor ................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Diesel engine oil Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV .............................................................. 3-1-10 Service interval for operation at high altitude....... 3-1-11 Diesel engines, cold weather effect........................... 3-1-5 Diesel exhaust fluid Clean or replace....................................... 3-10-2, 3-11-2 Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge.............................. 2-2-1 Diesel fuel.................................................................. 3-1-1 Specifications......................................................... 3-1-1 Supplemental additives.......................................... 3-1-4 Diesel fuel specifications ........................................... 3-1-1 Diesel fuel, testing Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-4 Dig function drift Operational check ....................................4-2-29, 4-2-30 Display and clear trouble codes Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1 Display unit Emergency override menu................................... 2-2-24 Software update menu......................................... 2-3-15 Doors Access ................................................................... 3-2-3 Drain and refill capacities Specifications......................................................... 4-6-1 Driving Slopes .................................................................. 2-3-23

E E (economy) mode Operational check ................................................ 4-2-19 Effect of cold weather on diesel engines ................... 3-1-5 Electrical System ................................................................. 4-1-10 Electrical accessory Adding.................................................................... 4-1-8 Electrical control main switch .................................... 2-1-7 Electrical system Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-9 Emission system Certification label ........................................................ -8 Emissions Required language EPA .................................................................... 3-1-1 Engine Break-in.................................................................. 2-3-2 Cold weather warm-up........................................... 2-3-5 Coolant Test..................................................................... 3-9-7 Cover ..................................................................... 3-2-4 Oil drain and refill ................................................... 3-8-5 Oil filter, replace ..................................................... 3-8-5 Oil level check........................................................ 3-4-1 Specifications......................................................... 4-6-1 Starting................................................................... 2-3-3 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2 Valve lash Check and adjust.............................................. 3-10-2 Warming................................................................. 2-3-3 Engine coolant Disposing of ......................................................... 3-1-18 Engine cover Close...................................................................... 3-2-4 Open ...................................................................... 3-2-4 Engine oil Break-In Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV .......................................................... 3-1-10 Check level ............................................................ 3-4-1 Diesel Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV .......................................................... 3-1-10 Service interval for operation at high altitude ... 3-1-11 Drain ...................................................................... 3-8-5 Refill ....................................................................... 3-8-5 Engine oil and filter service intervals Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV 0.12 L/kW or greater oil pan ............................. 3-1-11 Operation at high altitude..................................... 3-1-11 Engine serial number................................................. 4-5-1 Engine speed Dial......................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Continued on next page

Index-3

061517

PN=3

Index

Page

Engine speed dial Operational check ................................................ 4-2-18 Engine valve lash Check and adjust ................................................. 3-10-2 Excavator pattern Control lever pattern check .................................. 4-2-24 Exhaust filter.............................................................. 1-2-7 Ash removal .................................................2-3-9, 3-3-3 Auto cleaning ......................................................... 2-3-8 Disable ............................................................. 2-2-20 Enable .............................................................. 2-2-20 Cleaning types ....................................................... 2-3-8 Emergency override Activation.......................................................... 2-2-24 Information ............................................................. 2-3-8 Natural/passive cleaning........................................ 2-3-8 Parked cleaning ..................................................... 2-3-8 Parked cleaning procedure .................................. 2-3-10 Restriction levels.................................................... 2-3-8 Scheduled maintenance ........................................ 3-3-3 Exhaust filter indicator ............................................... 2-2-1 Exhaust filter parked cleaning Switch .................................................................... 2-1-6 Exhaust Filter, Safety Safety, Exhaust Filter ............................................. 1-4-3

Front end pin joints Lubricate ................................................................ 3-7-7 Fuel BioDiesel................................................................ 3-1-3 Bleed system ......................................................... 4-1-1 Diesel ..................................................................... 3-1-1 Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2 Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-2 Fuel cooler Clean...................................................................... 4-1-1 Fuel filter Auxiliary (if equipped) Drain................................................................... 3-5-2 Replace .............................................................. 3-8-4 Final Replace .............................................................. 3-8-3 Primary Drain................................................................... 3-5-1 Replace .............................................................. 3-8-2 Fuel Filters Filters, Fuel ............................................................ 3-1-4 Fuel gauge................................................................. 2-2-1 Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3 Fuel mark................................................................... 2-2-1 Fuel system Bleed...................................................................... 4-1-1 Fuel tank Inlet screen Remove and clean ............................................. 3-3-1 Specification........................................................... 3-2-4 Fuel tank sump Drain ...................................................................... 3-5-1 Fuse Color codes.......................................................... 4-1-10 Replacing ............................................................. 4-1-10 Fuse box Cover ..................................................................... 2-1-1

F Filter Auxiliary fuel filter and water separator (if equipped) Drain................................................................... 3-5-2 Replace .............................................................. 3-8-4 Cab fresh air, clean ................................................ 3-8-6 Cab fresh air, replace............................................. 3-8-6 Cab recirculating air, clean..................................... 3-8-6 Cab recirculating air, replace ................................. 3-8-6 DEF tank breather Replace ............................................................ 3-11-1 Final fuel filter Replace .............................................................. 3-8-3 Hydraulic tank oil.................................................... 3-9-2 Pilot oil Replace .............................................................. 3-9-3 Primary fuel filter and water separator Drain................................................................... 3-5-1 Replace .............................................................. 3-8-2 Filters, Oil Oil Filters.............................................................. 3-1-12 Final Fuel filter ................................................................ 3-8-3 Fire extinguisher Mounting location................................................. 2-1-11 Fire prevention........................................................... 1-2-5 Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-5 Fluid sample Taking samples ...................................................... 4-1-7

G Grease Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-15 Specification......................................................... 3-1-15

H Hardware torque values Metric ................................................................... 4-1-21 Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-20 Hazards Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-2 Heater Cab ........................................................................ 2-1-8 Heater and air conditioner controls check Operational check ................................................ 4-2-45 Heater and air conditioning circuit check Operational check ................................................ 4-2-44 Continued on next page

Index-4

061517

PN=4

Index

Page

Heavy-duty bucket Tooth, replace ...................................................... 4-1-14 High-pressure fuel pump Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2 Home Button..................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Horn Button..................................................................... 2-1-3 Horn circuit Operational check .................................................. 4-2-2 Hour meter................................................................. 2-2-1 Check..................................................................... 3-2-1 Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3 HP (high power) mode Operational check ................................................ 4-2-20 Hydraulic Breaker .................................................................. 3-2-5 Oil level check........................................................ 3-4-3 Shutoff lever........................................................... 2-1-4 Hydraulic coupler Locking................................................................. 2-3-17 Lubrication ............................................................. 3-4-4 Serial number If equipped.......................................................... 4-5-3 Unlocking ............................................................. 2-3-19 Hydraulic oil Specification......................................................... 3-1-13 Hydraulic oil tank pressurization Operational check ................................................ 4-2-24 Hydraulic pump serial number................................... 4-5-3 Hydraulic system Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-7 Hydraulic tank Drain .................................................................... 3-12-1 Drain water and sediment ...................................... 3-7-2 Oil filter Replace .............................................................. 3-9-2 Refill ..................................................................... 3-12-1 Vent cap filter Replace ............................................................ 3-12-3

John Deere quick coupler Lifting ................................................................... 2-3-29 Jump starting ............................................................. 4-1-6

I Identification Manual ........................................................................ -3 Indicators overview.................................................... 2-2-3 Injection nozzle Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2

J JDLink........................................................................ 4-1-8 JDLink in-line fuse Switched power.................................................... 4-1-10 Unswitched power................................................ 4-1-10

K Key Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Key switch off, engine off Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1 Key switch on, engine off Operational check .................................................. 4-2-4 Key switch on, engine on Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14 Keypad ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Function ................................................................. 2-1-2

L Left Console.................................................................. 2-1-1 Left console Switch .................................................................... 2-1-4 Left pilot control Lever ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Left travel Lever ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Pedal...................................................................... 2-1-1 Lever Auxiliary function If equipped.......................................................... 2-3-7 Cab door release ................................................... 2-1-1 Left control ........................................................... 2-3-20 Left pilot control...................................................... 2-1-1 Left travel ............................................................... 2-1-1 Pilot shutoff ..................................................2-1-1, 2-1-4 Right control......................................................... 2-3-20 Right pilot control ................................................... 2-1-1 Right travel............................................................. 2-1-1 Steering.................................................................. 2-3-6 Levers Location ................................................................. 2-1-1 Lift capacity Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ................... 4-6-8 Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ................... 4-6-9 Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ................. 4-6-11 Arm: 2.10 m (6 ft. 10 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) ......................................................... 4-6-10 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ....................................... 4-6-12

Continued on next page

Index-5

061517

PN=5

Index

Page

Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ....................................... 4-6-13 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ....................................... 4-6-15 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 5.70 m (18 ft. 8 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) ............... 4-6-14 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ....................................... 4-6-16 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ....................................... 4-6-17 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ....................................... 4-6-18 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 700 mm (28 in.) ....................................... 4-6-19 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ....................................... 4-6-21 Arm: 2.67 m (8 ft. 9 in.); Boom: 6.40 m (21 ft. 0 in.); Bucket: 1273 kg (2806 lb.); Shoe: HEAVY DUTY 700 mm (28 in.) ............... 4-6-20 Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ...................... 4-6-22 Arm: 3.20 m (10 ft. 6 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ...................... 4-6-23 Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 600 mm (24 in.) ...................... 4-6-24 Arm: 4.0 m (13 ft. 1 in.); Bucket: 1170 kg (2580 lb.); Shoe: 800 mm (32 in.) ...................... 4-6-25 Lifting John Deere quick coupler .................................... 2-3-29 Lifting point attachment Bucket loop....................................................... 2-3-28 Machine ............................................................... 2-3-30 Lifting objects Special care ........................................................... 1-3-4 Lifting point attachment Bucket loop Lifting................................................................ 2-3-28 Light circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-10 Lighter/accessory power Port ..............................................................2-1-1, 2-1-3 Long-term storage Preparing engine.................................................... 4-4-3 Removing from....................................................... 4-4-4 Lower boom With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-25 Lower front Window ................................................................ 2-1-13 Lubricant Mixing..................................................................... 3-1-9

Lubricant Storage Storage, Lubricant.................................................. 3-1-9 Lubricants, Safety Safety, Lubricants .................................................. 3-1-9 Lubrication Hydraulic coupler ................................................... 3-4-4 Lubrication and maintenance 4500 hours/36 months Changing DEF dosing unit filter........................ 3-10-1 As required Clean DEF tank .................................... 3-10-2, 3-11-2 Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-2

M Machine Clean regularly....................................................... 4-1-8 Lifting ................................................................... 2-3-30 Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1 Specifications......................................................... 4-6-2 Machine modifications Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-2 Machine movement Unintended............................................................. 1-3-1 Machine position Maintenance .......................................................... 3-2-2 Machine stop warning, required .............................. 2-3-23 Machine tip over Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-4 Machine,inspect......................................................... 1-2-3 Main menu Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-13 Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-6 Information menu ................................................. 2-2-25 Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-27 Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-28 Operation.......................................................... 2-2-26 Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-27 Monitor ................................................................... 2-2-5 Radio.................................................................... 2-2-15 Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-17 Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-18 Auto-shutdown ................................................. 2-2-19 Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-23 Date and time ................................................... 2-2-18 Display item selection....................................... 2-2-23 Exhaust filter..................................................... 2-2-20 Language ......................................................... 2-2-23 Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-25 Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-22 Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-21 Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-24 Work mode........................................................... 2-2-16 Maintenance Machine position .................................................... 3-2-2 Schedule and record.............................................. 3-2-6 Manual Identification................................................................ -3 Continued on next page

Index-6

061517

PN=6

Index

Page

Mechanical control lever pattern Selector If equipped........................................................ 2-3-21 Mechanical suspension Seat...................................................................... 2-1-15 Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-21 Mixing lubricants........................................................ 3-1-9 Monitor....................................................................... 2-2-1 Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-13 Air condtioner display............................................. 2-2-1 Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-6 Auto shutdown indicator......................................... 2-2-1 Auto-idle indicator .................................................. 2-2-1 Auxililary indicator .................................................. 2-2-1 Clock ...................................................................... 2-2-1 Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-2-1 Coolant temperature mark ..................................... 2-2-1 Default screen........................................................ 2-2-1 Dial......................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge .......................... 2-2-1 Exhaust filter indicator............................................ 2-2-1 Fuel gauge ............................................................. 2-2-1 Fuel mark ............................................................... 2-2-1 Functions ............................................................... 2-2-2 Hour meter ............................................................. 2-2-1 Information menu ................................................. 2-2-25 Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-27 Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-28 Operation.......................................................... 2-2-26 Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-27 Main menu ............................................................. 2-2-5 Panel...................................................................... 2-1-1 Power mode indicator ............................................ 2-2-1 Radio.................................................................... 2-2-15 Radio display ......................................................... 2-2-1 Seat belt indicator .................................................. 2-2-1 Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-17 Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-18 Auto-shutdown ................................................. 2-2-19 Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-23 Date and time ................................................... 2-2-18 Display item selection....................................... 2-2-23 Exhaust filter..................................................... 2-2-20 Language ......................................................... 2-2-23 Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-25 Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-22 Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-21 Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-24 Start-up .................................................................. 2-2-4 Sub meter Breaker hour consumption ................................. 2-2-1 Fuel consumption ............................................... 2-2-1 Travel speed indicator............................................ 2-2-1 Work mode........................................................... 2-2-16 Work mode indicator .............................................. 2-2-1 Monitor and gauge circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-15

Monitor functions ....................................................... 2-2-2 Monitor start up Operational check .................................................. 4-2-5 Monitor, gauges and battery relay Operational check .................................................. 4-2-6 Motors Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2 Moutning location Fire extinguisher .................................................. 2-1-11

O Oil Change attachment................................................ 3-2-5 Engine Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, and stage IV .......................................................... 3-1-10 Engine filter ............................................................ 3-8-5 Hydraulic specification ......................................... 3-1-13 Hydraulic tank filter ................................................ 3-9-2 Pump drive gear case drain and refill .................... 3-9-4 Pump drive gear case specification ..................... 3-1-14 Swing gear case drain and refill............................. 3-9-1 Swing gear case specification.............................. 3-1-14 Travel gear case Check ................................................................. 3-7-6 Drain and refill .................................................. 3-10-2 Travel gear case specification ............................. 3-1-14 Oil cooler Clean...................................................................... 4-1-1 Oil level Engine.................................................................... 3-4-1 Hydraulic ................................................................ 3-4-3 Pump drive gear case ............................................ 3-7-3 Swing gear case .................................................... 3-7-1 Open crankcase ventilation (OCV) hose Clean...................................................................... 3-9-5 Operation qualification............................................... 1-2-1 Operational check Arm regenerative valve ........................................ 4-2-35 Auto-idle circuit .................................................... 4-2-21 Boom regenerative valve ..................................... 4-2-34 Boom up, arm in, and bucket combined function.. 4-2-33 Bucket regenerative valve.................................... 4-2-36 Control lever pattern check - backhoe pattern ..... 4-2-25 Control lever pattern check - excavator pattern ... 4-2-24 Control valve lift check valve................................ 4-2-32 Cycle times check ................................................ 4-2-42 Diagnostic trouble code check ............................... 4-2-1 Dig function drift .......................................4-2-29, 4-2-30 Display and clear trouble codes............................. 4-2-1 E (economy) mode............................................... 4-2-19 Engine speed dial ................................................ 4-2-18 Fuel gauge ............................................................. 4-2-3 Heater and air conditioner controls check............ 4-2-45 Heater and air conditioning circuit check ............. 4-2-44 Horn circuit............................................................. 4-2-2 Hour meter ............................................................. 4-2-3 Continued on next page

Index-7

061517

PN=7

Index

Page

HP (high power) mode ......................................... 4-2-20 Hydraulic oil tank pressurization .......................... 4-2-24 Key switch off, engine off ....................................... 4-2-1 Key switch on, engine off ....................................... 4-2-4 Key switch on, engine on ..................................... 4-2-14 Light circuit........................................................... 4-2-10 Monitor and gauge circuit..................................... 4-2-15 Monitor start up ...................................................... 4-2-5 Monitor, gauges and battery relay.......................... 4-2-6 Pilot shutoff circuit................................................ 4-2-16 PWR (standard) mode ......................................... 4-2-19 Rear camera .......................................................... 4-2-7 Reversing fan switch............................................ 4-2-17 Swing dynamic braking ........................................ 4-2-26 Swing park brake and circuit drift......................... 4-2-27 Swing power check .............................................. 4-2-28 Swing priority circuit ............................................. 4-2-31 Travel alarm ......................................................... 4-2-22 Travel alarm cancel switch circuit ........................ 4-2-23 Travel lever and pedal ........................................... 4-2-9 Travel speed selection ......................................... 4-2-37 Travel system maneuverability ............................ 4-2-41 Travel system tracking ......................................... 4-2-38 Travel system tracking while operating a dig function......................................................... 4-2-40 Windshield washer circuit .................................... 4-2-14 Windshield washer control ................................... 4-2-12 Windshield wiper circuit ....................................... 4-2-13 Windshield wiper controls .................................... 4-2-11 Operator conveniences ............................................. 1-1-1 Operator's Seat........................................................................ 2-1-1

Pins, metal Drive safely ............................................................ 1-4-2 Port Lighter/accessory power ..............................2-1-1, 2-1-3 Power dig Button..................................................................... 2-1-3 Power dig button Auxiliary function lever If equipped.......................................................... 2-3-7 Power mode Button..................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Power mode indicator................................................ 2-2-1 Pre-start inspection.................................................... 2-3-1 Primary Fuel filter and water separator .....................3-5-1, 3-8-2 Product identification number .................................... 4-5-1 Pump drive gear case Oil drain and refill ................................................... 3-9-4 Oil level check........................................................ 3-7-3 Pump drive gear case oil Specification......................................................... 3-1-14 Pumps Do not service ........................................................ 4-1-2 PWR (standard) mode Operational check ................................................ 4-2-19

Q Qualified emergency use SCR override option............................................. 2-3-13

P Panel Monitor ................................................................... 2-1-1 Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Parked cleaning Operation ............................................................. 2-3-10 Parking machine...................................................... 2-3-26 Parts, moving Stay clear ............................................................... 1-2-3 Pedal Left travel ............................................................... 2-1-1 Location ................................................................. 2-1-1 Right travel............................................................. 2-1-1 Steering.................................................................. 2-3-6 Periodic maintenance chart ....................................... 3-2-1 Pilot control lever Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-16 Pilot oil filter Replace.................................................................. 3-9-3 Pilot shutoff Lever ............................................................2-1-1, 2-1-4 Pilot shutoff circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-16 Pilot shutoff lever .............................................1-3-1, 2-1-4

Radiator Clean...................................................................... 4-1-1 Radio Operation ............................................................. 2-1-10 Settings ................................................................ 2-2-15 Radio display ............................................................. 2-2-1 Radio power and volume Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Radio tuning Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Rear Deck....................................................................... 2-1-1 Rear camera Clean lens .............................................................. 3-3-3 Operational check .................................................. 4-2-7 Rear left panel ........................................................... 2-1-3 Rear light Switch If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-5 Rear view camera Operation ............................................................. 2-2-22 Continued on next page

Index-8

061517

PN=8

Index

Page

Recognize Safety, information ................................................. 1-2-1 Refueling, avoid static electricity risk......................... 1-2-5 Regulator Precautions ............................................................ 4-1-3 Required machine stop warning .............................. 2-3-23 Required Parts........................................................... 3-2-8 Reversing fan Switch If equipped................................................2-1-4, 2-1-5 Reversing fan switch Operational check ................................................ 4-2-17 Riding machine.......................................................... 1-3-2 Right Console.................................................................. 2-1-1 Right console Switch .................................................................... 2-1-6 Right enable Switch ..........................................................2-1-6, 2-1-7 Right pilot control Lever ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Right travel Lever ...................................................................... 2-1-1 Pedal...................................................................... 2-1-1 Roll-over protective structure Torque values......................................................... 4-1-9 Roof exit cover......................................................... 2-1-14 ROPS Inspect ................................................................... 1-3-3 Maintain ................................................................. 1-3-3

Sample ports Fluid sample........................................................... 4-1-7 Schedule Periodic maintenance ............................................ 3-2-6 SCR System overview.................................................. 2-3-12 Screen Fuel tank inlet Remove and clean ............................................. 3-3-1 Seat Adjustment ...............................................2-1-15, 2-1-16 Air suspension If equipped........................................................ 2-1-16 Mechanical suspension........................................ 2-1-15 Operator's .............................................................. 2-1-1 Seat belt indicator...................................................... 2-2-1 Seat heater Switch If equipped................................................2-1-4, 2-1-5 Selecting display Celsius and fahrenheit ........................................... 2-1-9 Selector Mechanical control lever pattern If equipped........................................................ 2-3-21 Serial number Engine.................................................................... 4-5-1 Hydraulic coupler If equipped.......................................................... 4-5-3 Hydraulic pump ...................................................... 4-5-3 Machine ................................................................. 4-5-1 Swing motor ........................................................... 4-5-2 Travel motor........................................................... 4-5-2 Service 4500 hours/36 months Changing DEF dosing unit filter........................ 3-10-1 As required Clean DEF tank .................................... 3-10-2, 3-11-2 Service ADVISOR Remote Overview .............................................................. 2-3-14 Reprogramming ................................................... 2-3-14 Terms and conditions ................................................ -20 Service ADVISOR remote (SAR) Switch ..........................................................2-1-6, 2-1-7 Service intervals ........................................................ 3-2-6 Shoe Cap screw inspection............................................. 3-6-1 Slopes Driving up............................................................. 2-3-23 Software update Download and installation .................................... 2-3-15 Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-11 Specification Fuel tank ................................................................ 3-2-4 Grease ................................................................. 3-1-15 Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-19 Hydraulic oil ......................................................... 3-1-13 Machine ................................................................. 4-6-2 Pump drive gear case oil ..................................... 3-1-14

S Safety Add cab guarding for special uses...............1-2-1, 1-2-2 Caution decals ....................................................... 1-5-1 Clean debris from machine .................................... 1-2-8 Fire......................................................................... 1-2-6 Operator's seat ...................................................... 1-3-1 Protective equipment ............................................. 1-2-2 Warning decals ...................................................... 1-5-1 Safety features .......................................................... 1-1-1 Safety hazards Travel ..................................................................... 1-3-5 Safety signs ............................................................... 1-5-8 Hydraulic coupler ................................................... 1-5-8 Safety, high-pressure fluids Avoid high-pressure fluids...................................... 1-2-3 Safety, information Recognize .............................................................. 1-2-1 Sample Diesel fuel .............................................................. 3-8-6 Engine coolant ....................................................... 3-8-6 Engine oil ............................................................... 3-7-6 Hydraulic oil ........................................................... 3-8-6 Pump drive gear case oil ....................................... 3-8-6 Swing gear case oil................................................ 3-8-6 Travel gear case oil................................................ 3-8-6

Continued on next page

Index-9

061517

PN=9

Index

Page

Swing gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-14 Travel gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-14 Working ranges...................................................... 4-6-4 Specifications Drain and refill capacities....................................... 4-6-1 Engine.................................................................... 4-6-1 Start-up Monitor ................................................................... 2-2-4 Starting engine .......................................................... 2-3-3 Starting fluid, cold weather start ................................ 2-3-4 Steering Lever ...................................................................... 2-3-6 Machine ................................................................. 2-3-6 Pedal...................................................................... 2-3-6 Steps Use correctly Handholds .......................................................... 1-3-1 Storage Compartment ......................................................... 2-1-1 Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1 Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-2 Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2 Sub meter Breaker hour consumption..................................... 2-2-1 Fuel consumption................................................... 2-2-1 Surge tank Coolant level check................................................ 3-4-2 Swing Area cleaning ....................................................... 2-3-23 Swing bearing Lubricate ................................................................ 3-8-1 Swing bearing gear Lubricate ................................................................ 3-8-1 Swing dynamic braking Operational check ................................................ 4-2-26 Swing gear case Oil drain and refill ................................................... 3-9-1 Oil level check........................................................ 3-7-1 Swing gear case oil Specification......................................................... 3-1-14 Swing park brake and circuit drift Operational check ................................................ 4-2-27 Swing power check Operational check ................................................ 4-2-28 Swing priority circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-31 Switch Auto-idle................................................................. 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Auxiliary function enable If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-7 Battery disconnect ................................................. 2-3-2 Blower speed ......................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Cab dome light..................................................... 2-1-12 Exhaust filter parked cleaning................................ 2-1-6 Key......................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2

Left console............................................................ 2-1-4 Panel...................................................................... 2-1-1 Radio power and volume ....................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Radio tuning........................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Rear light If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-5 Reversing fan If equipped................................................2-1-4, 2-1-5 Right console ......................................................... 2-1-6 Right enable.................................................2-1-6, 2-1-7 Seat heater If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-4 Seat Heater If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-5 Service ADVISOR remote (SAR).................2-1-6, 2-1-7 Temperature control/mode ..................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Travel alarm ........................................................... 2-1-4 Travel alarm cancel................................................ 2-1-4 Travel mode ........................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Windshield wiper and washer ................................ 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Work light ............................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Switch panel .............................................................. 2-1-1 Functions ............................................................... 2-1-2

T Table Periodic maintenance ............................................ 3-2-6 Temperature control/mode Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Time Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18 Tip over Avoiding ................................................................. 1-3-4 Tool Alternative exit ..................................................... 2-1-11 Torque charts Metric ................................................................... 4-1-21 Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-20 Torque values Roll-over protective structure ................................. 4-1-9 Towing machine....................................................... 2-3-28 Track Sag....................................................................... 4-1-19 Sag adjustment ...................................................... 3-3-2 Sag check .............................................................. 3-3-2 Shoe, cap screw torque ......................................... 3-6-1 Track shoe hardware Check cap screws................................................ 4-1-19 Transport Loading machine.................................................. 2-3-27 Continued on next page

Index-10

061517

PN=10

Index

Page

Unloading machine .............................................. 2-3-27 Travel alarm Operational check ................................................ 4-2-22 Switch .................................................................... 2-1-4 Travel alarm cancel Switch .................................................................... 2-1-4 Travel alarm cancel switch circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-23 Travel gear case Oil Check ................................................................. 3-7-6 Drain and refill .................................................. 3-10-2 Travel gear case oil Specification......................................................... 3-1-14 Travel lever and pedal Operational check .................................................. 4-2-9 Travel mode Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Travel motor Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2 Travel speed indicator ............................................... 2-2-1 Travel speed selection Operational check ................................................ 4-2-37 Travel system maneuverability Operational check ................................................ 4-2-41 Travel system tracking Operational check ................................................ 4-2-38 Travel system tracking while operating a dig function Operational check ................................................ 4-2-40 Troubleshooting Electrical system .................................................... 4-3-9 Engine.................................................................... 4-3-2 Hydraulic system.................................................... 4-3-7 Software update................................................... 4-3-11 Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1

Upper front Window ................................................................ 2-1-12

U Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ............... 4-1-20 Unloader valve Air cleaner Check and clean................................................. 3-3-1 Replace .............................................................. 3-9-7

V Valve Air cleaner dust unloader ....................................... 3-3-1

W Warranty Non-road emissions control warranty statement--compression ignition CARB .....................................................................-11 EPA ......................................................................... -9 Welding On machine............................................................ 4-1-7 Welding repairs.......................................................... 1-4-2 Window Alternative exit ..................................................... 2-1-12 Cab door .............................................................. 2-1-13 Lower front ........................................................... 2-1-13 Upper front ........................................................... 2-1-12 Windshield washer circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14 Windshield washer control Operational check ................................................ 4-2-12 Windshield washer fluid............................................. 3-3-1 Windshield wiper and washer Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Windshield wiper circuit Operational check ................................................ 4-2-13 Windshield wiper controls Operational check ................................................ 4-2-11 Work light Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1 Function.............................................................. 2-1-2 Work mode indicator.................................................. 2-2-1 Work site hazards Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-2 Working ranges Specifications......................................................... 4-6-4 Working tool pivots Lubricate ................................................................ 3-5-2

Index-11

061517

PN=11

Index

Index-12

061517

PN=12